Ford - Bronco - Owners Manual - 2021 - 2021

2021 FORD BRONCO Owner's Manual The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2021 All rights reserved. Part Number: 202101 20210412183626 California Proposition 65 WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling. Table of Contents Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Hard Top .......................................................38 Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Soft Top ........................................................39 Contacting Us Contacting Us ..................................................15 Introduction About This Publication .................................17 Using This Publication .................................18 Child Safety Child Safety Precautions ...........................40 Child Restraint Anchor Points ...................41 Child Restraints ..............................................42 Installing Child Restraints ..........................44 Booster Seats .................................................48 Child Safety Locks ........................................50 Symbols Glossary Symbols Used on Your Vehicle .................19 Data Privacy Data Privacy .....................................................22 Service Data ....................................................23 Event Data ........................................................23 Settings Data ..................................................24 Connected Vehicle Data .............................24 Mobile Device Data .......................................25 Emergency Call System Data ...................25 Seatbelts Seatbelt Precautions ...................................52 Fastening and Unfastening the Seatbelts ...........................................................................53 Sensitive Locking Mode ..............................53 Automatic Locking Mode ...........................54 Adjusting the Seatbelts During Pregnancy ....................................................54 Seatbelt Reminder .......................................54 Checking the Seatbelts ..............................56 Seatbelt Extensions ......................................57 Visual Search Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise Control, Vehicles Without: Lane Keeping Aid .................................................26 Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control .............................................27 Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise Control/Lane Keeping Aid .....................28 Instrument Panel ..........................................29 Center Console - Manual Transmission ..........................................................................30 Center Console - Automatic Transmission ................................................31 Vehicle Interior - 2-Door ..............................32 Vehicle Interior - 4-Door .............................33 Front Exterior - 2-Door ................................34 Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Hard Top .......................................................35 Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Soft Top ........................................................36 Rear Exterior - 2-Door ..................................37 Personal Safety System™ What Is the Personal Safety System ..........................................................................58 How Does the Personal Safety System Work ...............................................................58 Personal Safety System Components ..........................................................................58 Airbags How Do the Front Airbags Work ..............59 How Do the Side Airbags Work ...............59 How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work ..........................................................................60 Airbag Precautions ........................................61 Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front Passenger Seats ........................................62 Children and Airbags ...................................62 1 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Front Passenger Sensing System ...........63 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......66 Disposing of Airbags ....................................67 Mislock ...............................................................79 Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting ...........................................................................79 911 Assist Keyless Entry What Is 911 Assist .........................................68 Emergency Call Requirements ................68 Emergency Call Limitations ......................68 Keyless Entry Limitations ...........................82 Keyless Entry Settings .................................82 Using Keyless Entry ......................................82 Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting ............83 Keys and Remote Controls Tailgate Remote Control Limitations .....................69 Using the Remote Control .........................69 Removing the Key Blade ............................70 Sounding the Panic Alarm .........................70 Locating Your Vehicle ..................................70 Changing the Remote Control Battery ...........................................................................70 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control ............................................................................71 Programming the Remote Control .........72 Keys and Remote Controls – Troubleshooting .........................................73 Opening the Tailgate ...................................84 Closing the Tailgate .....................................84 Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate .......84 Tailgate – Troubleshooting .......................86 Security Passive Anti-Theft System ........................87 Security – Troubleshooting .......................87 Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel ..................89 Horn ...................................................................89 Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On and Off ..................................................89 MyKey™ What Is MyKey ................................................74 MyKey Settings ...............................................74 Creating a MyKey ...........................................75 Programming a MyKey ................................75 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................75 Checking MyKey System Status ..............76 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems ........................................................76 MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................76 Wipers and Washers Wipers ...............................................................90 Switching the Rear Window Wiper On and Off .........................................................90 Reverse Wipe .................................................90 Checking the Wiper Blades ........................91 Replacing the Front Wiper Blades ...........91 Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades ...........92 Washers ............................................................92 Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting ..........................................................................9 3 Doors and Locks Operating the Doors From Outside Your Vehicle ...........................................................78 Operating the Doors From Inside Your Vehicle ...........................................................78 Autounlock .......................................................78 Autolock ............................................................79 Exterior Lighting Exterior Lighting Control ............................94 2 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Fuel Gauge .....................................................106 What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ...........................................................107 What Is the Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge ................................107 What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ................................................107 What Is the Information Bar ....................107 What Are the Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps ........................................107 Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps .....108 What Are the Instrument Cluster Indicators ...................................................109 Instrument Cluster Indicators ................109 Headlamps ......................................................94 Headlamps – Troubleshooting ................94 Autolamps .......................................................95 Exterior Lamps ...............................................95 Exterior Zone Lighting ..................................97 Automatic High Beam Control ................98 Automatic High Beam Control – Troubleshooting ......................................100 Interior Lighting Switching All of the Interior Lamps On and Off .........................................................101 Switching the Front Interior Lamps On and Off .........................................................101 Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On and Off .........................................................101 Interior Lamp Function ...............................101 Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting Brightness ..................................................102 Ambient Lighting .........................................102 Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting ......102 Instrument Cluster Display Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls ........................................................112 Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu ..........................................................................112 Trip Computer ................................................113 Personalized Settings .................................113 Windows Remote Start Opening and Closing the Windows ......103 Window Bounce-Back ..............................103 Locking the Rear Window Controls ......103 What Is Remote Start .................................114 Remote Start Precautions ........................114 Remote Start Limitations ..........................114 Enabling Remote Start ...............................114 Remotely Starting and Stopping the Vehicle ..........................................................114 Remote Start Remote Control Indicators ..........................................................................115 Remote Start Settings ................................115 Interior Mirror Interior Mirror Precautions .......................104 Manually Dimming the Interior Mirror ........................................................................104 Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror .................104 Exterior Mirrors Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors .................105 Folding the Exterior Mirrors .....................105 Identifying the Climate Control Unit ......117 Switching Climate Control On and Off ..........................................................................117 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off ..........................................................................117 Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster Overview .................106 What Is the Tachometer ...........................106 What Is the Speedometer .......................106 3 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Switching Air Conditioning On and Off ..........................................................................117 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off ..........................................................................117 Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off ..........................................................................117 Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Off .........................................................118 Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off ..........................................................................118 Setting the Blower Motor Speed ............118 Setting the Temperature ...........................118 Directing the Flow of Air .............................118 Auto Mode .......................................................119 Climate Control Hints ................................120 Front Seats Front Seat Precautions .............................126 Sitting in the Correct Position .................126 Manual Seats .................................................127 Power Seats ...................................................129 Heated Seats .................................................132 Rear Seats Manual Seats ................................................133 Rear Occupant Alert System What is the Rear Occupant Alert System .........................................................................136 How Does the Rear Occupant Alert System Work .............................................136 Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions .........................................................................136 Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations .........................................................................136 Switching Rear Occupant Alert System On and Off .................................................136 Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators .........................................................................137 Rear Occupant Alert System Audible Warnings .....................................................137 Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control Identifying the Climate Control Unit ......122 Switching Climate Control On and Off .........................................................................122 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off .........................................................................122 Switching Air Conditioning On and Off .........................................................................122 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off .........................................................................122 Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off .........................................................................122 Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Off .........................................................122 Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off .........................................................................123 Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........123 Setting the Temperature ...........................123 Directing the Flow of Air ............................123 Climate Control Hints ................................124 Garage Door Opener What Is the Garage Door Opener ..........138 How Does the Garage Door Opener Work .........................................................................138 Garage Door Opener Precautions .........138 Garage Door Opener Limitations ..........138 Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Hand-Held Transmitter .........139 Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Garage Door Opener Motor .........................................................................139 Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate Opener Motor .................140 Clearing the Garage Door Opener ........140 Interior Air Quality What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................125 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ..................125 4 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Reprogramming the Garage Door Opener ..........................................................................141 Garage Door Opener Radio Frequencies ..........................................................................141 Starting and Stopping the Engine Starting and Stopping the Engine – Precautions .................................................151 Push Button Ignition Switch .....................151 Starting the Engine .....................................152 Engine Block Heater ...................................153 Stopping the Engine ...................................154 Automatic Engine Stop .............................155 Accessing the Passive Key Backup Position .......................................................156 Starting and Stopping the Engine – Troubleshooting .......................................156 USB Ports Locating the USB Ports .............................142 Playing Media Using the USB Port ........142 Charging a Device ........................................143 Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet What Is the Power Outlet .........................144 Power Outlet Precautions ........................144 Locating the Power Outlet .......................144 Power Outlet Indicators ............................144 Start in Gear - Manual Transmission What Is Start in Gear ..................................159 Start in Gear Precautions .........................159 Start in Gear Limitations ..........................159 Using Start in Gear ......................................159 Start in Gear – Troubleshooting ............160 Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V Power Outlet What Is the Power Outlet .........................146 Power Outlet Precautions ........................146 Locating the Power Outlet .......................146 Auto-Start-Stop Wireless Accessory Charger What Is Auto-Start-Stop ...........................161 Auto-Start-Stop Precautions - Manual Transmission ..............................................161 Auto-Start-Stop Precautions Automatic Transmission .......................161 Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off ..........................................................................161 Stopping the Engine - Manual Transmission ..............................................161 Stopping the Engine - Automatic Transmission .............................................162 Restarting the Engine - Manual Transmission .............................................162 Restarting the Engine - Automatic Transmission .............................................163 Auto-Start-Stop Indicators .....................163 Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting .........................................................................163 What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger .........................................................................147 Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions .........................................................................147 Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger .........................................................................147 Charging a Wireless Device .....................148 Wireless Accessory Charger – Troubleshooting ......................................148 Storage Glove Compartment ..................................149 Center Console .............................................149 Under Floor Storage ...................................150 Glasses Holder .............................................150 Map Pocket ....................................................150 5 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Automatic Transmission Audible Warnings ......................................................181 Fuel and Refueling Fuel and Refueling Precautions ............166 Fuel Quality ....................................................167 Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel ................167 Running Out of Fuel ...................................168 Refueling ........................................................169 Fuel Tank Capacity .......................................171 Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting ..........................................................................171 Four-Wheel Drive How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work - 4x4 with Part Time Engagement ...............182 How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode .............182 Four-Wheel Drive Precautions ...............182 Four-Wheel Drive Limitations .................183 Switching Four-Wheel Drive On and Off .........................................................................184 Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode - 4x4 with Part Time Engagement ...............185 Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode .............186 Four-Wheel Drive Modes .........................186 Four-Wheel Drive Indicators ....................187 Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and Specification .............................................187 Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting .........................................................................187 Catalytic Converter What Is the Catalytic Converter .............173 Catalytic Converter Precautions ............173 Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting .........................................................................173 Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Precautions ........174 Shifting Into Reverse ...................................174 Crawler Gear ..................................................174 Recommended Shift Speeds ..................175 Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid Level ..............................................................176 Checking the Clutch Fluid Level .............176 Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Specification .............................................176 Clutch Fluid Capacity and Specification .........................................................................176 Manual Transmission – Troubleshooting ..........................................................................177 Electronic Locking Differential What Is the Electronic Locking Differential .................................................190 Switching the Electronic Locking Differential On and Off .........................190 Electronic Locking Differential Indicators ..........................................................................191 Electronic Locking Differential – Troubleshooting .......................................192 Automatic Transmission Brakes Automatic Transmission Precautions .........................................................................178 Automatic Transmission Positions .......178 Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear ...............179 Automatic Transmission Position Indicators ....................................................179 Manually Shifting Gears ...........................180 Brake Shift Interlock ..................................180 Brake Precautions .......................................194 Anti-Lock Braking System .......................194 Brake Over Accelerator .............................194 Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ...............................................194 Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ...............................................194 Checking the Brake Fluid ..........................194 6 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Stability Control Indicator .......................206 Brake Fluid Specification ..........................195 Brakes – Troubleshooting ........................195 Trail Control Electric Parking Brake What Is Trail Control ..................................207 Trail Control Limitations ...........................207 Switching Trail Control On and Off ......207 Setting the Trail Control Speed .............207 Canceling the Set Speed ........................208 Trail Control Indicators .............................208 Trail One Pedal Drive ................................208 Trail One Pedal Drive – Troubleshooting .........................................................................210 Trail Control – Troubleshooting ..............211 What Is the Electric Parking Brake .......198 Applying the Electric Parking Brake ......198 Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Emergency .................................................198 Manually Releasing the Electric Parking Brake ............................................................198 Automatically Releasing the Electric Parking Brake ............................................198 Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning ........................................................................199 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of Charge .........................................................199 Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting ........................................................................199 Trail Turn Assist What Is Trail Turn Assist ............................212 Trail Turn Assist Precautions ...................212 Trail Turn Assist Limitations .....................212 Switching Trail Turn Assist On and Off .........................................................................212 Trail Turn Assist Indicators .......................212 Trail Turn Assist – Troubleshooting ......213 Hill Start Assist What Is Hill Start Assist ............................201 How Does Hill Start Assist Work ...........201 Hill Start Assist Precautions ...................201 Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off Manual Transmission ............................201 Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off Automatic Transmission ......................201 Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting .......201 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect What Is the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect .........................................................................214 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Precautions .........................................................................214 Switching the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect On and Off .................................................214 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Indicators .........................................................................215 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Troubleshooting .......................................215 Traction Control What Is Traction Control ..........................202 How Does Traction Control Work .........202 Switching Traction Control On and Off ........................................................................202 Traction Control Indicator .......................202 Traction Control – Troubleshooting .....203 Hill Descent Control - Manual Transmission What Is Hill Descent Control ....................217 How Does Hill Descent Control Work ..........................................................................217 Hill Descent Control Precautions ...........217 Stability Control How Does Stability Control Work ........204 Switching Stability Control On and Off ........................................................................205 7 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Switching Hill Descent Control On and Off ..................................................................217 Setting the Hill Descent Speed ...............217 Hill Descent Control Indicator .................217 Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting .........................................................................218 Switching Cruise Control On and Off ........................................................................232 Setting the Cruise Control Speed .........232 Canceling the Set Speed .........................233 Resuming the Set Speed .........................233 Cruise Control Indicators ..........................233 Steering Adaptive Cruise Control Electric Power Steering .............................219 Steering – Troubleshooting ....................220 How Does Adaptive Cruise Control Work ........................................................................234 Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions ........................................................................234 Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations ........................................................................235 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and Off ........................................................237 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Speed ..........................................................237 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap ........................................................................238 Canceling the Set Speed .........................239 Resuming the Set Speed .........................239 Overriding the Set Speed ........................239 Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators ......240 Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control to Cruise Control ....................................240 Adaptive Cruise Control – Troubleshooting .....................................240 Parking Aids Parking Aid Precautions ...........................222 Switching Parking Aid On and Off ........222 Rear Parking Aid ..........................................223 Front Parking Aid .........................................223 Parking Aid Indicators ...............................225 Parking Aids – Troubleshooting ............225 Rear View Camera What Is the Rear View Camera .............226 Rear View Camera Precautions ............226 Locating the Rear View Camera ...........226 Rear View Camera Guide Lines .............226 Rear View Camera Object Distance Indicators ....................................................227 Rear View Camera Settings ....................227 G.O.A.T. Mode Control 360 Degree Camera What Is G.O.A.T. Mode Control ..............242 How Does G.O.A.T. Mode Control Work ........................................................................242 Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode ........................242 G.O.A.T. Modes .............................................243 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Troubleshooting ........................................................................246 What Is the 360 Degree Camera ..........229 How Does the 360 Degree Camera Work ........................................................................229 360 Degree Camera Precautions .........229 360 Degree Camera Limitations ..........229 Locating the 360 Degree Cameras ......230 360 Degree Camera Guide Lines .........230 360 Degree Camera Settings .................231 Lane Keeping System What Is the Lane Keeping System .......249 How Does the Lane Keeping System Work ............................................................249 Cruise Control What Is Cruise Control ..............................232 8 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Lane Keeping System Precautions ......249 Lane Keeping System Limitations .......249 Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off .......................................................250 Switching the Lane Keeping System Mode ...........................................................250 Alert Mode ....................................................250 Aid Mode .........................................................251 Alert and Aid Mode .....................................251 Lane Keeping System Indicators ...........252 Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting ........................................................................253 Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Off ........................................................................259 Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors .......................................................................260 Cross Traffic Alert Indicators .................260 Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting .........................................................................261 Pre-Collision Assist What Is Pre-Collision Assist ...................262 How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work ........................................................................262 Pre-Collision Assist Precautions ...........262 Pre-Collision Assist Limitations ............263 Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and Off ................................................................264 Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors ........................................................................264 Distance Indication ....................................264 Automatic Emergency Braking .............266 Evasive Steering Assist ............................266 Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting ........................................................................267 Blind Spot Information System What Is Blind Spot Information System ........................................................................256 How Does Blind Spot Information System Work ............................................256 Blind Spot Information System Precautions ...............................................256 Blind Spot Information System Limitations ................................................256 Blind Spot Information System Requirements - Manual Transmission ........................................................................256 Blind Spot Information System Requirements - Automatic Transmission ............................................257 Switching Blind Spot Information System On and Off ................................257 Locating the Blind Spot Information System Sensors .......................................257 Blind Spot Information System Indicators ...................................................258 Blind Spot Information System – Troubleshooting ......................................258 Driver Alert What Is Driver Alert ....................................269 How Does Driver Alert Work ...................269 Driver Alert Precautions ...........................269 Driver Alert Limitations ............................269 Switching Driver Alert On and Off ........270 Driver Alert Indicators ................................270 Driver Alert – Troubleshooting ...............270 Load Carrying Load Carrying Precautions .......................271 Locating the Safety Compliance Certification Labels ................................272 What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating .........................................................................272 What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .........................................................................272 Cross Traffic Alert What Is Cross Traffic Alert ......................259 How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work ......259 Cross Traffic Alert Precautions ..............259 Cross Traffic Alert Limitations ...............259 9 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Floor Mats .....................................................298 What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight .........................................................272 What Is the Gross Combined Weight Rating ..........................................................272 Calculating Payload ...................................274 Calculating the Load Limit ......................274 Roof Rack .......................................................276 Fender Anchor Points ................................279 Crash and Breakdown Information Roadside Assistance .................................299 Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Off ...............................................................300 Jump Starting the Vehicle ......................300 Post-Crash Alert System .........................302 Automatic Crash Shutoff ........................302 Recovery Towing .........................................303 Transporting the Vehicle .........................305 Rear Cargo Area Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points ............280 Connecting a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle Connecting a Trailer Precautions ..........281 Connecting a Trailer ....................................281 Connecting a Trailer – Troubleshooting ........................................................................282 Towing Your Vehicle Precautions .........306 Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle Manual Transmission ...........................306 Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle Automatic Transmission ......................307 Emergency Towing ....................................309 Towing Your Vehicle – Troubleshooting .......................................................................309 Towing a Trailer Towing a Trailer Precautions ..................283 Trailer Brake Precautions .........................283 Towing a Trailer Limitations ...................284 Loading Your Trailer ...................................284 Trailer Towing Hints ...................................284 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft ..............................285 Towing Weights and Dimensions .........286 Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting ......287 Fuses Fuse Precautions .........................................310 Under Hood Fuse Box ................................310 Body Control Module Fuse Box ..............314 Identifying Fuse Types ...............................317 Fuses – Troubleshooting ...........................317 Trailer Sway Control Maintenance How Does Trailer Sway Control Work ........................................................................288 Trailer Sway Control Precautions .........288 Switching Trailer Sway Control On and Off ................................................................288 Maintenance Precautions ........................318 Opening and Closing the Hood ..............318 Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .........................................................................319 Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................320 Engine Oil ........................................................321 Checking the Coolant ................................322 Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............326 Changing the Fuel Filter ...........................326 Driving Hints Off-Road Driving ........................................289 Cold Weather Precautions ......................297 Breaking-In ....................................................297 Driving Economically .................................297 10 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Changing the 12V Battery ........................326 Adjusting the Headlamps ........................329 Exterior Bulbs ...............................................330 Interior Bulbs ................................................332 Drive Belt Routing - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................332 Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................333 Checking the Tire Pressures ...................379 Inflating the Tires ........................................379 Inspecting the Tire for Wear ...................380 Inspecting the Tire for Damage ............380 Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems .......381 Tire Rotation ..................................................381 Removable Vehicle Components Tire Pressure Monitoring System Removable Windows ................................334 Removable Doors .......................................339 Removable Roof Panels ..........................343 Removable Hard Top .................................347 Removable Soft Top .................................348 Removable Fenders ....................................351 Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels 4-Door .........................................................352 Storing the Roof Panels - 2-Door .........359 What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System .......................................................383 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Overview ....................................................383 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Precautions ..............................................384 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Limitations ................................................384 Viewing the Tire Pressures ......................385 Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Troubleshooting .....................................385 Tire Care Vehicle Care Changing a Road Wheel Cleaning Products .....................................360 Cleaning the Exterior ................................360 Cleaning the Interior ..................................362 Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............364 Waxing Your Vehicle ..................................364 Changing a Flat Tire ...................................387 Wheel Nuts ...................................................392 Capacities and Specifications Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................393 Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................394 Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....395 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .....396 Engine Oil Capacity and Specification 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....................................397 Engine Oil Capacity and Specification 2.7L EcoBoost™ .....................................398 Cooling System Capacity and Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ......400 Cooling System Capacity and Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ........401 Storing Your Vehicle Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage ......366 Removing Your Vehicle From Storage ........................................................................367 Wheel and Tire Information Locating the Tire label ..............................368 Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................................368 Information on the Tire Sidewall .........369 Glossary of Tire Terminology ..................374 Tire Replacement Requirements ..........375 Using Snow Chains .....................................377 11 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Playing or Pausing the Audio Source .........................................................................414 Adjusting the Volume ................................414 Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off .........................................................................415 Switching Repeat Mode On and Off .........................................................................415 Setting a Memory Preset ..........................415 Muting the Audio .........................................415 Adjusting the Sound Settings .................415 Setting the Clock and Date ......................415 AM/FM Radio ................................................416 Switching the Display On and Off .........417 Digital Radio ...................................................417 Satellite Radio ..............................................418 Audio System – Troubleshooting ..........421 Identifying the Audio Unit .......................424 Fuel Tank Capacity .....................................401 Air Conditioning System Capacity and Specification ............................................402 Washer Fluid Specification .....................402 Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Specification ............................................403 Clutch Fluid Capacity and Specification .......................................................................403 Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity and Specification ...................................403 Brake Fluid Specification ........................404 Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and Specification ............................................405 Front Axle Fluid Capacity and Specification ............................................405 Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Specification ...........................................406 Vehicle Identification Center Display Overview Vehicle Identification Number ..............408 Center Display Precautions ....................425 Center Display Limitations ......................425 Status Bar ......................................................425 Feature Bar ...................................................426 Information On Demand Screen Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen .........427 Connected Vehicle What Is a Connected Vehicle ................409 Connected Vehicle Requirements .......409 Connected Vehicle Limitations ............409 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Network .....................................................409 Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Network .....................................................409 Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting ........................................................................410 Voice Interaction What is Voice Interaction ........................428 Setting the Wake Word ............................428 Beginning a Voice Interaction ................428 Voice Interaction Examples ....................428 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot ..........412 Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Name or Password .................................412 Phone Phone Precautions ......................................431 Connecting Your Phone ............................431 Phone Menu ..................................................431 Making and Receiving a Phone Call .....433 Sending and Receiving a Text Message ........................................................................434 Switching Text Message Notification On and Off .......................................................435 Audio System Audio System Precautions ......................414 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off .........................................................................414 Selecting the Audio Source .....................414 12 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Table of Contents Bluetooth® Ford Protect Connecting a Bluetooth® Device .........436 Playing Media Using Bluetooth® .........436 What Is Ford Protect .................................450 Scheduled Maintenance Apps General Maintenance Information .......452 Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........455 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance .............................................457 App Precautions ..........................................437 App Requirements .....................................437 Accessing Apps ...........................................437 Enabling Apps on an iOS Device ...........437 Enabling Apps on an Android Device ........................................................................437 Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off ........................................................................438 Switching Android Auto On and Off ....438 Customer Information Rollover Warning .........................................461 Our Sustainability Report .........................461 The Better Business Bureau Auto Line Program - United States of America .........................................................................461 The Mediation and Arbitration Program - Canada ....................................................462 Ordering a Canadian French Owner's Manual .......................................................462 Reporting Safety Defects in the United States .........................................................463 Reporting Safety Defects in Canada ........................................................................463 Radio Frequency Certification Labels .......................................................................464 California Proposition 65 - United States of America ................................................494 Perchlorate ...................................................495 Replacement Parts Recommendation .......................................................................495 Mobile Communications Equipment .......................................................................496 End User License Agreement ................496 Emission Law ................................................521 Export Unique Options .............................522 Navigation Accessing Navigation ...............................440 Navigation Map Updates ........................440 Adjusting the Map .....................................440 Live Traffic ....................................................440 Setting a Destination ................................440 Waypoints ......................................................441 Route Guidance ...........................................441 Vehicle System Updates Updating the Vehicle Systems Wirelessly ........................................................................443 Performing a Master Reset .....................444 Accessories Accessories ...................................................445 Auxiliary Switches What Are the Auxiliary Switches ..........447 Locating the Auxiliary Switches ............447 Locating the Auxiliary Switch Wiring ........................................................................447 Identifying the Auxiliary Switch Wiring .......................................................................449 Appendices Electromagnetic Compatibility .............524 13 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 14 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Contacting Us China - Imported Vehicle If you require assistance or clarification on policies or procedures, please contact the customer relationship center. Customer Relationship Center Telephone: 400-690-1886 Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/ United States China - Chang’An Ford Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center PO Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48126 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-888-658-6805 www.ford.com/help/contact/ Customer Relationship Center Telephone: 800-810-8168 Mobile: 400-887-7766 Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/ Asia Pacific E-mail: [email protected] Canada Caribbean, Central America and Israel Customer Relationship Center Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) www.ford.ca Facebook: FordServiceCA (English), FordServiceQC (Francais) Ford Motor Company Ford Export Operations Attention: Owner Relations 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, MI 48101 Fax: (313) 390-0804 Telephone: (313) 594-4857 E-mail: [email protected] Europe Telephone: 02035644444 E-mail: [email protected] Twitter: @forduk U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico Ford Motor Company Ford Export Operations Attention: Owner Relations 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, MI 48101 Telephone: (800) 841-3673 E-mail: [email protected] Australia Ford Motor Company Attention: Customer Relationship Centre Private Mail Bag 5 Fairlane Business Park #3 Campbellfield, Victoria, 3061 Telephone: 13 3673 (FORD) E-mail: [email protected] Argentina New Zealand Telephone: 0800-888-3673 Ford Motor Company Attention: Customer Relationship Centre Private Bag 76912 Manukau City 2241 Telephone: 0800 367 369 (FORDNZ) E-mail: [email protected] Brazil www.ford.com.br 15 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Contacting Us North Africa For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for more information about Ford Credit and access to an account manager, visit www.ford.com/finance. E-mail: [email protected] Sub-Saharan Africa E-mail: [email protected] Puerto Rico Ford International Business Development, Inc. P.O. Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan, PR 00922-1957 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) Fax: (313) 390-0804 E-mail: [email protected] www.ford.com.pr Middle East Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 21740 Dubai, United Arab Emirates Telephone: 80004441066 Toll-free number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 8008443673 Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi Arabia: 800850078 Kuwait: 22280384 Local telephone number for Kuwait: +965 1 898900 Fax: +971 4 3327266 E-mail: [email protected] www.me.ford.com South Korea Telephone: +82-02-1600-6003 E-mail: [email protected] Ford Credit - US Only Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. 16 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Introduction Our digital resources include a comprehensive digital Owner’s Manual dynamically created according to the features on your vehicle by using the vehicle identification number. See Locating the Vehicle Identification Number (page 408). The digital Owner’s Manual includes visual and full text search functions so that you can quickly locate the information you are looking for. It also includes links to a number of how-to videos created to help you understand some of the advanced technologies on your vehicle. ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Features and Options This publication describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It could describe options that are not available on the vehicle you have purchased. WARNING: You risk death, fire, or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Illustrations Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle in order to benefit from greater safety and pleasure from driving it. Use this publication to familiarize yourself with the basics and then read the digital version, that is available in your vehicle. You can also view the comprehensive manual through the FordPass app and through the local Ford website. Some of the illustrations in this publication could show features as used in different models, so they could appear different to you on your vehicle. Location of Components This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Note: To download the FordPass app, visit your device's app store. Note: To find the local Ford website, visit https://corporate.ford.com/operations/ locations/global-links.html. Note: Use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Note: Pass on all printed owner’s information when selling this vehicle. 17 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Introduction E154903 A Right-hand side. B Left-hand side. USING THIS PUBLICATION To quickly locate information about your vehicle, use the word search within the Owner's Manual application. 18 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Symbols Glossary Child seat tether anchor SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR VEHICLE E141128 Cruise control These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. E332905 Air conditioning system Do not open when hot Air conditioning system lubricant type Electric Parking brake Anti-lock braking system Engine air filter Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant E162384 E231157 Battery Engine coolant temperature Battery acid Engine oil Brake fluid - non petroleum based Explosive gas Brake system Fan warning Brake system Fasten seatbelt E270480 E71880 Cabin air filter Flammable E139223 E231160 Check fuel cap Airbag E67017 Child safety door lock or unlock Front fog lamps Child seat lower anchor Fuel pump reset 19 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Symbols Glossary Fuse compartment Passenger airbag deactivated E270850 Hazard flashers Power steering fluid Heated rear window Power windows front/rear Windshield defrosting system Power window lockout Requires registered technician Interior luggage compartment release E231159 Safety alert Jack E65963 See Owner's Manual Keep out of reach of children E161353 See Service Manual Lighting control E231158 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Low tire pressure warning Side airbag Maintain correct fluid level Shield the eyes Note operating instructions E167012 Stability control Horn control E138639 E270945 Hill descent control Panic alarm E163171 Trail control Parking aid E332910 E139213 Windshield wiping system Passenger airbag activated E270969 E270849 20 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Symbols Glossary Windshield wash and wipe E132353 21 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Data Privacy • WARNING: Do not connect wireless plug-in devices to the data link connector. Unauthorized third parties could gain access to vehicle data and impair the performance of safety related systems. Only allow repair facilities that follow our service and repair instructions to connect their equipment to the data link connector. • • Events or errors in essential systems, for example headlamps and brakes. System responses to driving situations, for example airbag deployment and stability control. Environmental conditions, for example temperature. Some of this data, when used in combination with other information, for example an accident report, damage to a vehicle or eyewitness statements, could be associated with a specific person. We respect your privacy and are committed to protecting it. The information contained in this manual was correct at the time of publication, but as technology rapidly changes, we recommend that you visit the local Ford website for the latest information. Services That We Provide If you use our services, we collect and use data, for example account information, vehicle location and driving characteristics, that could identify you. We transmit this data through a dedicated, protected connection. We only collect and use data to enable your use of our services to which you have subscribed, with your consent or where permitted by law. For additional information, see the terms and conditions of the services to which you have subscribed. Your vehicle has electronic control units that have data recording functionality and the ability to permanently or temporarily store data. This data could include information on the condition and status of your vehicle, vehicle maintenance requirements, events and malfunctions. The types of data that can be recorded are described in this section. Some of the data recorded is stored in event logs or error logs. For additional information about our privacy policy, refer to the local Ford website. Note: Error logs are reset following a service or repair. Services That Third Parties Provide Note: We may provide information in response to requests from law enforcement, other government authorities and third parties acting with lawful authority or through a legal process. Such information could be used by them in legal proceedings. We recommend that you review the terms and conditions and data privacy information for any services equipped with your vehicle or to which you subscribe. We take no responsibility for services that third parties provide. Data recorded includes, for example: • Operating states of system components, for example fuel level, tire pressure and battery charge level. • Vehicle and component status, for example wheel speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration and seatbelt status. 22 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Data Privacy you, where permitted by law. For Canada only, for more information, please review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage and use of service providers in other jurisdictions who may be subject to legal requirements in Canada, the United States and other countries applicable to them, for example, lawful requirements to disclose personal information to governmental authorities in those countries. SERVICE DATA Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada in Canada), and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic information for vehicle improvement or with other information we may have about you, for example, your contact information, to offer you products or services that may interest you. Data may be provided to our service providers such as part suppliers that may help diagnose malfunctions, and who are similarly obligated to protect data. We retain this data only as long as necessary to perform these functions or to comply with law. We may provide information where required in response to official requests to law enforcement or other government authorities or third parties acting with lawful authority or court order, and such information may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use connected apps and services, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used to provide services to you, personalizing your experience, troubleshoot, and to improve products and services and offer you products and services that may interest EVENT DATA This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating. • Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled/fastened. • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal. • How fast the vehicle was traveling. • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. 23 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Data Privacy Entertainment Data Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (for example name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Data recorded includes, for example: • Music, videos or album art. • Contacts and corresponding address book entries. • Navigation destinations. CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA The modem has a SIM. The modem was enabled when your vehicle was built and periodically sends messages to stay connected to the cell phone network, receive automatic software updates and send vehicle-related information to us, for example diagnostic information. These messages could include information that identifies your vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial number of the modem. Cell phone network service providers could have access to additional information, for example cell phone network tower identification. For additional information about our privacy policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or refer to your local Ford website. To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder. SETTINGS DATA Your vehicle has electronic control units that have the ability to store data based on your personalized settings. The data is stored locally in the vehicle or on devices that you connect to it, for example, a USB drive or digital music player. You can delete some of this data and also choose whether to share it through the services to which you subscribe. Note: The modem continues to send this information unless you disable the modem or stop the modem from sharing vehicle data by changing the modem settings. See Connected Vehicle (page 409). Note: The service can be unavailable or interrupted for a number of reasons, for example environmental or topographical conditions and data plan coverage. Comfort and Convenience Data Data recorded includes, for example: • Seat and steering wheel position. • Climate control settings. • Radio presets. Note: To find out if your vehicle has a modem, visit www.FordConnected.com. 24 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Data Privacy The cell phone profile, media device index and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when you connect your cell phone or media device. If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you use the master reset function to erase the stored information. See Performing a Master Reset (page 444). MOBILE DEVICE DATA If you connect a mobile device to your vehicle, you can display data from your device on the touchscreen for example, music and album art. You can share your vehicle data with mobile apps on your device through the system. See App Requirements (page 437). The mobile apps function operates by your connected device sending data to us in the United States. The data is encrypted and includes, for example, the vehicle identification number of your vehicle, the SYNC module serial number, odometer, enabled apps, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain it only as long as necessary to provide the service, to troubleshoot, for continuous improvement and to offer you products and services that may be of interest to you according to your preferences and where allowed by law. System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's module. For additional information about our privacy policy, refer to the local Ford website. Note: To find out if your vehicle has connectivity technology, visit www.FordConnected.com. EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM DATA If you connect a cell phone to the system, the system creates a profile that links to that cell phone. The cell phone profile enables more mobile features and efficient operation. The profile contains, for example data from your phonebook, read and unread text messages and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. When the emergency call system is active, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to the emergency call system may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to emergency services operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist emergency services operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the emergency call system. If you connect a media device, the system creates and retains a media device index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. Note: You cannot deactivate emergency call systems that are required by law. 25 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: CRUISE CONTROL, VEHICLES WITHOUT: LANE KEEPING AID A B H C D F G E331277 A See Setting the Cruise Control Speed (page 232). B See Switching Cruise Control On and Off (page 232). C See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112). D See What is Voice Interaction (page 428). E See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112). F See Playing or Pausing the Audio Source (page 414). G See Adjusting the Volume (page 414). H See Resuming the Set Speed (page 233). 26 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing E Visual Search STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL A B I C D E G H E347990 A See Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Speed (page 237). B See Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap (page 238). C See Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off (page 250). D See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112). E See What is Voice Interaction (page 428). F See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112). G See Playing or Pausing the Audio Source (page 414). H See Adjusting the Volume (page 414). I See Resuming the Set Speed (page 239). 27 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing F Visual Search STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: CRUISE CONTROL/LANE KEEPING AID A B I C D E G H E347991 A See Setting the Cruise Control Speed (page 232). B See Switching Cruise Control On and Off (page 232). C See Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off (page 250). D See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112). E See What is Voice Interaction (page 428). F See Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls (page 112). G See Playing or Pausing the Audio Source (page 414). H See Adjusting the Volume (page 414). I See Resuming the Set Speed (page 233). 28 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing F Visual Search INSTRUMENT PANEL A E C F B D I H G E331278 A See Exterior Lighting Control (page 94). B See Instrument Cluster Overview (page 106). C See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 152). See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 152). D See Feature Bar (page 426). E See Switching the Audio Unit On and Off (page 414). F See Opening the Glove Compartment (page 149). G See Identifying the Climate Control Unit (page 117). H See Applying the Electric Parking Brake (page 198). I See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 318). 29 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search CENTER CONSOLE - MANUAL TRANSMISSION A B C D E341673 A See Locating the Power Outlet (page 146). B See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185). C See Shifting Into Reverse (page 174). D See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105). E See Opening and Closing the Windows (page 103). 30 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing E Visual Search CENTER CONSOLE - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A B C E331506 A See Locating the Power Outlet (page 146). B See Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear (page 179). C See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185). D See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105). E See Opening and Closing the Windows (page 103). 31 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing D E Visual Search VEHICLE INTERIOR - 2-DOOR A B C E331279 A See Moving the Seat Backward and Forward (page 128). B See Folding the Seats (page 134). C See Locating the Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points (page 280). 32 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search VEHICLE INTERIOR - 4-DOOR A B C E341609 A See Moving the Seat Backward and Forward (page 128). B See Adjusting the Seat Backrest (page 134). C See Locating the Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points (page 280). 33 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search FRONT EXTERIOR - 2-DOOR A B E D C E331280 A See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 230). B See Removing and Installing the Front Roof Panel (page 343). C See Removing and Installing the Doors (page 339). D See Removing the Fender Flares (page 351). E See Accessing the Front Towing Point (page 303). 34 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search FRONT EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: HARD TOP A B E D C E341196 A See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 230). B See Removing and Installing the Front Roof Panel (page 343). C See Removing and Installing the Doors (page 339). D See Removing the Fender Flares (page 351). E See Accessing the Front Towing Point (page 303). 35 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search FRONT EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: SOFT TOP A B E D E341712 A See Locating the 360 Degree Cameras (page 230). B See Opening and Closing the Soft Top (page 348). C See Removing and Installing the Doors (page 339). D See Removing the Fender Flares (page 351). E See Accessing the Front Towing Point (page 303). 36 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing C Visual Search REAR EXTERIOR - 2-DOOR A B C D E E331281 A See Changing a Flat Tire (page 387). B See Removing and Installing the Rear Roof Panel (page 344). C See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105). D See Storing the Roof Panels (page 359). E See Recommended Towing Weights (page 286). 37 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search REAR EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: HARD TOP A C B D E E341633 A See Changing a Flat Tire (page 387). B See Removing and Installing the Rear Roof Panel (page 346). C See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105). D See Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels (page 352). E See Recommended Towing Weights (page 286). 38 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Visual Search REAR EXTERIOR - 4-DOOR, VEHICLES WITH: SOFT TOP A B C F D E E341713 A See Changing a Flat Tire (page 387). B See Removing and Installing the Rear Window (page 337). C See Removing and Installing the Soft Top (page 350). D See Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors (page 105). E See Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels (page 352). F See Recommended Towing Weights (page 286). 39 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety CHILD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, base their recommendations for child restraints on probable child height, age and weight thresholds, or on the minimum requirements of the law. We recommend that you check with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) to make sure that you properly install the child restraint in your vehicle and that you consult your pediatrician to make sure you have a child restraint appropriate for your child. To locate a child restraint fitting station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain children in child restraints made especially for their height, age and weight, may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death. 40 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety • WARNING: Do not allow a passenger to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the child restraint, with the tongue between the child restraint and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking mode. • WARNING: Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child's height. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR POINTS WHAT ARE THE CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR POINTS WARNING: Properly secure child restraints or booster seats when they are not in use. They could become projectiles in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Anchor points allow you to quickly and safely install a child restraint. LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT LOWER ANCHOR POINTS WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. 2-Door WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. When installing a child restraint with seatbelts: • Place the vehicle seat in the upright position before you install the child restraint. • Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that seating position. • Insert the belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. E328020 41 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety 4-Door 4-Door E323300 E323301 LOCATING THE CHILD RESTRAINT TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINTS CHILD RESTRAINTS 2-Door CHILD RESTRAINT POSITION INFORMATION Install the child restraint tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. E328021 Rear Facing Child Restraints Combined Weight of Child and Child Restraint LATCH (Lower Anchors Only) Seatbelt Only Up to 65 lb (29 kg) X X Over 65 lb (29 kg) X 42 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety Forward Facing Child Restraints Combined Weight of Child and Child Restraint LATCH (Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor) Seatbelt and Top Tether Anchor Seatbelt and LATCH (Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor) Up to 65 lb (29 kg) X X X X X Over 65 lb (29 kg) 43 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety CHILD RESTRAINTS RECOMMENDATION Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint Type Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Use a child restraint (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat). Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child restraint (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Use a belt-positioning booster seat. Children who have outgrown or no longer properly Use a vehicle seatbelt having the fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally chil- lap belt snug and low across the dren who are at least 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater hips, shoulder belt centered across than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended the shoulder and chest, and seat by child restraint manufacturer). backrest upright. You are required by law to properly use child restraints for infants and toddlers in the United States, Canada and Mexico. INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. USING SEATBELTS WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. When possible, properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. When installing a rear facing child restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to avoid interference between the child restraint and the vehicle seat in front of the child restraint. Note: Although the child restraint illustrated is a forward facing child restraint, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child restraint. Perform the following steps when installing a child restraint with seatbelts. 44 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety 1. Position the child restraint in a seat with a seatbelt. E142531 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for that seating position until the latch engages. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E142529 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. E142875 E142530 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until you pull all of the seatbelt out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Make sure you did not twist the belt webbing. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The seatbelt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 45 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety 7. Pull the seatbelt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. You should not be able to pull more belt out. If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142534 10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement. E142533 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle helps to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. If the child restraint has a tether strap, attach it. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. USING LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR CHILDREN WARNING: Do not attach two child safety restraints to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety restraint attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. 46 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety INSTALLING A CHILD RESTRAINT IN A CENTER SEAT WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle. The Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system has three vehicle anchor points: • • You cannot install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at the center seating position. You can only use LATCH compatible child restraints, with attachments on belt webbing, at this seating position provided that the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child restraint to any lower anchor if another child restraint is attached to that anchor. Two lower anchors where the vehicle seat backrest and seat cushion meet, called the seat bight. One top tether anchor behind that seating position. LATCH compatible child restraints have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments. These attachments connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child restraint. Each time you use the child restraint, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child restraint from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in (2.5 cm). However, you can still use the seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the lower anchors are not used. For forward facing child restraints, you must also attach the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child restraint. If you did not properly anchor the child restraint, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. COMBINING THE SEATBELT AND LOWER ANCHORS FOR ATTACHING CHILD RESTRAINTS Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child restraints with tether straps. When used in combination, you may attach the seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if it is included with the child restraint. 47 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety USING TETHER STRAPS Many forward-facing child restraints include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child restraint and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older child restraints. Contact the manufacturer of your child restraint for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your child restraint does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle. E193589 2. Locate the correct anchor behind the gap cover for the selected seating position. Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping the child restraint just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. E142539 Once you have installed the child restraint using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap. 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. 4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Route the child restraint tether strap over the back of the seat. For the outermost seating positions, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. For vehicles with a center seating position, route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint. If needed, you can also remove the head restraints. Note: The head restraints are not removable on 2-door vehicles. If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. BOOSTER SEATS Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child restraint and meet the following criteria. 48 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety • • • Types of Booster Seats Generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall. Are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12). Are between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Booster seats should be used until you can answer yes to all of these questions when seated without a booster seat: E68924 • Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat backrest or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head, as measured at the tops of the ears, above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat backrest or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high-back booster seat. E142595 • • • • • Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat backrest with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion? Can the child sit without slouching? Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? E70710 Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. • High-back booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high-back booster seat would be a better choice. 49 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips. E142596 E142597 If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not use any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: You cannot open the rear doors from inside if you have put the child safety locks on. 50 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Child Safety E238364 A child safety lock is on the rear edge of each rear door. Switch the child safety lock separately on each door. Left-Hand Side Turn the key clockwise to switch the child lock on and counterclockwise to switch it off. Right-Hand Side Turn the key counterclockwise to switch the child lock on and clockwise to switch it off. 51 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Seatbelts SEATBELT PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Children must always be properly restrained. WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly made up of one buckle and one tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for more than one person. WARNING: Do not allow a passenger to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. WARNING: If your vehicle is involved in a crash, have the seatbelts and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the vehicle should properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. The seatbelt system consists of: • Lap and shoulder seatbelts. • A shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking mode, except driver seatbelt. • Seatbelt pretensioners at the front outermost and rear outermost seating positions. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. ·A seatbelt warning light and chime. E71880 52 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Seatbelts · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. Note: It may lock if you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope. E67017 2. Insert the tongue into the buckle. 3. Pull the seatbelt tight to remove any slack. The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. In side crashes and rollovers, the pretensioners will be activated when the Safety Canopy is activated. Unfastening the Seatbelts 1. Press the red button on the buckle to release the seatbelt. 2. Hold the seatbelt tongue and let it retract completely and smoothly to its stowed position. FASTENING AND UNFASTENING THE SEATBELTS SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE WHAT IS SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE All seatbelts in your vehicle are a three-point combination lap and shoulder seatbelt. Sensitive locking mode is a seatbelt retractor feature that allows shoulder belt length adjustment according to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. HOW DOES SENSITIVE LOCKING MODE WORK If the driver suddenly brakes, turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the seatbelts lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. A In addition, the seatbelt retractor locks if you pull the seatbelt webbing out too quickly. If the retractor does not unlock, pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. B E338014 1. A Seatbelt tongue. B Seatbelt buckle. Note: When driving off-road or at a severe angle, the seatbelt mechanism locks. It does not allow you to pull the seatbelt webbing out until your vehicle is on nearly level ground. Pull the seatbelt out steadily. 53 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Seatbelts ADJUSTING THE SEATBELTS DURING PREGNANCY AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE WHAT IS AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and properly fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of the seatbelt snugly and low across the hips. Position the shoulder portion of the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant women must follow this practice. See the following figure. This is a safety feature built into the seatbelt retractors that keeps the seatbelts pre-locked. ENGAGING AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE E142591 E142590 1. Fasten the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until you pull the entire belt out. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. Pregnant women should always wear their seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. SEATBELT REMINDER DISENGAGING AUTOMATIC LOCKING MODE HOW DOES THE SEATBELT REMINDER WORK Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive locking mode. WARNING: The system will only provide protection when you use the seatbelt correctly. 54 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Seatbelts This system monitors all seating positions and provides audio and graphic feedback. SEATBELT REMINDER INDICATORS This lamp illuminates if you do not fasten your seatbelt when E71880 you switch the ignition on. The lamp switches off when you fasten your seatbelt or about one minute has elapsed. E352170 When the initial warning expires for the driver, more warnings are provided for the driver and front passenger. This lamp illuminates if you or your front passenger do not fasten the seatbelt buckle and the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h). This warning displays if an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt buckle or it becomes unfastened. Note: Seatbelt reminder indicators may vary between 2-door and 4-door vehicles. Vehicle system updates could change the functionality. Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do not place large objects on the seat. Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle to begin with, the warning will not display. Note: Front seating positions appear in this warning display. Warnings for unfastened front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial warning lamp. Note: Vehicles with two doors do not have a rear center seating position. Seatbelt Status E352172 To view the seatbelt status, use the information display controls on the steering wheel. This lamp illuminates when you switch the ignition on, identifying the number of seating positions with fastened buckles. It illuminates again when a seating position changes from unfastened to fastened. 55 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Seatbelts Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot disable the seatbelt reminder. Also, if the seatbelt reminder has been previously disabled, it will be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 74). Read Steps 1 - 4 before proceeding with the programming procedure. Make sure that: • The parking brake is set. • The transmission is in park (P). • The ignition is off. • The driver and front passenger seatbelts are unfastened. E352171 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the engine. 2. After Step 1, wait an additional five seconds before proceeding with Step 3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 30 seconds. 3. For the seating position you are switching off, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt four times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light switches on. 4. When the seatbelt warning light is on, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt. After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light flashes for confirmation. E274703 A Seatbelt fastened. B Seatbelt not fastened. C Seatbelt recently unfastened. D Fault. SWITCHING THE SEATBELT REMINDER ON AND OFF This switches the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on. WARNING: While the system allows you to deactivate it, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. This switches the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off. CHECKING THE SEATBELTS Check the seatbelts and child restraints periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this cancels the process. 56 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Seatbelts Check all of the following seatbelt assemblies after a crash. • • • • • • WARNING: Only use extensions provided free of charge by our dealers. The dealer will provide an extension designed specifically for this vehicle, model year and seating position. The use of an extension intended for another vehicle, model year or seating position may not offer you the full protection of your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system. Retractors. Buckles. Front seatbelt buckle assemblies. Buckle support assemblies. Child restraint LATCH and tether anchors. Attaching hardware. WARNING: Never use seatbelt extensions to install child restraints. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the way the seatbelt fits across the torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to reach. We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be checked and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fasten the seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an extension that is compatible with the seatbelts is available free of charge from our dealers. Only use our seatbelt extensions made by the original equipment seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your extension is compatible with your vehicle restraint system. Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning the Interior (page 364). SEATBELT EXTENSIONS WARNING: Persons who fit into the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an extension. Unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of a crash. 57 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Personal Safety System™ • WHAT IS THE PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM • An advanced safety system that protects occupants in frontal crashes. HOW DOES THE PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM WORK This system provides an improved level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system analyzes occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, and one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions. PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM COMPONENTS • • • • • • • • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. Front seat outermost seatbelts with pretensioners, energy management retractors and seatbelt usage sensors. Driver seat position sensor. Passenger seat position sensor. Front passenger sensing system. Passenger airbag off and on indicators. Front crash severity sensors. Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. 58 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Restraint system warning light and tone. The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front seatbelt usage sensors, front passenger sensing system and indicator lights. Airbags compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. HOW DO THE FRONT AIRBAGS WORK Contact with a deploying airbag may cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. E151127 The driver and front passenger airbags deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes. The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of: • Driver and passenger airbag modules. • Front passenger sensing system. • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 66). Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. HOW DO THE SIDE AIRBAGS WORK The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the seatbelts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the front seat backrests, or in areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. WARNING: Accessory seat covers not released by Ford Motor Company could prevent the deployment of the airbags and increase the risk of injuries in a crash. The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium 59 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Airbags HOW DOES THE SAFETY CANOPY™ WORK WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side rail trim or A-pillar. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The side airbags are on the outermost side of the seat backrests of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollovers, the airbags will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided to occupants in side impact crashes. WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag. The Safety Canopy deploys during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal, behind the side rail trim, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy inflates between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events. E152533 The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. • Side airbags inside the driver and front passenger seat backrests. • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 66). E75004 60 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Airbags The system consists of the following: • Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the side rail trim or the roof-pillar trim. • Side rail trim which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment 2-Door · Crash sensors and monitoring system with a readiness E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 66). AIRBAG PRECAUTIONS E339112 WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the side rail trim above the doors along the side window opening. WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the side rail trim or A-pillar that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death. 4-Door E339113 WARNING: Do not place your arms on the airbag cover or through the steering wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. 61 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Airbags PROPERLY ADJUSTING THE DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER SEATS WARNING: Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. Objects could become projectiles during airbag deployment. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's chest and the driver airbag module. WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag. WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position. WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated occupants sit upright, lean against the seat backrest, and center themselves on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash greatly increases. WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation. WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. CHILDREN AND AIRBAGS WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 62 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Airbags E181984 The indicator lamps are in the center stack of the instrument panel. The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable the front passenger frontal airbag under these conditions: • The front passenger seat is unoccupied. • The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint. • A passenger takes their weight off of the seat for a period of time. • If there is a problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. E142846 Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash. FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. WHAT IS THE FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM • This system detects a properly seated occupant and determines if the front passenger airbag should be enabled. • HOW DOES THE FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WORK The system uses a passenger airbag status indicator which illuminates indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either enabled or disabled. When the front passenger sensing system disables the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the off lamp. If you have installed the child restraint and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the on lamp, switch your vehicle off, remove the child restraint from your vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled. Note: When you first switch the ignition on, the passenger airbag status indicator off and on lamps illuminate for a short period to confirm they are functional. 63 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Airbags • When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the on lamp. • • • • • If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the passenger airbag status indicator off lamp is illuminated, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: • Switch your vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat backrest in an upright position. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended. • Restart your vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This allows the system to detect that person and enable the passenger frontal airbag. • If the indicator off lamp remains illuminated even after this, you should advise the person to ride in the rear seat. • Objects hanging off the seat backrest. Objects stowed in the seat backrest map pocket. Objects placed on the occupant's lap. Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat. Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat. The listed conditions could cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat could appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions listed. Make sure the front passenger sensing system is operating E67017 properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 66). If the airbag readiness light is on, do the following: • • • After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, leaning against the seat backrest, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. • • • Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash greatly increases. • If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect, check for the following: • Objects lodged underneath the seat. • Objects between the seat cushion and the center console. Pull your vehicle over. Switch your vehicle off. Check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat. Remove the obstruction if found. Restart your vehicle. Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated. If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains illuminated, there may be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system. Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle in for service immediately. 64 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Airbags If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact your Customer Relationship Center. See Contacting Us (page 15). WARNING: Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system. This could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM INDICATORS Occupant Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Passenger Airbag Empty OFF: Illuminated Disabled ON: Not Illuminated Child OFF: Illuminated Disabled ON: Not Illuminated Adult OFF: Not Illuminated ON: Illuminated 65 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Enabled Airbags • CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR • WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including hood, bumper system, frame, front end body structure, tow hooks and hood pins) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify or add equipment to the front end of your vehicle. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash. The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, seatbelt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. • The front airbags activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes. Front airbags may activate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts if the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. • The seatbelt pretensioners activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers. • The side airbags inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. • The Safety Canopy inflates in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover. Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors. These sensors provide information to the restraints control module which activates the following: • • • • • Front and rear seatbelt pretensioners. Driver airbag. Passenger airbag. Seat mounted side airbags. Safety Canopy. Based on the type of crash, the restraints control module deploys the appropriate safety devices. The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: E67017 The readiness light either flashes or stays on. You hear a series of five tones. The tone pattern repeats periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired. The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after you switch the ignition on. 66 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Airbags DISPOSING OF AIRBAGS Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. 67 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 911 Assist • WHAT IS 911 ASSIST 911 Assist is a SYNC system feature that can call for help. • For more information, visit www.owner.ford.com . EMERGENCY CALL REQUIREMENTS • Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is off and the phone connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar. WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. EMERGENCY CALL LIMITATIONS WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. The following are limitations of this feature: • WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. • • • A connected Bluetooth® enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. A connected Bluetooth® enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. • • SYNC is powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. You must pair and connect a Bluetooth® enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. 68 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. Keys and Remote Controls Unlock REMOTE CONTROL LIMITATIONS Press the button to unlock all doors. See Unlocking and E138629 Locking the Doors Using the Remote Control (page 78). WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Lock Press the button to lock all doors. See Unlocking and E138623 Locking the Doors Using the Remote Control (page 78). Remote Start (If Equipped) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. E138625 Press the button to remote start. See Remotely Starting and Stopping the Vehicle (page 114). Panic Alarm (If Equipped) Make sure a valid remote control is within 5 ft (1.5 m) from the front door handles and rear of vehicle. E138624 The system may not function if: • The remote control remains stationary for about a minute. • The vehicle battery has no charge. • The remote control battery has no charge. • There is interference causing issues with the remote control frequencies. • The remote control is too close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. USING THE REMOTE CONTROL Use your remote control to access various vehicle systems. Note: The buttons on your remote may vary depending on the vehicle region or options. 69 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press the button to sound the panic alarm. See Sounding the Panic Alarm (page 70). Keys and Remote Controls CHANGING THE REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY REMOVING THE KEY BLADE WARNING: Keep batteries away from children to prevent ingestion. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. If ingested, immediately seek medical attention. WARNING: If the battery compartment does not securely close, stop using the remote control and replace it as soon as possible. In the meantime, keep the remote control away from children. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. E322866 The remote control uses one coin-type 3-volt lithium battery CR2450 or equivalent. Push the release button on your passive key and pull the key blade out. SOUNDING THE PANIC ALARM E138624 Press the button to sound the panic alarm. Press the button again or switch the ignition on to turn it off. Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off. LOCATING YOUR VEHICLE Press the lock button twice within three seconds. The turn E138623 signal lamps flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle. E322866 1. 70 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Push the release button and pull the key blade out. Keys and Remote Controls E218402 3. Insert a screwdriver, and carefully remove the battery. 4. Install a new battery with the + facing upward. 5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto the transmitter and install the key blade. Dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. E107998 Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. E303824 2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the key blade head to remove the battery cover. Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. The remote control should operate normally. REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. 71 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Keys and Remote Controls Programming Backup Location PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL You must have two previously programmed remote controls inside your vehicle and the new, unprogrammed remote controls readily accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to have the spare remote control programmed if two previously programmed remote controls are not available. Make sure that your vehicle is off before beginning this procedure. Make sure that you close all the doors before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure. Perform all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if you perform any steps out of sequence. E327286 1. Note: You can program a maximum of four remote controls to your vehicle. Note: If your programmed remote controls get lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded remote, you need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Store an extra programmed remote away from your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconvenience. Contact an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement remote controls. 2. 3. 4. Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 5. 6. 7. 72 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Place the first programmed remote in the backup slot inside the center console. With your foot off the brake pedal, press and release the push button ignition switch. Wait five seconds and then press and release the push button ignition switch again. Remove the remote control. Within 10 seconds, place a second programmed remote control in the backup slot. Press and release the push button ignition switch. Wait five seconds and then press and release the push button ignition switch again. Keep the ignition on for at least 3 seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Remove the remote control. Place the unprogrammed remote control in the backup slot and press and release the push button ignition switch. Keys and Remote Controls Programming is now complete. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the push button ignition switch to verify the remote control functions operate and your vehicle starts with the new remote control. If programming was not successful, wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer. KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – TROUBLESHOOTING KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Key Battery Low Replace Displays when the remote control battery requires replacing. Soon 73 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing MyKey™ Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch the lane departure warning feature off, but this feature turns back on automatically with every new key cycle. WHAT IS MYKEY MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. CONFIGURABLE MYKEY SETTINGS MYKEY SETTINGS You can configure the following settings after creating a MyKey. See Creating a MyKey (page 75). NON-CONFIGURABLE MYKEY SETTINGS Speed Limit Seatbelt Reminder or BeltMinder™ MyKey mutes the audio system until the front seat passengers buckle the front seat belts. WARNING: Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not mute. Satellite Radio (If Equipped) Some Satellite radio channels have restricted access to adult radio content. You can set a speed limit for your vehicle. Warning messages appear in the information display and a tone sounds if your vehicle reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed when using a MyKey. Early Low Fuel The low fuel level warning lamp turns on earlier. Driving and Parking Aids Speed Minder You cannot configure settings for parking aids, blind spot information system, and cross traffic alert. These systems turn on when the vehicle turns on, and you cannot switch them off with a MyKey. You can set a speed reminder for your vehicle. Warning messages appear in the information display and a tone sounds if your vehicle exceeds the set speed. Audio System Volume Limit You cannot configure settings for pre-collision assist and lane keeping. These systems turn on when the vehicle turns on, but you can switch them off with a MyKey. The audio system maximum volume reduces. A message appears in the information display if you attempt to exceed the volume limit. Automatic volume control turns off. A new destination in the navigation system can only be set using voice commands when using a MyKey, and with your vehicle moving. 74 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing MyKey™ Emergency Assistance 2. Place the intelligent access key in the position shown. 3. Switch the ignition on. 4. Using your touchscreen, press Menu. 5. Press Settings. 6. Press Vehicle. 7. Press MyKey. 8. Press Create MyKey. 9. Press Yes if you want to create the key as a MyKey. A confirmation message appears on the screen. 10. Switch the ignition off. Note: We recommend that you label this key. If you set emergency assistance to always on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey. Do Not Disturb If you set do not disturb to always on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey. Note: If a phone is connected using Apple CarPlay or Android Auto while driving with a MyKey, the driver can receive phone calls and text messages even if the do not disturb restriction is on, and if the vehicle comes with satellite radio, there is no restriction on the adult content. Traction and Stability Control If you set traction control or stability control to always on, you cannot switch it off with a MyKey. PROGRAMMING A MYKEY You can program any remote control to become a restricted MyKey, but you must leave one unmodified as an admin key. CREATING A MYKEY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Vehicle Settings. Press MyKey. Select a setting and press the OK button. Configure the setting CLEARING ALL MYKEYS When you clear all MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status. 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. 2. Press Settings on the touchscreen. E327286 1. 3. Press Vehicle Settings. 4. Press MyKey. Raise the console storage compartment lid. 75 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing MyKey™ 5. Press Clear All MyKeys. 6. Press Yes. 3. Press Vehicle Settings. 4. Press MyKey. 5. Press MyKey Information. CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS You can find information about the distance traveled using a MyKey, and the number of admin keys and MyKeys created for your vehicle. MyKey is not compatible with unapproved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for an approved remote start system. 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Press Settings on the touchscreen. MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING MYKEY – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Description Place Key in Backup Location Displays when trying to create a MyKey and the admin key is not placed in the backup position. See Creating a MyKey (page 75). Key is Already a MyKey Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already designated as a MyKey. This Key restricted at Next Key Cycle. Label Key as MyKey Displays to confirm that the key is restricted after you switch the ignition off. 76 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing MyKey™ MYKEY – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why am I not able to start the engine with a MyKey? An admin key and a MyKey are inside your vehicle. The system recognizes only the admin key when both are present. What is an admin key? An admin key is a key that you have not created as a MyKey. See Creating a MyKey (page 75). Why am I not able to create a MyKey? You have not placed the admin key in the backup position. See Creating a MyKey (page 75). The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. The key used to switch the ignition on is the only admin key. There has to be at least one admin key. You did not switch the ignition off after creating the last MyKey. Why am I not able to program a MyKey? The admin key is not inside your vehicle. The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. You have not created any MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey (page 75). Why am I not able to clear the MyKeys? The admin key is not inside your vehicle. The key used to switch the ignition on is not an admin key. You have not created any MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey (page 75). Why is the MyKey distance not accumulating? The key used to start the engine is an admin key. An admin key and a MyKey are inside your vehicle. You have not created any MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey (page 75). You have cleared the MyKeys. See Clearing All MyKeys (page 75). 77 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Doors and Locks INDIVIDUALLY UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE DOORS USING THE LOCKING BUTTON OPERATING THE DOORS FROM OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels. UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE DOORS USING THE REMOTE CONTROL You can only use the remote control when your vehicle is stationary. Unlocking the Doors E267112 Press the button to unlock all doors. E138628 Locking the Doors Press the button to lock all E267111 doors. One short flash of the turn signal lamps confirms that your vehicle has locked. Lock. WHAT IS AUTOUNLOCK Autounlock is an unlocking feature that unlocks the vehicle doors when your vehicle comes to a stop. OPERATING THE DOORS FROM INSIDE YOUR VEHICLE AUTOUNLOCK REQUIREMENTS Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of the following occur: • The ignition is on, all the doors are closed and your vehicle is moving at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). • Your vehicle comes to a stop. • You open the driver door within 10 minutes of switching the ignition off or to the accessory position. UNLOCKING AND LOCKING THE DOORS USING THE CENTRAL LOCKING The power door lock control is on the driver door. E267111 Unlock. B AUTOUNLOCK Note: For more information on operating the doors from outside your vehicle See Keyless Entry (page 82). E267112 A Press the button to unlock all doors. Press the button to lock all doors. Note: The central locking only operates if the front doors are fully closed. 78 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Doors and Locks SWITCHING AUTOUNLOCK ON AND OFF 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. MISLOCK LIMITATIONS When you press the lock button once, the direction indicators do not flash if: • Any door or the tailgate is open. • The hood is open. Press the menu button on the steering wheel to enter the information display main menu. Select Settings. Select Vehicle. Select Locks. Switch Autounlock on or off. If you switch mislock off, the horn does not sound if you press the lock button on the remote control when a door is open. SWITCHING MISLOCK ON AND OFF AUTOLOCK 1. WHAT IS AUTOLOCK Autolock is a locking feature that locks your vehicle doors when you start driving. 2. 3. 4. 5. AUTOLOCK REQUIREMENTS Autolock locks all the doors when all of the following occur: • All doors are closed. • The ignition is on. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). Press the menu button on the steering wheel to enter the information display main menu. Select Settings. Select Vehicle. Select Locks. Switch Mislock Chirp on or off. DOORS AND LOCKS – TROUBLESHOOTING DOORS AND LOCKS – WARNING LAMPS MISLOCK Door Ajar Warning Lamp WHAT IS MISLOCK E249859 Mislock is a locking feature that warns you if your vehicle has not locked. 79 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing It illuminates when you switch the ignition on and remains on if any door or the hood is open. Doors and Locks DOORS AND LOCKS – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Driver Door Ajar Action Displays if a door is open. Fully close the door. Passenger Door Ajar Rear Left Door Ajar Rear Right Door Ajar 80 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Doors and Locks DOORS AND LOCKS – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Can accessories such as steps or handles be used with the latch assembly? Do not use the door latch assembly to attach any accessory, such as handles or steps, as this can cause damage to your vehicle. 81 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Keyless Entry If you program the unlocking function so that only the driver door unlocks, you can unlock all of the other doors from inside your vehicle using the power door lock control. You can unlock individual doors by pulling the interior door handles on those doors. KEYLESS ENTRY LIMITATIONS Make sure your remote control is within 3 ft (1 m) from the front door handles and the tailgate. The system could not function if: • The remote control remains stationary for about a minute. • The vehicle battery has no charge. • The remote control battery has no charge. • There is interference causing issues with the remote control frequencies. • The remote control is too close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. USING KEYLESS ENTRY Unlocking the Doors E333747 With your passive key within 5 ft (1.5 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle for a brief period and then pull on the door handle to unlock, being careful not to touch the lock sensor at the same time or pull on the door handle too quickly. The intelligent access system requires a brief delay to authenticate your passive key. KEYLESS ENTRY SETTINGS Switching Keyless Entry On and Off 1. Switch the ignition on using an original key that has not been created as a MyKey. 2. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 3. Press Vehicle Settings. 4. Press Locks. Locking the Doors Reprogramming the Unlocking Function You can enable two-stage unlocking function allowing you to unlock only the driver door when you touch the unlock sensor. E333746 With your passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock sensor for approximately one second to lock, being careful not to touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle at the same time. After locking, you can immediately pull on the door handle to confirm locking occurred without inadvertently unlocking. Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. 82 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Keyless Entry KEYLESS ENTRY – TROUBLESHOOTING KEYLESS ENTRY – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why does the keyless entry system not function? If the system does not function it may be limited. See Keyless Entry Limitations (page 82). If the system still does not function use the remote control or the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle. Why can I not lock my vehicle? If you electronically lock your vehicle with a rear door or the tailgate open, the system searches for a passive key inside your vehicle after you close the last door. If the system detects a key, all doors unlock indicating that a key is inside. Your vehicle locks if another passive key is within the detection range after you close the last door. Why does the passive key not work? The system deactivates passive keys left inside your vehicle when you lock it. You cannot switch the ignition on using a deactivated passive key. Press the unlock button on the remote control to reactivate a passive key. 83 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tailgate OPENING THE TAILGATE CLOSING THE TAILGATE OPENING THE TAILGATE FROM OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE CLOSING THE TAILGATE FROM OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE E323095 1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or power door unlock control. Note: If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the tailgate unlocks when you touch the inside of the tailgate handle. E323153 2. Pull the handle to release the tailgate. Push the tailgate until fully closed. LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE TAILGATE You can lock or unlock your vehicle with the remote control or power door lock control. Locking If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, touch the lock button on the tailgate handle to lock. 84 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tailgate E323094 E323096 Emergency Locking Emergency Unlocking If there is a power door lock fault you can use the key blade to lock the tailgate door. If there is a power door lock fault you can use the release lever to unlock the tailgate door. E342916 E342902 Unlocking 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel. 2. Remove the inside release lever cover. 3. Using a small tool, pull the release lever to open the tailgate. If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, touch the back of the tailgate handle to unlock. 85 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tailgate TAILGATE – WARNING LAMPS TAILGATE – TROUBLESHOOTING E340897 Illuminates when the tailgate is not completely closed. TAILGATE – INFORMATION MESSAGES Tailgate Message Details Tailgate Ajar The tailgate is not completely closed. 86 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Security HOW DOES THE PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM WORK PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM The passive anti-theft system arms when you switch the ignition off. WHAT IS THE PASSIVE ANTITHEFT SYSTEM It disarms when the ignition is switched on with a correctly coded key. The passive anti-theft system prevents someone from starting the vehicle with an incorrectly coded key. Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take the keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle. Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take the keys and lock all the doors when leaving your vehicle. SECURITY – TROUBLESHOOTING SECURITY – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action No Key Detected The system has not detected a correctly coded key. Starting System Fault The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle. Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. Alarm Announcement 87 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Security SECURITY – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS What should I do if there is any potential alarm problem with my vehicle? Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle. What should I do if the vehicle is unable to start with a correctly coded key? Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 88 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Steering Wheel SWITCHING THE HEATED STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. To activate the heated steering wheel, press the button on the climate control unit. On some vehicles, an indicator on the button illuminates when the heated steering wheel is on. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 126). Note: A sensor regulates the temperature of the steering wheel. E261502 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position you prefer. 3. Lock the steering column. HORN E270945 Press on the center of the steering wheel near the horn icon to activate the horn. 89 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wipers and Washers SWITCHING THE REAR WINDOW WIPER ON AND OFF WIPERS WIPER PRECAUTIONS Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This could scratch the glass or damage the wiper blades. Use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. E340280 Switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Rotate the control away from you for a long wipe interval. SWITCHING WINDSHIELD WIPERS ON AND OFF Rotate the control toward you for a short wipe interval. REVERSE WIPE WHAT IS REVERSE WIPE Reverse wipe turns on the rear window wiper when you shift into reverse (R) and the windshield wipers are on. REVERSE WIPE SETTINGS 1. 2. 3. 4. E327739 A High-speed wipe. B Intermittent wipe. C Off. Use the rotary control. E270969 90 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Vehicle Settings. Press Wipers. Switch Rear Wiper On (when in Reverse) on or off. Wipers and Washers CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES 2 E327597 E142463 2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip. Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. REPLACING THE FRONT WIPER BLADES E327598 3. Press the wiper blade secondary locking clip. 4. Remove the wiper blade. Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached. E165804 1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass. Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the wiper arm. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. 91 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wipers and Washers REPLACING THE REAR WIPER BLADES WASHERS WASHER PRECAUTIONS WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 41°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This could cause the washer pump to overheat. Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. E271380 1. Lift the wiper arm. Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the wiper arm. USING THE WINDSHIELD WASHER 2. Remove the wiper blade. Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. E311291 E270967 Press and hold the button at the end of the lever to operate the windshield washer. Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time after the wipers stop to clear any remaining washer fluid when switched on. See Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off (page 93). 92 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wipers and Washers SWITCHING THE COURTESY WIPE ON AND OFF 1. 2. 3. 4. WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION See Washer Fluid Specification (page 402). Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Vehicle Settings. Press Wipers. Switch Courtesy Wipe on or off. WIPERS AND WASHERS – TROUBLESHOOTING WIPERS AND WASHERS – WARNING LAMPS USING THE REAR WINDOW WASHER Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low. E132353 WIPERS AND WASHERS – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why are there streaks and smears on the windshield? E340280 The wiper blades could be dirty, worn or damaged. Check the wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper Blades (page 91). If the wiper blades are dirty, clean them with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. If the wiper blades are worn or damaged, install new ones. See Replacing the Front Wiper Blades (page 91). Rotate the control to the top or bottom position and hold it to operate the rear window washer. Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time after the wipers stop to clear any remaining washer fluid when switched on. See Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off (page 93). ADDING WASHER FLUID E340983 93 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Exterior Lighting Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps. EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL HEADLAMP INDICATORS Lamps On Illuminates when you switch the low beam headlamps or the parking lamps on. E327629 A Lamps off. B Parking lamps on. C Autolamps on. D Headlamps on. Headlamp High Beam Illuminates when you switch the high beam headlamps on. HEADLAMPS – TROUBLESHOOTING Rotate the control to make a selection. Note: The lighting control defaults to autolamps every time you switch your vehicle on. HEADLAMPS – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS HEADLAMPS Why is there condensation in the headlamps? Headlamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. USING THE HIGH BEAM HEADLAMPS E327570 Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on. How much condensation is acceptable? The presence of a fine mist, for example no streaks, drip marks or large droplets. A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off. 94 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Exterior Lighting 4. Press Autolamp Delay. How long may it take for the acceptable condensation to be cleared? 5. Press a setting. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. EXTERIOR LAMPS How much condensation is unacceptable? SWITCHING THE TURN SIGNAL LAMPS ON AND OFF A water puddle inside the lamp. Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. What should I do if unacceptable condensation is present? Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Why do my headlamps turn off when I have them switched on when I switch my vehicle off? The battery saver turns the headlamps off after a short period of time after you switch your vehicle off. E311431 Push the lever up or down to switch the turn signal lamps on. AUTOLAMPS Set the lever to the middle position to switch the turn signal lamps off. WHAT ARE AUTOLAMPS Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the turn signal lamps flash three times. WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the headlamps on in low visibility conditions, for example daytime fog. SWITCHING THE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS ON AND OFF VEHICLES WITH: CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low light situations or when the windshield wipers operate. WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. AUTOLAMP SETTINGS 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Vehicle Settings. 3. Press Lighting. 1. 95 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press Settings on the touchscreen. Exterior Lighting 2. Press Vehicle Settings. 3. Press Lighting. 4. Switch Daytime Running Lights on or off. Press the button to switch the front fog lamps on or off. Note: Only switch the front fog lamps on during reduced visibility. The daytime running lamps turn on when all of the following occur: • You switch the system on. • You switch your vehicle on. • The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions or you release the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. • The lighting control is in the autolamps position. • The headlamps are off. Note: The brightness of the daytime running lamps may decrease when the front fog lamps are switched on. Note: When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, you cannot switch the fog lamps on unless the headlamps are on. SWITCHING THE SPOT LAMPS ON AND OFF (If Equipped) The spot lamp buttons are near the lighting control. Note: Other lighting control positions do not turn on the daytime running lamps. SWITCHING THE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS ON AND OFF VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) E340436 Press the button to switch on the left-hand spot lamp. E340437 Press the button to switch on the right-hand spot lamp. Move the position of the exterior mirrors to adjust the aim. Note: The lighting control must be set to the parking lamp position. WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. Note: The spot lamps illuminate the area in front of and to the side of your vehicle. EXTERIOR LAMP INDICATORS Front Fog Lamp It illuminates when you switch the front fog lamps on. Daytime running lamps are always on unless you switch on the headlamps or your vehicle is in park (P). Turn Signal Lamp SWITCHING THE FRONT FOG LAMPS ON AND OFF (If Equipped) It flashes when you switch the turn signal lamps on. The front fog lamp button is on the lighting control. Note: An increase in the rate of flashing warns of a failed turn signal lamp. 96 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Exterior Lighting EXTERIOR LAMP AUDIBLE WARNING Exterior Lamps On D Individual zones on and off. E All zones on and off. You can use zone lighting when your vehicle is on or off. When it is off, the lighting turns off after a certain period of time. Sounds when you open the driver door and the exterior lamps are on. EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING (IF You can also use individual zone controls to switch on each zone. EQUIPPED) Note: Make sure to remove exterior lighting covers when using zone lighting. WHAT IS EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING Note: When your vehicle is off and the timer has one minute remaining, the turn signals flash six times. Exterior zone lighting divides the exterior lighting into zones and allows you to switch them on and off to provide lighting around the perimeter of your vehicle. Note: Indicators on the touchscreen illuminate when the lights outside of the zone lighting control are on. Note: You can remotely control the zone lighting using the FordPass app. USING THE EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING EXTERIOR ZONE LIGHTING SETTINGS 1. Press Features on the touchscreen. 2. Press Zone Lighting. When you access zone lighting for the first time, you can choose to allow zone lighting to override the autolamps when zone lighting is on. You can change this setting at any time in the zone lighting settings menu. 1. Press Features on the touchscreen. 2. Press Zone Lighting. 3. Press the settings menu in the upper right-hand corner. 4. Press a setting. E343474 A On and off button. B Settings menu. C Exterior lamp indicators. 97 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Exterior Lighting AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL HOW DOES AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL WORK Automatic high beam control turns the high beams on if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system turns the high beams off. A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle, continuously monitors conditions to turn the high beams on and off. E327596 A Without automatic high beam control. B With automatic high beam control. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL PRECAUTIONS WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the high beams on or off. 98 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Exterior Lighting • • • WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow. WARNING: You may need to override the system when approaching other road users. The system detects street lighting. The camera has reduced visibility. The vehicle speed falls below approximately 27 mph (44 km/h). SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF 1. 2. 3. 4. WARNING: You may need to override the system during inclement weather. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL REQUIREMENTS Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Vehicle Settings. Press Lighting. Switch Auto Highbeam on or off. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL INDICATORS The system turns the high beams on if all of the following occur: • You switch the system on. • You set the lighting control to the autolamps position. • The ambient light level is low enough that you require high beams. • There is no traffic in front of your vehicle. • The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (52 km/h). Illuminates to confirm when the system is ready to assist. OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL LIMITATIONS The system turns the high beams off if any of the following occur: • You switch the system off. • You set the lighting control to any position except autolamps. • The ambient light level is high enough that you do not require high beams. • The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or rear lamps. • The system detects severe rain, snow or fog. E308790 Push the lever away from you to switch the high beams on. Push the lever away from you again to switch the high beams off. Push the lever away from you for a third time to switch automatic high beam control back on. 99 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Exterior Lighting AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Description Front Camera Low Visib- The camera has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. If ility Clean Screen the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The camera has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time for the camera to cool down. If the message continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Front Camera Malfunction Service Required The camera has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 100 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Interior Lighting SWITCHING ALL OF THE INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF SWITCHING THE REAR INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF The lamps turn on under the following conditions: • • • You open any door. You press a button on the remote control. You press the all lamps on button on the overhead console. Press to switch all interior lamps on or off. E281231 SWITCHING THE FRONT INTERIOR LAMPS ON AND OFF The rear interior lamps may be above the rear seat or above the rear windows. Press to switch the lamps on or off. Note: If you switch the rear lamps on through the overhead console, you cannot switch them off with the rear lamp switch. E281230 The front interior lamp switches are on the overhead console. INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION Note: The position of each button on the overhead console depends on your vehicle. WHAT IS THE INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION Individual Map Lamps The interior lamp function switches the courtesy and door lamps on or off. Press to switch the left-hand individual dome lamp on and off. SWITCHING THE INTERIOR LAMP FUNCTION ON AND OFF E262193 Press to switch the right-hand individual dome lamp on and off. Press to switch the interior lamp function on and off. Note: The indicator lamp illuminates amber when the door function is off. 101 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Interior Lighting ADJUSTING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTING BRIGHTNESS The instrument lighting dimmer buttons are on the lighting control. E291299 Repeatedly press one of the buttons to adjust the brightness. E296433 AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED) SWITCHING AMBIENT LIGHTING ON AND OFF 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Vehicle Settings. Press Ambient Light. Switch Ambient Light on or off. ADJUSTING AMBIENT LIGHTING Drag the slider left or right. INTERIOR LIGHTING – TROUBLESHOOTING INTERIOR LIGHTING – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why do my courtesy lamps or interior lamps turn off when I have them switched on when I switch my vehicle off? The battery saver turns the courtesy lamps and interior lamps off after a short period of time after you switch your vehicle off. 102 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Windows WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK OPENING AND CLOSING THE WINDOWS WHAT IS WINDOW BOUNCE-BACK The window stops and reverses if it detects an obstruction when closing. WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. OVERRIDING WINDOW BOUNCEBACK WARNING: When closing the power windows, verify they are free of obstruction and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. WARNING: If you override bounce-back, the window does not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Press the control to open the window. Lift the control to close the window. 1. Close the window until it reaches the point of resistance and let it reverse. 2. Lift and hold the window control switch within two seconds to override bounce-back and close the window. Bounce-back is now disabled and you can close the window manually. Note: The window goes past the point of resistance and you can fully close it. Note: The power windows operate with the ignition on, and for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open a front door. To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when one window is open, slightly open the opposite window. Tailgate Window To open the window, do the following: Note: If the window does not close, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Open the tailgate. See Opening the Tailgate From Outside Your Vehicle (page 84). 2. Lift the window. LOCKING THE REAR WINDOW CONTROLS 1. Press the window control switch to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It illuminates when you lock the rear window controls. To close the window, do the following: 1. Push the window down. 2. Close the tailgate. See Closing the Tailgate From Outside Your Vehicle (page 84). 103 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Interior Mirror INTERIOR MIRROR PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. MANUALLY DIMMING THE INTERIOR MIRROR Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night. AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED) WHAT IS THE AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR MIRROR The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. It returns to normal when the bright light from behind is no longer present or if you shift into reverse (R), to make sure you have a clear view when backing up. AUTO-DIMMING INTERIOR MIRROR LIMITATIONS Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint could prevent light from reaching the sensor. 104 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Exterior Mirrors ADJUSTING THE EXTERIOR MIRRORS FOLDING THE EXTERIOR MIRRORS Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. E328042 A Left-hand mirror. B Right-hand mirror. C Adjustment control. To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle on, with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running. 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The control light turns on. 2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the position of the mirror. 3. Press the mirror control again. The control light turns off. 105 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Instrument Cluster INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW E328319 A Speedometer. B Fuel gauge. C Digital speedometer. D Tachometer. E Compass and ambient temperature. F Odometer. G Distance to empty. WHAT IS THE TACHOMETER FUEL GAUGE Indicates the engine speed. WHAT IS THE FUEL GAUGE WHAT IS THE SPEEDOMETER Indicates approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank. Indicates the vehicle speed. 106 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Instrument Cluster FUEL GAUGE LIMITATIONS WHAT IS THE TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE The fuel gauge may not provide an accurate reading when your vehicle is on an incline. Indicates the transmission fluid temperature. Special operating conditions can cause higher than normal operating temperatures. See Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance (page 457). LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER DOOR The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Note: This is a configurable gauge. WHAT IS THE LOW FUEL REMINDER WHAT IS THE TURBO BOOST GAUGE - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ A low fuel level reminder displays and sounds when the distance to empty reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 12 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys. Indicates the amount of manifold air pressure in the engine. Note: This is a configurable gauge. WHAT IS THE INFORMATION BAR Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal. Displays information for navigation, outside air temperature, odometer and distance to empty. WHAT IS DISTANCE TO EMPTY Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not only decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time. WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING LAMPS Warning lamps alert you to a vehicle condition that could become serious. Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. WHAT IS THE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE Indicates the engine coolant temperature. 107 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Electric Park Brake INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING LAMPS It illuminates or flashes when the electric parking brake requires E325775 service. Anti-Lock Brake System If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Your vehicle continues to have normal braking without the anti-lock brake system function. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Note: Indicators may vary depending on region. Engine Coolant Temperature If it illuminates, safely stop your vehicle and switch your vehicle off. Battery It illuminates when you switch the ignition on. If it illuminates when the engine is running this indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Fasten Seatbelt Brake System Warning Lamp Hood Ajar It illuminates and a tone sounds until you fasten the seatbelts. E71880 It illuminates when you apply the parking brake and the ignition is E270480 on. If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving, make sure the parking brake is released. If the parking brake is released, this indicates low brake fluid level or the brake system requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. E324249 Low Beam Warning Illuminates when the low beam headlamp bulb requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible. E325579 Note: Indicators may vary depending on region. Low Fuel Level Door Ajar E340898 It illuminates when the ignition is on and the hood is not completely closed. It illuminates when the fuel level is low. It illuminates when you switch the ignition on and remains on if any door is open. Low Tire Pressure It illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If illuminated, check your tire pressure as soon as possible. If it begins to flash at anytime, have the system checked as soon as possible. 108 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Low Washer Fluid Level INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATORS It illuminates when the washer fluid is low. Adaptive Cruise Control E132353 Malfunction Indicator Lamp E144524 It illuminates when the ignition is on and the engine is off, this is normal operation. If it illuminates when the engine is on this indicates that the emission control system requires service. If it flashes, have your vehicle checked immediately. See Emission Law (page 521). Automatic Headlamp High Beam See Automatic High Beam Control (page 98). Auto-Start-Stop See Auto-Start-Stop (page 161). Oil Pressure It illuminates when the engine oil pressure is low. Blind Spot Monitor Powertrain Malfunction E323542 Illuminates when the powertrain requires service. Have the system checked as soon as See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). Cruise Control possible. See Cruise Control (page 232). Tailgate Ajar E340897 See Adaptive Cruise Control (page 234). E71340 It illuminates when the ignition is on and the tailgate is not completely closed. Differential Lock E328595 WHAT ARE THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATORS E325779 Indicators notify you of various features that are active on your vehicle. 109 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing See Electronic Locking Differential (page 190). Instrument Cluster Drive Modes E225314 Front Fog Lamp See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). See Switching the Front Fog Lamps On and Off (page 96). Headlamp High Beam E295420 See Using the High Beam Headlamps (page 94). E295413 E296606 Hill Descent See Hill Descent Control (page 217). E317283 Lane Keeping System E322413 E295414 E308131 See Lane Keeping System (page 249). One Pedal Drive E246593 1 E328584 See Trail One Pedal Drive (page 208). E246592 Parking Lamps Four-Wheel Drive See Exterior Lighting (page 94). See Four-Wheel Drive (page 182). E181778 Pre-Collision Assist E181781 E329466 E181780 E329467 E181779 Note: Some indicators will appear different depending on vehicle options. Front Airbag See Airbags (page 59). E67017 110 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing See Pre-Collision Assist (page 262). Instrument Cluster Stability Control and Traction Control E138639 See Stability Control (page 204). See Traction Control (page 202). E130458 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect E329476 See Stabilizer Bar Disconnect (page 214). Trail Control See Trail Control (page 207). E318506 Trail Turn Assist E329474 See Trail Turn Assist (page 212). E329475 Tow Haul See Towing a Trailer (page 283). E246592 Turn Signal Lamps See Exterior Lamps (page 95). 111 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Display OK Button USING THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY CONTROLS Press to make a selection. Press the toggle button up or down to scroll through menu items. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Menu Button Press to display the submenus. Toggle Buttons Used to navigate the menus. Status Indicator Menu items with a check box indicates a feature's status. A E204495 check in the box indicates the feature is on, and unchecked indicates the feature is off. The controls are on the steering wheel. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MAIN MENU Depending on your vehicle options, some menu items may appear different or not at all. Note: For your safety, some features are speed-dependent and could be unavailable when your vehicle is above a certain speed. Menu Item E326969 MyView A Menu button. B Return button. C Up button. D OK toggle button. E Down toggle button Trip/Fuel Off-Road Navigation Phone Audio Return Button Settings Press to go back or to exit a menu. 112 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Display TRIP COMPUTER CHANGING THE TEMPERATURE UNIT ACCESSING THE TRIP COMPUTER 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Select Trip/Fuel. 2. Select Fuel Economy, Trip 1 or Trip 2. RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER CHANGING THE TIRE PRESSURE UNIT 1. Select Trip/Fuel. 2. Press and hold the OK button for a few seconds. 1. 2. 3. 4. RESETTING THE INDIVIDUAL TRIP VALUES 1. Select Trip/Fuel. 2. Select Trip 1 or Trip 2. 3. Press and hold the OK button for a few seconds. PERSONALIZED SETTINGS CHANGING THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LANGUAGE Note: Available languages vary by region. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press General. Press Language. Select a language. CHANGING THE MEASURE UNIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press General. Press Temperature Units. Select Fahrenheit or Celsius. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press General. Press Measure Units. Select a measurement unit. 113 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press General. Press Tire Pressure Units. Select a pressure unit. Remote Start (If Equipped) The system allows you to remotely start your vehicle and to adjust the interior temperature according to the settings that you chose. 3. Press Remote Start Setup. 4. Switch Remote Start on or off. Note: To remote start with FordPass, make sure that the modem is enabled. See Connecting FordPass to the Modem (page 409). REMOTE START PRECAUTIONS REMOTELY STARTING AND STOPPING THE VEHICLE WHAT IS REMOTE START Remotely Starting the Vehicle WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Press the button on the remote control. E138623 Within three seconds, press the button on the remote control. E138625 Within three seconds, press the button again. REMOTE START LIMITATIONS Note: You can also use FordPass to start the vehicle. Remote start does not work under the following conditions: Note: The turn signal lamps flash twice. • • • • • • Note: The parking lamps turn on when the vehicle is running. The perimeter alarm is sounding. The hood is open. The transmission is not in park (P). The ignition is on. The check engine light is on. The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. Note: The horn sounds if the system fails to start. Note: All other vehicle systems remain off when you have remotely started the vehicle. Note: The vehicle remains secured when you have remotely started the vehicle. A valid key must be inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and drive your vehicle. Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel level is low. Remotely Stopping the Vehicle Note: To use remote start with the Ford Pass or Phone as a Key, enable the modem. See Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Network (page 409). Within three seconds, press the button on the remote control. E138625 Within three seconds, press the button again. ENABLING REMOTE START 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Vehicle Settings. 114 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Remote Start (If Equipped) SWITCHING CLIMATE CONTROL LAST SETTINGS ON AND OFF REMOTE START REMOTE CONTROL INDICATORS (IF 1. Using the information display controls on the steering wheel, select Settings. 2. Select Vehicle. 3. Select Remote Start. 4. Select Climate Control. 5. Switch Last Settings on or off. Note: If you switch the last settings on, the system remembers the last used settings. EQUIPPED) Remote Control Feedback An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands. LED Status Solid green. Remote start successful. Solid red. Remote stop successful. Blinking red. Request failed or status not received. Blinking green. Status incomplete. SWITCHING THE HEATED SEAT SETTINGS ON AND OFF 1. Using the information display controls on the steering wheel, select Settings. 2. Select Vehicle. 3. Select Remote Start. 4. Select Front Seats. 5. Select Auto or Off. Note: If you switch the heated seat settings on, the heated seats turn on during cold weather. REMOTE START SETTINGS SWITCHING CLIMATE CONTROL AUTO MODE ON AND OFF Note: You cannot adjust the heated seat settings when you have remotely started the engine. 1. Using the information display controls on the steering wheel, select Settings. 2. Select Vehicle. 3. Select Remote Start. 4. Select Climate Control. 5. Switch Auto on or off. Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the system attempts to heat or cool the interior to 72°F (22°C). SWITCHING THE HEATED STEERING WHEEL SETTINGS ON AND OFF 1. Using the information display controls on the steering wheel, select Settings. 2. Select Vehicle. 3. Select Remote Start. 4. Select Front Seats & Wheel. 5. Select Auto or Off. Note: If you switch the heated steering wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel turns on during cold weather. Note: When you switch the ignition on, the climate control system returns to the last used settings. Note: The heated windshield, heated rear window, heated mirrors, heated seats and heated steering wheel could turn on in cold weather. 115 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Remote Start (If Equipped) Note: You cannot adjust the heated steering wheel settings when you have remotely started the engine. SETTING THE REMOTE START DURATION You can set a duration for the vehicle to run. Note: Wait a few seconds before remotely starting the engine after the engine stops running. 1. Using the information display controls on the steering wheel, select Settings. 2. Select Vehicle. 3. Select Remote Start. 4. Select Duration. 116 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control Note: Under certain conditions, the air conditioning compressor could continue to operate after you switch air conditioning off. IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SWITCHING MAXIMUM DEFROST ON AND OFF Press the button. Air flows through the windshield air vents, the temperature is set to the highest setting, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. E339318 Depending on your vehicle options, the controls could look different than what you see here. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. SWITCHING CLIMATE CONTROL ON AND OFF Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. Press the button. Note: The heated rear window and heated mirrors also turn on when you select maximum defrost. SWITCHING RECIRCULATED AIR ON AND OFF SWITCHING MAXIMUM COOLING ON AND OFF Press the button to recirculate air currently in the passenger compartment. Press the button. Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically, or prevent you from switching on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off automatically in various air distribution control combinations to improve heating or cooling efficiency. Air flows through the instrument panel air vents, the temperature is set to the lowest setting, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. Note: When you switch maximum cooling off, air conditioning remains on. SWITCHING AIR CONDITIONING ON AND OFF Press the button. 117 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control SWITCHING THE HEATED REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF (IF SETTING THE TEMPERATURE EQUIPPED) Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear window turns off after a short period of time. Note: This button also activates the heated mirrors. Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window as this could cause damage to the heated rear window grid lines not covered by the vehicle Warranty. E244115 Turn the control on the left-hand side of the climate control to set the left-hand temperature. SWITCHING THE HEATED MIRRORS ON AND OFF Note: This control also sets the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode. Press the button. E266189 Turn the control on the right-hand side of the climate control to set the right-hand temperature. SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR Directing Air to the Windshield Air Vents E266187 Press up or down on the control to select the blower motor speed. Press the button to activate the selection screen. E265283 Press the button on the touchscreen. E266186 Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents Press the button to activate the selection screen. E265283 118 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control Press the button on the E244097 touchscreen. AUTO MODE SWITCHING AUTO MODE ON AND OFF Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents Press the button to switch auto mode on. Repeatedly press the button to adjust auto mode. Press the button to activate the selection screen. E265283 Note: When you switch auto mode on, lights on the blower motor control do not illuminate to indicate the blower motor speed. Press the button on the touchscreen. Adjust the blower motor control or air distribution control to switch auto mode off. AUTO MODE INDICATORS The indicators are on the Auto Mode button. Auto Mode Indicator Status Description One indicator illuminated. The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This setting increases the time taken to cool the interior. Two indicators illuminated. The blower motor speed is moderate. Three indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to ated. reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting increases the amount of noise from the blower motor. 119 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control SWITCHING DUAL MODE ON AND OFF • Press the button. E265280 • CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS General Hints • • • • • • Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Quickly Heating the Interior 1. Press AUTO. 2. Adjust the temperature function to the setting you prefer. Recommended Settings for Heating 1. Press AUTO. 2. Adjust the temperature function to the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. Quickly Cooling the Interior Press MAX A/C. Recommended Settings for Cooling Automatic Climate Control • • • If you press AUTO during cold outside temperatures, the system directs air flow to the windshield and side window air vents. In addition, the blower motor may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up. If you press AUTO during hot temperatures and the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. Blower motor speed may also reduce until the air cools. 1. Press AUTO. 2. Adjust the temperature function to the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. Automatic mode is best recommended to maintain set temperature. The system adjusts to heat or cool the interior to the temperature you select as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open. Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather 1. 120 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press and release defrost or maximum defrost. Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control 2. Adjust the temperature control to the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 121 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control Note: Under certain conditions, the air conditioning compressor could continue to operate after you switch air conditioning off. IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT SWITCHING MAXIMUM DEFROST ON AND OFF Turn the temperature control clockwise past the highest setting to maximize defrosting. Note: The temperature control springs back to the highest setting. E308141 Depending on your vehicle options, the controls could look different than what you see here. Air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. SWITCHING CLIMATE CONTROL ON AND OFF Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. Note: The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. Press the button. SWITCHING MAXIMUM COOLING ON AND OFF SWITCHING RECIRCULATED AIR ON AND OFF Turn the temperature control counterclockwise past the lowest setting to maximize Press the button to recirculate air currently in the passenger compartment. cooling. Note: The temperature control springs back to the lowest setting. Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically, or prevent you from switching on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off automatically in various air distribution control combinations to improve heating or cooling efficiency. Note: When you switch maximum cooling off, air conditioning remains on. SWITCHING THE HEATED REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF SWITCHING AIR CONDITIONING ON AND OFF Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear window turns off after a short period of time. Press the button. 122 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window as this could cause damage to the heated rear window grid lines not covered by the vehicle Warranty. SETTING THE TEMPERATURE SWITCHING THE HEATED MIRRORS ON AND OFF Press the button. E266189 SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED E244106 Turn the temperature control counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings. Turn the temperature control clockwise for warmer temperature settings. DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR Directing Air to the Windshield Air Vents Press the button. E317606 Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents Turn the blower motor control counterclockwise for a lower blower setting. Press the button. E244097 Turn the blower motor control clockwise for a higher blower setting. Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents Note: Lights on the control illuminate to indicate the blower motor speed. Press the button. Note: When you switch the blower motor off, air conditioning turns off and the windows could fog up. 123 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control 2. Drive with the windows open for a short period of time. CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS General Hints • • • • • • Recommended Settings for Cooling Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. 1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the center setting. 2. Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings. 3. Direct air to the instrument panel air vents. Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather 1. Direct air to the instrument panel and windshield air vents. 2. Press and release A/C. 3. Adjust the temperature control to the setting you prefer. 4. Adjust the blower motor speed to the highest setting. 5. Direct air toward the side windows. 6. Close the instrument panel air vents. Quickly Heating the Interior 1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the highest speed setting. 2. Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting. 3. Direct air to the footwell air vents. Recommended Settings for Heating 1. Adjust the blower motor speed to the center setting. 2. Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings. 3. Direct air to the footwell air vents. Quickly Cooling the Interior 1. Press MAX A/C. 124 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Interior Air Quality WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR FILTER The cabin air filter improves the quality of air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen and other particles. REPLACING THE CABIN AIR FILTER Replace the filter at regular intervals. Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system. Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter could reduce cabin air filtration and climate control performance. 125 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Front Seats FRONT SEAT PRECAUTIONS SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. WARNING: Do not recline the seat backrest too far as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seatbelt, resulting in personal injury in the event of a crash. E68595 WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the top of the seat backrest. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash. We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seat backrest so that your torso is more than 30 degrees from the upright position. • Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. • Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle. 126 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Front Seats • • ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINT Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. MANUAL SEATS WARNING: The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts. HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS WARNING: Adjust the head restraints for all passengers before you drive your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraints when your vehicle is moving. Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. E308298 The head restraints consist of: A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Guide sleeve adjust and release button. C Two steel stems. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button (If equipped). Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint: 1. Press and hold the adjust and release button. 2. Push the head restraint down. 127 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Front Seats 1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position. 2. Press and hold the button. 3. Pull up the head restraint. Note: You cannot remove head restraints that have audio system speakers. INSTALLING THE HEAD RESTRAINT E327919 Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. For vehicles with tilting head restraints: 1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the preferred position. MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD AND FORWARD After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, untilted position. WARNING: Make sure the seat fully locks into place by rocking it backward and forward. Not securing the seat into the locked position can be dangerous in a crash and could cause serious personal injury or death. Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position. REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT E327503 E308316 128 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Front Seats ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST POWER SEATS HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat backrest before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seat backrest to its original position. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash. E327921 The head restraints consist of: E327922 A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and release button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button (If equipped). ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINT WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. 129 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Front Seats Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position. WARNING: The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts. REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT 1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches its highest position. 2. Press and hold the adjust and release button. 3. Pull up the head restraint. WARNING: Adjust the head restraints for all passengers before you drive your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraints when your vehicle is moving. Note: You cannot remove head restraints that have audio system speakers. To raise the head restraint, pull the head restraint up. INSTALLING THE HEAD RESTRAINT To lower the head restraint: 1. Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. To tilt the head restraint: MOVING THE SEAT BACKWARD AND FORWARD Press and hold the adjust and release button. 2. Push the head restraint down. E327919 E308339 1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the preferred position. After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, untilted position. 130 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Front Seats ADJUSTING THE SEAT CUSHION ADJUSTING THE SEAT HEIGHT E308336 E308337 ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST ADJUSTING THE LUMBAR SUPPORT WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. E327927 E308338 131 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Front Seats HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) HEATED SEAT PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Use caution when using the heated seat if you are unable to feel pain to your skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions. The heated seat could cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. E146322 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. The more indicators that display, the warmer the temperature of the seat. Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. WARNING: Do not poke sharp objects into the seat cushion or seat backrest. This could damage the heated seat element and cause it to overheat. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: Do not place anything on the seat that blocks the heat, for example a seat cover or a cushion. This could cause the seat to overheat. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Do not: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry. SWITCHING THE HEATED SEATS ON AND OFF The vehicle must be running to use this feature. 132 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear Seats MANUAL SEATS C Guide sleeve adjust and release button. HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS D Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints (4-Door) Guide sleeve unlock and remove button (If equipped). E Fold button (If equipped). Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraints (2-Door) A C B E333887 The head restraints consist of: E330418 Rear Seat Center Head Restraint (4-Door) A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Fold strap. ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINT 4-Door Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint: 1. Press and hold the adjust and release button. 2. Push the head restraint down. E342165 The head restraints consist of: A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. Press the fold button to fold the head restraint. 133 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear Seats 2-Door 4-Door Pull the strap to fold the head restraint rearward. REMOVING THE HEAD RESTRAINT 1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches its highest position. 2. Press and hold the adjust and release button and the unlock and remove button. 3. Pull up the head restraint. E327939 Note: The head restraints are not removable on 2-door vehicles. Pull the lever up to fold the seat backrest fully forward. INSTALLING THE HEAD RESTRAINT Note: Make sure that the area under the seat is free of objects before folding the backrest. To return the seat backrest to the upright position, rotate it up until it locks. Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. Note: To store the removable doors, the seat backrest must be in the upright position. ADJUSTING THE SEAT BACKREST To recline the seat backrest to the optimal seating position, pull the lever up and push the backrest rearward. WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat backrest before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seat backrest to its original position. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash. FOLDING THE SEATS WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle with a seat that is unlatched or in the folded position. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. Note: The rear seats are not adjustable on 2-door vehicles. WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or release a seat floor latch when the vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in a sudden stop or crash. 134 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear Seats UNFOLDING THE SEATS 2-Door WARNING: Make sure that cargo and other objects are not trapped under the seat cushion and that you return the seat cushion to the full-down position. Failure to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly, which could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. For 2-door vehicles, rotate the seat backrest upright until it locks in the seating position. Then, move the seat cushion back to the seating position. E342383 1. Pull the strap at the front of the seat cushion. Then, flip the seat cushion up to the vertical position. E342771 2. Pull the strap on the top of the seat backrest to fold it forward. 135 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped) WHAT IS THE REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The rear occupant alert system monitors vehicle conditions and notifies you to check for rear seat occupants when you switch the ignition off. REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM LIMITATIONS HOW DOES THE REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM WORK The system does not function if any door is removed. The system does not detect the presence of objects or passengers in the rear seat. It monitors when rear doors are opened and closed. The system monitors when rear doors have been opened and closed to indicate the potential presence of an occupant in the rear seat. Note: It is possible to receive an alert when there is no rear seat occupant, but alert conditions are met. A message displays in the information and entertainment display screen and an audible warning sounds when you switch the ignition off after any of the following conditions have been met: • A rear door is opened or closed while the ignition is on. • You switch the ignition on within 15 minutes of a rear door opening and closing. • You switch the ignition on within 15 minutes of the alert having displayed or sounded. Note: It is possible to receive no alert when there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert conditions are not met. For example, if a rear seat occupant does not enter the vehicle through a rear door. Note: The audible warning does not sound when the front door is opened before you switch the ignition off. SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Vehicle. 3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off. Note: The default setting is on. WARNING: On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. Note: Performing a master reset causes the system to switch on again. 136 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear Occupant Alert System (If Equipped) Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped) When you switch the system off, a message appears every six months as a reminder that the system is off. You can switch the system back on or leave it off. REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM INDICATORS E350472 Message Check rear seats for occupants. Displays when you switch your vehicle off after the alert conditions are met. The message displays for a short period of time. Press Close to acknowledge and remove the message. Note: Depending on your SYNC version, the graphic may look different from what you see here. REAR OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS Sounds when you switch your vehicle off after the alert conditions are met. The warning sounds for a short period of time. 137 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) GARAGE DOOR OPENER PRECAUTIONS WHAT IS THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER HomeLink Wireless Control System WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. E188211 Note: Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with your vehicle in the garage. The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter integrated into the driver’s sun visor. Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming. HOW DOES THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER WORK Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. See Clearing the Garage Door Opener (page 140). The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. You can program garage doors as well as entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting. GARAGE DOOR OPENER LIMITATIONS Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com or by calling the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal. Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See Clearing the Garage Door Opener (page 140). U.S. gate operators time-out in the same manner. 138 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 4. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button you want to program while watching the indicator light on HomeLink. Continue to hold the hand-held button until the HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly or is continuously on. Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator or garage door opener. See Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate Opener Motor (page 140). Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER TO YOUR HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER This process is to program your in-vehicle HomeLink function button with your hand-held transmitter. 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. Note: If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed. If your HomeLink was previously programmed, you may need to erase your HomeLink buttons. See Clearing the Garage Door Opener (page 140). Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes rapidly, repeat step 5. Note: If your device still does not operate, you must program your garage door. See Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page 139). 6. To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 – 4. PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER TO YOUR GARAGE DOOR OPENER MOTOR E188212 1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, switch your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle. 2. Press and release one of the three HomeLink function buttons that you would like to program. 3. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program. E142659 139 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 1. Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor, you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps. 2. Return to your vehicle. 1. Press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes to a rapidly blinking or continuously on light. 2. Release the hand-held transmitter button. 3. Press and hold the HomeLink function button you want to program for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. Note: If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes rapidly, repeat Step 3. Note: If your device still does not operate, you must program your garage door. See Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Garage Door Opener Motor (page 139). E188212 3. Press and hold one of the three HomeLink function buttons you want to program for two seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time. 4. To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 – 4. CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER TO YOUR GATE OPENER MOTOR Gate Operator / Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators “time-out” in the same manner. E188213 1. Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. 140 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the indicator light above the buttons flashes rapidly. Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 2. When the indicator light flashes, release the buttons. Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. REPROGRAMMING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow programming steps. GARAGE DOOR OPENER RADIO FREQUENCIES FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that could cause undesired operation. 141 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing USB Ports PLAYING MEDIA USING THE USB PORT LOCATING THE USB PORTS Data Transfer USB Ports WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The USB Ports could be in the following locations: • • • On the lower instrument panel. Inside the media bin. Inside the center console. Note: These USB ports can also charge devices. Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have data transfer capabilities. Note: We recommend using only USB-IF certified cables and adapters. Non-certified cables and adapters may not work. Connect your device to the USB port. Press the audio button on the feature bar. Charge Only USB Ports E100027 Select Sources. The USB ports could be in the following locations: Select the USB option. • • • • • • Press the button to play a track. Press the button again to pause the track. On the lower instrument panel. On the upper instrument panel. Inside the media bin. Inside the center console. On the rear of the center console. In the cargo area. Press the button to skip to the next track. Press and hold the button to fast forward through the track. Press the button once to return to the beginning of a track. Repeatedly press the button to return to previous tracks. Press and hold the button to fast rewind. 142 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing USB Ports CHARGING A DEVICE Connect your device to the USB port. You can use the charger when the vehicle is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is running, or when SYNC is on. 143 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet Rear of the Center Console WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET The power outlet can power devices that use a household plug. POWER OUTLET PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 400 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury. E337926 POWER OUTLET INDICATORS The power outlet indicator illuminates to let you know the status of the system. Note: The vehicle provides up to 400 watts when in park and up to 300 watts when in drive mode. This wattage is divided between multiple outlets when in use at the same time. Indicator Status Description On The power point is working, the ignition is on, or the vehicle is in accessory mode. Off The power point is off, the ignition is off, or the vehicle is not in accessory mode. Flashing The power point is in fault mode. LOCATING THE POWER OUTLET The power outlet is on the rear of the center console. Note: Due to different technologies used on its construction, some devices may exceed the capacity shown on its label when they are initially plugged in. 144 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 120V Power Outlet Note: The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the Watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on. 145 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V Power Outlet WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET The power outlet can power devices using a 12 V outlet adapter. POWER OUTLET PRECAUTIONS When you switch the vehicle on, you can use the socket to power 12 V appliances with a maximum current rating of 20 A. Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse could blow. Do not plug in any device that supplies power to the vehicle through the power points. This could result in damage to vehicle systems. Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the vehicle is off. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods. LOCATING THE POWER OUTLET Power outlets may be in the following locations: • On the lower instrument panel. • Inside the center console. • On the front of the center console. • On the rear of the center console. • In the cargo area. • On the passenger side floor panel. • 3rd row on the quarter trim panels. 146 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to: • This device may not cause interference. • This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WHAT IS THE WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER The wireless accessory charger allows you to charge one compatible Qi wireless charging device on the charging area. WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER PRECAUTIONS Keep the charging area clean and remove foreign objects prior to charging a device. Do not place items with a magnetic strip, for example passports, parking tickets or credit cards, near the charging area when charging a device. Damage may occur to the magnetic strip. WARNING: Wireless charging devices can affect the operation of implanted medical devices, including cardiac pacemakers. If you have any implanted medical devices, we recommend that you consult with your physician. Do not place metal objects, for example remote controls, coins and candy wrappers, on or near the charging area when charging a device. Metal objects may heat up and degrade the charging performance, in addition to causing error messages and interruptions in charging. Tests on this equipment show that it complies with part 18 of the FCC Rules. • This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, please consult the dealer. • This product is not end-user serviceable. Note: The rate of charge, or charging power, is controlled by the device. During charging, the device and the charger could heat up, this is normal. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the device may stop charging. Note: If the system detects a foreign object or if the device is misaligned on the charging area, a message appears on the display. LOCATING THE WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. E297549 147 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing The charging area is on the center console or in the media bin below the instrument panel. Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped) Displays on the status bar when wireless charging is in progress. CHARGING A WIRELESS DEVICE Note: The charging performance may be affected if your device is in a case. It may be necessary to remove the case to wirelessly charge your device. Place the device on the center of the charging surface with the charging side down. The charging stops after your device reaches a full charge. Note: Software and firmware updates may affect device compatibility, including the use of unofficial software or firmware. Customers should verify charging functionality with their specific devices in-vehicle. You can use the charger when the vehicle is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is running, or when SYNC is on. WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER – TROUBLESHOOTING WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGER – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Phone misaligned or object between phone and charger detected. Correct the condition to resume charging. Behavior Description Pop-up window. The system stops charging your device if the system detects the phone is misaligned, or a foreign metal object is on the charging surface. 148 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Storage GLOVE COMPARTMENT CENTER CONSOLE OPENING THE GLOVE COMPARTMENT OPENING THE CENTER CONSOLE E310218 E333116 Push the latch to open the center console. Pull the latch to the left to open. LOCKING THE CENTER CONSOLE LOCKING THE GLOVE COMPARTMENT The lower glove compartment may be locked using the key. A B E333115 You can lock the center console using the key. E351063 A Unlock. B Lock. 149 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Storage UNDER FLOOR STORAGE MAP POCKET LOCATING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT UNDER FLOOR STORAGE LOCATING THE MAP POCKET A map pocket and optional hook and MOLLE system are on the backs of the front seats. E332867 Lift the strap to access the under floor storage in the luggage compartment. GLASSES HOLDER LOCATING THE GLASSES HOLDER E337638 A. MOLLE system (if equipped). B. Hooks (if equipped). C. Map pocket. Note: The recommended weight limit for this system is 7 lb (3 kg). E306967 The glasses holder is in the overhead console. Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. 150 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. E340581 WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Switching the Ignition Off When the ignition is on or in accessory mode, press the push button ignition switch once without your foot on the brake pedal. Switching the Ignition to Accessory Mode WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. When the ignition is off, press the push button ignition switch once without your foot on the brake pedal. All electrical circuits and accessories are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. Note: Your vehicle has a battery saver feature that shuts your vehicle off when it detects a certain amount of battery drain, or after about 30 minutes of inactivity in accessory mode. If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following: • Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm). • Set your climate control to outside air. Starting the Engine With the transmission in park (P), press the brake pedal and press the push button ignition switch. An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition is on and when the engine starts. 151 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Note: The system may not function if the passive key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. Before starting your vehicle, check the following: • Make sure that the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure that the parking brake is on. • Make sure that the transmission is in park (P). Note: A valid key must be inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine. STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Fully press the brake pedal. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE MANUAL TRANSMISSION Before starting your vehicle, check the following: • Make sure that the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure that the parking brake is on. • Make sure the transmission is in neutral. 1. Fully press the clutch pedal. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. E340581 2. Press the push button ignition switch. Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts. Note: The engine takes longer to start at lower temperatures. It may crank for several seconds when very cold. RESTARTING THE ENGINE AFTER STOPPING IT E340581 The system allows you to start the engine within 10 seconds of switching it off, even if it does not detect a valid passive key. 2. Press the push button ignition switch. Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts. Within 10 seconds of switching the engine off, fully press the brake or clutch pedal and press the push button ignition switch. After 10 seconds, you can no longer start the engine if the system does not detect a valid passive key. Note: The engine takes longer to start at lower temperatures. It may crank for several seconds when very cold. 152 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine When you start the engine, it remains running until you press the push button ignition switch, even if your vehicle does not detect a valid passive key. If you open and close a door when the engine is running, the system searches for a valid passive key. • ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF • • EQUIPPED) ENGINE BLOCK HEATER PRECAUTIONS • WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. • • WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock. • WARNING: Do not fully close the hood, or allow it to drop under its own weight when using the engine block heater. This could damage the power cable and may cause an electrical short resulting in fire, injury and property damage. • • We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation: • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. Use as short an extension cord as possible. Do not use multiple extension cords. Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire. If the block heater cord is under the hood, do not remove the wiring from its original location. Do not close the hood on the extension wiring. Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles. Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for about 30 minutes. Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before starting and driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use. Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. HOW DOES THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER WORK The engine block heater warms the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to quickly respond. The equipment includes a heater element installed in the engine block and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 220-240 volt AC electrical source. 153 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C). STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN YOUR VEHICLE IS STATIONARY AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION USING THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER 1. Shift into park (P). 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Wait until the engine reaches idle speed. Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity. STOPPING THE ENGINE E340581 4. Press the push button ignition switch. STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN YOUR VEHICLE IS STATIONARY MANUAL TRANSMISSION STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN YOUR VEHICLE IS MOVING MANUAL TRANSMISSION 1. Shift into neutral. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Wait until the engine reaches idle speed. WARNING: Switching off the engine when your vehicle is still moving results in a significant decrease in braking assistance. Higher effort is required to apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle. A significant decrease in steering assistance could also occur. The steering does not lock, but higher effort could be required to steer your vehicle. When you switch the ignition off, some electrical circuits, for example airbags, also turn off. If you unintentionally switch the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the engine. E340581 4. Press the push button ignition switch. 154 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine E340581 E340581 1. Press and hold the push button ignition switch until the engine stops, or press it three times within two seconds. 2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 3. Apply the parking brake. 1. Press and hold the push button ignition switch until the engine stops, or press it three times within two seconds. 2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 3. Shift into park (P). 4. Apply the parking brake. STOPPING THE ENGINE WHEN YOUR VEHICLE IS MOVING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP WHAT IS AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP WARNING: Switching off the engine when your vehicle is still moving results in a significant decrease in braking assistance. Higher effort is required to apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle. A significant decrease in steering assistance could also occur. The steering does not lock, but higher effort could be required to steer your vehicle. When you switch the ignition off, some electrical circuits, for example airbags, also turn off. If you unintentionally switch the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the engine. Automatic engine stop switches the engine off if it has been idling for an extended period to help you save fuel. HOW DOES AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP WORK Automatic engine stop turns the engine off. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before the engine shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do. 155 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine SWITCHING AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP ON AND OFF 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Vehicle Settings. 3. Switch 30min Max Idle on or off. Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown. If you switch it off, it turns on each time you switch the ignition on. OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic engine stop feature. When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle. E327286 You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the 30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following: • Pressing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. • Pressing the OK or RESET button during the countdown. 1. Open the floor console storage compartment lid. 2. With the buttons facing upward and the unlock button facing the front of your vehicle, place the passive key into the backup slot. 3. With the key in this position, press the brake pedal then press the push button ignition switch to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle. ACCESSING THE PASSIVE KEY BACKUP POSITION STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – TROUBLESHOOTING If you are unable to start the engine, do the following: STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – WARNING LAMPS Malfunction Indicator Lamp If it illuminates when the engine is running, the on-board diagnostics system is detecting a malfunction of the vehicle emission control system. 156 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Powertrain Warning Lamp If it flashes, engine misfire could be occurring. Increased exhaust gas temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components. Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration, and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. If it illuminates when the engine is running, this indicates a powertrain or four-wheel drive fault. If it flashes when you are driving, immediately reduce the vehicle speed. Avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration, and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. If both lamps illuminate when the engine is running, stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Continuing to drive your vehicle could cause reduced power or the engine to stop. Switch the ignition off and attempt to restart the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Cranking Time Exceeded Displays if you exceed the starting time limit. You cannot attempt to start the engine for 15 minutes. If you cannot start the engine after 15 minutes passes, have your vehicle immediately checked. Starting System Fault Displays if you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key. The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. No Key Detected Displays if the system does not detect a valid passive key. 157 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Note: The engine cranks for a short period of time and then it stops. 4. Release the accelerator pedal. Why is the engine idle speed high when I am starting the engine? The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting is optimized to minimize vehicle emissions and maximize cabin comfort and fuel economy. Why does the engine not crank? You can only attempt to start the engine for a limited amount of time before the starting system temporarily disables. If you exceed the starting time limit, a message may appear and you cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. E340581 5. Press the push button ignition switch. Why does the system not detect a passive key? Why do I experience different driving characteristics? If the system does not detect a passive key and you are unable to start the engine, insert the passive key into the backup position and press the push button ignition switch to start the engine. See Accessing the Passive Key Backup Position (page 156). If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for about 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. Why can I not start the engine? If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the following: 1. Fully press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal. Note: Make sure that the parking brake is applied. Note: Make sure that the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 3. Press the push button ignition switch. 158 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Start in Gear - Manual Transmission 2. Firmly press the brake pedal when in gear and press and hold the Start button. 3. When the engine starts and your vehicle begins to move, release the brake pedal. WHAT IS START IN GEAR Crank in gear allows the driver to restart the engine and launch the vehicle after stalling in four-wheel drive low (4L). Use the information displayed on the cluster to direct you when to apply the brake and start button. While driving off road, it is possible to stall the engine trying to maneuver terrains. Trying to restart your vehicle by using the clutch or shifting into neutral to restart the engine can be difficult and cause potential roll back situations when driving uphill. Note: Crank in gear is an alternate name for the feature. START IN GEAR PRECAUTIONS Always press the brake pedal when starting the vehicle to prevent unwanted vehicle movement, and release after starting to drive away. Start in gear is only possible with the brake pedal pressed. START IN GEAR LIMITATIONS You can only use start in gear in four-wheel drive low (L). USING START IN GEAR When driving difficult terrains in four-wheel drive low (4L), it is possible to stall the engine when your vehicle is not able to maintain speed. To easily start the engine and launch your vehicle, perform the following steps: 1. After the vehicle stalls an information message displays in the cluster, To start in gear select YES and press OK. 159 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Start in Gear - Manual Transmission START IN GEAR – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS START IN GEAR – TROUBLESHOOTING Can I use start in gear in reverse? START IN GEAR – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Do you want to start in gear? After stalling your vehicle, a message can display prompting you start in gear is now available. Press Brake and Hold Start Button to Start in Gear You can use start in gear in any forward or reverse gear. Will this start my vehicle? Upon following the maneuvers, the engine starts, runs and launches the vehicle in gear. If my vehicle stalls, do I have to use start in gear? After your vehicle stalls in four-wheel drive low, you do not have to use start in gear. You can still start your vehicle normally with use of the clutch. For use with push button vehicles, press the brake pedal and press the push to start button to begin start in gear. Start in Gear Canceled After stalling in four-wheel drive low, if your vehicle does not meet all the requirements or you make any other inputs, a message can display in the cluster. Start in Gear Limit Reached Normal Start Available After stalling in four-wheel drive low, a message can display if you have incorrectly attempted a start in gear situation or have attempted to many times. How hard does the brake need pressing for start in gear? The brake requires a hard press at the time you press the push button, and then you need to release it to allow the vehicle to move. 160 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Auto-Start-Stop WHAT IS AUTO-START-STOP WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into park (P), switch the ignition off and remove the key before you open the hood or have any service or repair work completed. If you do not switch the ignition off, the engine could restart at any time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The system is designed to help reduce fuel consumption and CO2 emissions by stopping the engine when it is idling, for example at traffic lights. AUTO-START-STOP PRECAUTIONS - MANUAL TRANSMISSION SWITCHING AUTO-STARTSTOP ON AND OFF WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into neutral, switch the ignition off and remove the key before you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The system turns on when you switch the ignition on. Press the button to switch the system off. WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into neutral, switch the ignition off and remove the key before you open the hood or have any service or repair work completed. If you do not switch the ignition off, the engine could restart at any time. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: OFF illuminates in the switch. Note: Deactivating the system using the button lasts only one key cycle. Press the button again to switch the system back on. Note: The system turns off if it detects a malfunction. If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. AUTO-START-STOP PRECAUTIONS - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION STOPPING THE ENGINE MANUAL TRANSMISSION 1. Stop your vehicle. 2. Shift into neutral. 3. Release the clutch pedal and the accelerator pedal. Note: To obtain maximum benefit from the system, shift into neutral and release the clutch pedal whenever you stop your vehicle for more than three seconds. WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into park (P), switch the ignition off and remove the key before you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: Power assist steering turns off when the engine stops. 161 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Auto-Start-Stop STOPPING THE ENGINE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION RESTARTING THE ENGINE MANUAL TRANSMISSION Stop your vehicle, keep your foot on the brake pedal and the transmission in drive (D). Press the clutch pedal. A message appears in the information display if the system requires you to take action. Note: Power assist steering turns off when the engine stops. Message Condition Action Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start Engine The system needs to restart Press the accelerator pedal, the engine but requires your brake pedal or clutch pedal confirmation. to restart the engine. Auto StartStop Select Neutral To Start Engine The system needs to restart Shift into neutral to restart the engine but cannot the engine. because the transmission is in gear. 162 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Auto-Start-Stop The Auto-Start-Stop indicator illuminates green when the engine stops. It flashes amber and a message appears when you need to take action. RESTARTING THE ENGINE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Release the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal. A message appears in the information display if the system requires you to take action. The Auto-Start-Stop indicator illuminates gray with a strikethrough when the system is not available. AUTO-START-STOP INDICATORS Note: You can display the reason why the system is not available in the information display. E146361 WARNING: The system may require the engine to automatically restart when the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates green or flashes amber. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. AUTO-START-STOP – TROUBLESHOOTING AUTO-START-STOP – INFORMATION MESSAGES - MANUAL TRANSMISSION Message Auto StartStop Manual Restart Required Condition The system is not functioning. 163 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Action Restart the engine yourself. Auto-Start-Stop AUTO-START-STOP – INFORMATION MESSAGES AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Message A message appears in the information display if the system requires you to take action. Condition Action Auto StartStop Press Brake The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal to to Start Engine the engine but requires your restart the engine. confirmation. Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start Engine The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal or the the engine but requires your accelerator pedal to restart confirmation. the engine. Auto StartStop Shift to P, then Restart Engine The System is not functioning. 164 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Shift in park (P) and restart the engine. Auto-Start-Stop AUTO-START-STOP – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Can I permanently switch the system off? Why does the engine not always stop when I expect it to? No. The system plays an important role in reducing the fuel consumption and the CO2 emissions. The system is designed to work in a way that complements other vehicle systems, allowing them to operate at optimum performance. Will the frequent engine starts cause parts to wear out? Your vehicle has an enhanced battery and starter motor that are designed for the increased number of engine starts. The system does not stop the engine if: • The driver door is open. • Your vehicle is at high altitude. • The heated windshield is on. • The engine is warming up. • The outside temperature is too low or too high. • The battery charge is low. • The battery temperature is outside the optimal operating range. • The engine is required to run to maintain interior climate and reduce fogging. Why does the engine sometimes restart when I do not expect it to? The system is designed to work in a way that complements other vehicle systems, allowing them to operate at optimum performance. The system restarts the engine if: • You switch the heated windshield on. • You switch maximum defrost on. • Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in neutral. • The engine is required to run to maintain adequate brake system assistance. • The engine is required to run to maintain interior climate and reduce fogging. 165 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling • FUEL AND REFUELING PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. • WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • WARNING: Fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. WARNING: Fuel may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. • WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. • WARNING: Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Follow these guidelines when refueling: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. • Switch the engine off before refueling. 166 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately call a physician, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be apparent for hours. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel vapor can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you splash fuel in your eyes, immediately remove contact lenses, if worn, flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and thoroughly wash your skin with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing fuel vapors could cause an adverse reaction, serious personal injury or sickness. Immediately call a physician if you experience any adverse reactions. Fuel and Refueling Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. FUEL QUALITY SELECTING THE CORRECT FUEL Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law. E161513 Your vehicle operates on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer (page 283). LOCATING THE FUEL FILLER FUNNEL Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. The fuel filler funnel is in the rear floor compartment with the jack and tools. We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, visit www.toptiergas.com. 167 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling RUNNING OUT OF FUEL WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. FILLING A PORTABLE FUEL CONTAINER When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel included with your vehicle. See Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel (page 167). WARNING: Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container. Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they may not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up, which can produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it. • Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it. • Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following: 1. Fully open the fuel filler door. ADDING FUEL FROM A PORTABLE FUEL CONTAINER E157452 WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground. 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the fuel filler inlet. 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container. 4. Remove the fuel filler funnel. 5. Fully close the fuel filler door. 6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it back in your vehicle or correctly dispose of it. WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. 168 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling REFUELING YOUR VEHICLE Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine. WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. Note: You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal. Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel. WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. REFUELING REFUELING SYSTEM OVERVIEW A WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. B WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. WARNING: Stop refueling when the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. C E267248 A Fuel filler door. B Fuel tank filler valve. C Fuel tank filler pipe. WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. WARNING: Wait at least five seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. 1. 169 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fully open the fuel filler door. Fuel and Refueling 2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for your vehicle. E206912 5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown. Refer to A for left hand drive or B for right hand drive. E139202 E119081 3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch. Keep the fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler pipe. 6. When the pump shuts off, wait five seconds, then raise the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove it. 7. Fully close the fuel filler door. Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle immediately checked. MANUALLY OPENING THE FUEL FILLER DOOR Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler cap. E327438 4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position A when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position B can affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full. 170 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling FUEL AND REFUELING – TROUBLESHOOTING FUEL AND REFUELING – WARNING LAMPS If it illuminates when you are driving, refuel as soon as possible. FUEL AND REFUELING – INFORMATION MESSAGES Refueling System Warning E206911 A Left-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release. B Right-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release. If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close, a message could appear in the information display. Message Check Fuel Fill Inlet If the message appears, do the following: C Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it. 1. D Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it. 2. 3. 4. 5. FUEL TANK CAPACITY Advertised Capacity 6. The advertised capacity is the maximum amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. 7. In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. 8. 171 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N). Apply the parking brake. Fully open the fuel filler door. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any debris that may be restricting its movement. Remove any debris from the fuel tank filler valve. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel filler funnel provided with your vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel (page 167). This action should dislodge any debris that may be preventing the fuel tank filler valve from fully closing. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe. Fuel and Refueling 9. Fully close the fuel filler door. Note: The message may not immediately reset. If the message continues to appear and a warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 172 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter is part of your vehicle's emissions system and filters harmful pollutants from the exhaust gas. Note: Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, or services a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. CATALYTIC CONVERTER PRECAUTIONS CATALYTIC CONVERTER – TROUBLESHOOTING WHAT IS THE CATALYTIC CONVERTER CATALYTIC CONVERTER – WARNING LAMPS WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. Your vehicle has an on-board diagnostics system that monitors the emission control system. If any of the following warning lamps illuminate, this may indicate that the on-board diagnostics system has detected an emission control system malfunction. WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the catalytic converter. The catalytic converter heats up to a very high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and stays hot after the engine is switched off. To avoid damaging the catalytic converter: • Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. • Do not run the engine with a spark plug lead disconnected. • Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 301). • Use the correct fuel. See Fuel and Refueling (page 166). • Do not switch the ignition off when your vehicle is moving. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule. Continuing to drive your vehicle may cause reduced power or the engine to stop. Failure to respond to a warning lamp may cause damage that your vehicle Warranty may not cover. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 173 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Manual Transmission Note: You can only move the gearshift lever to reverse (R) by raising the collar below the gearshift knob up before shifting to reverse. This is a lockout feature which protects the transmission from accidentally engaging reverse (R) when intending to select first (1). MANUAL TRANSMISSION PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure you shift the gearshift lever to first gear. Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. If reverse (R) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal, then raise the collar and shift to reverse (R) again. Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, premature wear to transmission components or damage the transmission. Note: Do not move the transmission selector lever to reverse (R) gear when your vehicle is moving. This can cause damage to the transmission. Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill when waiting on a hill. These actions reduce the life of the clutch and could nullify a clutch warranty claim. Note: Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into reverse (R). Failure to do so could damage the transmission. SHIFTING INTO REVERSE CRAWLER GEAR Reverse (R) WHAT IS CRAWLER GEAR 1. Allows you to cruise at ultra low speeds with the clutch fully engaged, when driving through obstacles and jagged terrain. Press the clutch pedal to the floor to disengage clutch. 2. Shift into reverse (R) by raising the collar below the gearshift knob up, then moving the lever fully to the left, then forward. USING CRAWLER GEAR Crawler (C) Shifting into crawler gear: 1. Press the clutch pedal to the floor to disengage clutch. 2. Shift into crawler (C) by raising the collar below the gearshift knob up, then moving the lever fully to the left, then backward. E99067 174 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Manual Transmission RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS Recommended Shift Speeds For best fuel efficiency when driving your vehicle, shift to the next gear by 3000 RPM. Shifting at a higher RPM such as 3000-6000 RPM can increase the performance capabilities of the vehicle. However, higher engine and transmission speeds can increase wear and reduce fuel economy. E99067 Note: You can only move the gearshift lever to crawler (C) by raising the collar below the gearshift knob up before shifting to crawler. This is a lockout feature which protects the transmission from accidentally engaging crawler (C) when intending to select second (2). When downshifting your vehicle, always shift at the lowest engine RPM possible to match your driving conditions. This is usually under 2000 RPM for all forward gears, except for downshifting into the crawler (C) gear which you should do below 1500 RPM. See Manual Transmission Precautions (page 174). If crawler (C) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal, then raise the collar and shift to crawler (C) again. Note: Always fully depress the clutch pedal between gear shifts. The crawler gear enables an easier start in unusual conditions or terrain. You should change up to first (1) when possible and refrain from using crawler (C) at high engine speeds as transmission damage could result. See Manual Transmission Precautions (page 174). In normal use, ensure your vehicle is stationary before selecting crawler (C) as it is primarily a starting gear. If you change down to crawler (C) from first (1) while the vehicle is moving, ensure an engine speed is below 1500 rpm, and that the clutch pedal is fully pressed for a smooth transition to crawler gear. 175 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Manual Transmission 1. Check the system for any visual leaks before continuing. 2. Make sure the clutch pedal is in the most upward position. 3. Remove the cap and diaphragm and inspect the fluid level. To avoid contamination, make sure the reservoir cap remains in place and fully tightened unless you are checking the fluid level. 4. Reinstall the reservoir cap and diaphragm. CHECKING THE MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL Only use fluid that meets our specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). Note: A fluid level on the step line in the reservoir is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the system. Have your vehicle checked immediately. MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION E339771 Transmission fill level is 0.16 in (4 mm) from oil fill plug. See Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Specification (page 403). CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL CLUTCH FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). E310419 176 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Manual Transmission MANUAL TRANSMISSION – TROUBLESHOOTING MANUAL TRANSMISSION – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Using Crawler Gear E322877 When shifting into crawler (C), make sure your vehicle is completely stationary and that the engine speed is below 1500 RPM. Because the low gear ratio enables you to start the vehicle in off-road conditions, shift out of crawler (C) as soon as possible. Prolonged use of crawler (C) can cause transmission wear and increased fuel consumption. Note: Use crawler (C) when driving your vehicle off-road, or in hilly, rocky terrain. 177 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Automatic Transmission The electric parking brake could apply when you shift to park (P) without the brake pedal fully pressed. The electric parking brake applies when you shift to park (P) on large slopes. The electric parking brake releases with the drive away release function or manually as described in the Releasing the Electric Parking Brake section. See Electric Parking Brake (page 198). AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Apply the parking brake, shift into park (P), switch the ignition off and remove the key before you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: A warning tone sounds if you open the driver door and you have not shifted the transmission selector to park (P). WARNING: Do not use tow/haul when the road surface is slippery. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle. REVERSE (R) WARNING: When your vehicle is stationary, keep the brake pedal fully pressed when shifting gears. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury, death or property damage. WARNING: Move the transmission selector lever to reverse (R) only when your vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle speed. This position allows your vehicle to move backward. Come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R). WARNING: Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than a few seconds will limit engine performance, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury. NEUTRAL (N) WARNING: In neutral (N) your vehicle is free to roll. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION POSITIONS This position allows your vehicle to roll free. Hold the brake pedal down when in this position. PARK (P) Note: You can start your vehicle in this position. This position locks the driveline and prevents the wheels from turning. Come to a complete stop before putting your vehicle into and out of park (P). DRIVE (D) Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy, and allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears. 178 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Automatic Transmission MANUAL (M) SHIFTING YOUR VEHICLE INTO GEAR To select manual mode press the (M) button on the shifter. Note: In order to activate manual mode your vehicle must be in drive (D). This position allows you to change gears up or down as preferred using + or buttons on the shifter lever. To return to the normal drive (D) position, press the (M) button again to exit manual mode. SPORT (S) To activate Sport Mode, press the button on the gearshift lever E176099 until sport mode is selected. The SPORT or S indicator light illuminates in the instrument display when the system becomes active. E324063 1. Fully press down on the brake pedal. 2. Press the front button on the shifter and move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. 3. When you finish driving, come to a complete stop. 4. Press the front button on the shifter, move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in park (P). The sport mode feature: • Provides additional slope, engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This increases engine RPM during engine braking. • Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy. • Selects gears more quickly and at higher engine speeds. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION POSITION INDICATORS To deactivate the sport mode feature and return to normal driving mode, press the button on the gearshift lever again. The SPORT or S indicator light deactivates when the system turns off. The sport mode feature also deactivates when you power down your vehicle. E324267 179 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Automatic Transmission MANUALLY SHIFTING GEARS WARNING: When doing this procedure, you need to take the transmission out of park (P) which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully apply the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate. SHIFTING USING THE BUTTONS ON THE SELECTOR LEVER Your vehicle has a SelectShift Automatic transmission gearshift lever. This gives you the ability to change gears up or down, without a clutch, as preferred. To prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which could cause it to stall, SelectShift still makes some downshifts if it determines that you have not downshifted in time. Although SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time if it determines that damage to the engine from over-revving does not occur. WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the stoplamps are not working. See Fuse Precautions (page 310). Note: SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. Shift manually by pressing the + button. If the vehicle battery has no charge, jump start your vehicle. See Jump Starting Precautions (page 300). Note: Engine damage could occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting. USING BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK WHAT IS BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK Brake shift interlock prevents you from shifting out of park (P) when you have switched the ignition on and not pressed the brake pedal. BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK PRECAUTIONS E346836 WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the stoplamps are working. 1. 180 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Insert a screwdriver between the shifter boot material and trim ring to access the retainer tabs from the top panel trim ring. Automatic Transmission 2. Lift the shifter boot upward. 3. Locate the release lever on the side of the transmission selector lever. 4. Using a screwdriver, move the release lever toward the front of the transmission selector lever. 5. When holding the release lever in the forward position, move the transmission selector lever out of the park (P) position and into another gear. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AUDIBLE WARNINGS Transmission Not In Park(P) Audible Warning Sounds if any of the following occur: • • • You switch your vehicle off before shifting into park (P). You open the driver door before shifting into park (P). You unlatch your seatbelt before shifting into park (P) when the driver door is removed. See Removable Windows (page 334). 181 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive high or four-wheel drive low, the system provides electronically locked power to the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or slippery conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. Selecting four-wheel drive low also provides additional gearing for increased torque multiplication for conditions like deep sand, steep slopes, or pulling heavy objects. HOW DOES FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE WORK - 4X4 WITH PART TIME ENGAGEMENT 4x4 With Part Time Engagement (If Equipped) This system offers the driver two-wheel drive high, four-wheel drive high, and four-wheel drive low as available modes of operation. When you select either four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low, the system provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or slippery conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. Selecting four-wheel drive low also provides additional gearing for increased torque multiplication for conditions like deep sand, steep slopes, or pulling heavy objects. Additionally, the system is capable of recreational flat towing by putting the transfer case into neutral (N). See Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle (page 307). FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. Additionally, the system is capable of recreational flat towing by putting the transfer case into neutral (N). See Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle (page 307). HOW DOES FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE WORK - ADVANCED 4X4 WITH 4A MODE WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Advanced 4x4 With Automatic On Demand Engagement (If Equipped) This system monitors various vehicle sensory inputs to provide an increased level of performance. This system offers the driver two-wheel drive high, four-wheel drive auto, four-wheel drive high, and four-wheel drive low as available modes of operation. When you select four-wheel drive auto, the system continuously varies power to the front wheels for optimum performance for all on-road conditions. When you select either four-wheel drive 182 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive If there is a significant difference between the size of the spare tire and the remaining tires, you could have limited four-wheel drive functionality, added noise, discomfort and driveline damage. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE LIMITATIONS Do not use four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and can damage drive components. Four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low mode is only for use on consistently slippery or loose surfaces. Use of four-wheel drive low mode on these surfaces could produce some noise, such as occasional clunks, but should not damage drive components. Due to normal tire wear, your spare tire is not necessarily the same size as your on-road tires, which makes your spare tire a dissimilar size. Use the spare tire on a limited basis only. When driving with a dissimilar wheel and tire assembly do not: • For vehicles with an electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer case, the driveline could become mechanically blocked when attempting to shift out of a four-wheel drive mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. • • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) while operating in a four-wheel drive mode. Select a four-wheel drive mode unless the vehicle is stationary. Use a four-wheel drive mode on dry pavement. You could have limited four-wheel drive functionality when driving with a dissimilar wheel and tire assembly, especially when driving in a mechanically locked four-wheel drive mode. You can experience the following: Note: When your vehicle comes with the 4x4 part-time selectable engagement transfer case and you are transitioning from consistently loose or slippery surfaces, be sure the four-wheel drive system is not mechanically blocked once you are on dry, hard surfaced roads in two-wheel drive high. • Note: In certain scenarios, where the four-wheel drive system has difficulty engaging, a To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH or To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h message could appear in the instrument cluster. You can also see this message when engaging the four-wheel drive system in extreme cold climates at the beginning of the drive cycle. Once the driveline warms up, shifting to four-wheel drive can resume as normal. • • Additional noise from the transfer case or other drive components. Difficulty shifting in and out of a mechanically locked four-wheel drive mode. Driveline component damage. Mechanical Shift Blocking On vehicles with an electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer case, the transfer case distributes torque to the front wheels by mechanically interlocking the front and rear driveshafts together. Various external factors can affect shifting performance of this type of system including, but not limited to: Operating Four-Wheel Drive with a Spare or Mismatched Tires On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the spare tire can affect the four-wheel drive system. • • • 183 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle acceleration. Dissimilar tire sizes. High steering input. Four-Wheel Drive For vehicles with an electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer case, when shifting into two-wheel drive high on dry, hard surfaced roads, we recommend that you follow the following procedure to reduce the likelihood of a mechanical shift block: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. SWITCHING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE ON AND OFF A vehicle that comes with four-wheel drive, when selected, has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction, which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. While driving straight, come to a complete stop on a flat, horizontal surface. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, shift into park (P). For vehicles with a manual transmission, press the clutch. Select 2H and wait for the 2H LED to become solid. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, shift into reverse (R). For vehicles with a manual transmission, select reverse (R) and release the clutch. Let the vehicle roll backward up to 3 ft (1 m) and press the brake. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, shift into drive (D). For vehicles with a manual transmission, press the clutch in again, select a forward gear and release the clutch. Let the vehicle roll forward up to 3 ft (1 m). On some four-wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and are not cause for concern. Note: Your four-wheel drive system is for use with a spare tire that is identical in make, model and size, to the road tires. We make four-wheel drive vehicles specially for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and having operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. The transfer case supplies power to all four wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select different four-wheel drive modes when necessary. If the system is mechanically blocked, one or more of the following actions can relieve the mechanical shift block: • • • • • • Momentary acceleration. Momentary braking. Bringing the vehicle to a stop. Shifting the transmission to neutral and back to drive. Shifting the transmission to reverse and back to drive. Driving the vehicle around a tight turn at a slow speed. 184 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive Note: A 4x4 Shift in Progress message appears in the information display indicating the shift is in progress. If any of the previous shift conditions are not met, the shift should not occur and the information display can guide the driver through the proper shifting procedures. SELECTING A FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODE - 4X4 WITH PART TIME ENGAGEMENT Note: If Shift Delayed Drive Forward displays in the information display, place the transmission in a forward gear, move your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift. Note: When the light is solid, the system has achieved the desired four-wheel drive mode. When a selected four-wheel drive mode light is blinking, the system is attempting to shift to that specific four-wheel drive mode. Note: When you achieve recreational towing, all lights will be off and the instrument cluster will display Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral. E345849 To select a four-wheel drive mode, push the button. • • • 2H - Two-wheel drive high. 4H - Four-wheel drive high. See Four-Wheel Drive High (page 187). 4L - Four-wheel drive low. See Four-Wheel Drive Low (page 187). Shifting to or from Four-Wheel Drive Low 1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 0 mph (0 km/h). 2. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, place in neutral (N). For vehicles with a manual transmission, fully depress the clutch pedal. 3. Push the 4L on the four-wheel drive mode selector. 185 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive Note: A 4x4 Shift in Progress message appears in the information display indicating the shift is in progress. If any of the previous shift conditions are not met, the shift should not occur and the information display can guide the driver through the proper shifting procedures. SELECTING A FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODE - ADVANCED 4X4 WITH 4A MODE Note: If Shift Delayed Drive Forward displays in the information display, place the transmission in a forward gear, move your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift. Note: When the light is solid, the system has achieved the desired four-wheel drive mode. When a selected four-wheel drive mode LED is blinking, the system is attempting to shift to that specific four-wheel drive mode. Note: When all lights are blinking have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. E324543 Note: When you achieve recreational towing, all lights will be off and the instrument cluster will display Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral. To select a four-wheel drive mode, push the button. • • • • 2H - Two-wheel drive high. 4A - Four-wheel drive Auto. See Four-Wheel Drive Auto (page 187). 4H - Four-wheel drive high. See Four-Wheel Drive High (page 187). 4L - Four-wheel drive low. See Four-Wheel Drive Low (page 187). FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODES TWO-WHEEL DRIVE HIGH Two-wheel drive high is for general on-road driving. Power is sent to the rear wheels only. Shifting to or from Four-Wheel Drive Low Note: Two-wheel drive high can turn on or off based on Drive Mode selection See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). 1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 0 mph (0 km/h). 2. For vehicles with an automatic Transmission, place in neutral (N). For vehicles with a manual transmission, fully depress the clutch pedal. 3. Push the 4L on the four-wheel drive mode selector. 186 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE AUTO (If FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE INDICATORS Equipped) Four-wheel drive auto provides electronically controlled four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels, as required, for increased traction in varying on-road conditions. The four-wheel drive auto tuning varies based on selected Drive Mode. See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185). Two-wheel Drive High Illuminates briefly when two-wheel drive high is selected. E181778 Four-wheel Drive Auto (If Equipped) Illuminates when four-wheel drive auto is selected. Note: Four-wheel drive auto can turn on or off automatically based on Drive Mode selection. See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185). E181781 Four-wheel Drive High Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is selected. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE HIGH E181779 Four-wheel drive high provides electronically or mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or winter conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. This mode is not for use on dry pavement. Four-wheel Drive Low Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is selected. E181780 TRANSFER CASE FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION Note: Four-wheel drive high can turn on or off automatically based on Drive Mode selection. See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185). See Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and Specification (page 405). FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE LOW Four-wheel drive low provides electronically or mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use on low traction surfaces, but does so with additional gearing for increased torque multiplication. This mode is only for off-road conditions such as deep sand, steep slopes, or pulling heavy objects. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE – TROUBLESHOOTING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE – WARNING LAMPS Illuminates when a four-wheel drive or power train fault is present. Note: Four-wheel drive low can turn on or off automatically based on drive mode selection. See Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode (page 185). 187 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive Note: When a system fault is present, the system can typically remain in whichever mode was selected prior to the fault condition occurring. It does not default to two-wheel drive in all circumstances. When this warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details For 4L slow to a stop Displays when the driver attempts to shift into fourwheel drive low when traveling at too high of a speed. For 4L Shift to N Displays when the driver attempts to shift into fourwheel drive low without the transmission in neutral (N). For 4L press Clutch Displays when the driver attempts to shift into fourwheel drive low without the clutch pedal pressed. To exit 4L slow to a stop Displays when the driver attempts to shift out of fourwheel drive low when traveling at too high of a speed. To Exit 4L Shift to N Displays when the driver attempts to shift out of fourwheel drive low without the transmission in neutral (N). To exit 4L Press Clutch Displays when the driver attempts to shift out of fourwheel drive low without the clutch pedal pressed. 4x4 Shift in Progress Displays when the four-wheel drive system is shifting into and out of two-wheel drive high or between high and low ranges. 4X4 Temporarily Locked Displays when the four-wheel drive system detects a driving condition which temporarily requires greater four-wheel drive performance. The system resumes normal function after the system no longer detects these driving conditions. 4x4 Temporarily Disabled Displays when the four-wheel system detects elevated system temperature and temporarily stops providing power to the front wheels. The system resumes normal function when the system temperature returns to normal. 4x4 Restored Displays when the four-wheel drive system resumes normal function. 188 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive Message Details Shift Delayed Drive Forward Displays when the transfer case is not able to complete a shift and requires forward motion to complete the shift. 4x4 OFF Displays when the system has become disabled due to mismatched tires or an external fault. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral Displays when neutral tow mode has been successfully engaged. Neutral Tow Disabled Displays when neutral tow mode has been successfully disengaged. Selected 4x4 Mode Not Available in Current Drive Mode Displays when the driver selects a four-wheel drive mode that is disallowed in the currently selected drive mode. To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h Displays when the system is unable to engage fourwheel drive high and requires the driver to slow down before attempting to engage. To Engage 4x4 Release Accelerator Pedal Displays when the four-wheel drive system requires the accelerator pedal to be released to perform the shift into four-wheel drive mode. 4x4 Performance Reduced See Manual Displays when the system has entered a degraded mode due to mismatched tires. 189 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped) Note: Switching the electronic locking differentials off while turning results in disengagement difficulties. If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel back and forth in small increments while maintaining control and following a straight line. WHAT IS THE ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL The electronic locking differential is a device housed in the front or rear axle, and when activated allows both wheels on that axle to turn at the same speed. The electronic locking differential can provide additional traction should your vehicle become stuck. You can activate the differential electronically and shift it on the fly within the operating speed range. The electronic differential automatically disengages when the vehicle speed exceeds a set value and it automatically reengages when the vehicle speed goes below a set value. See Switching the Electronic Locking Differential On and Off (page 190). It also automatically engages based on certain selected drive modes. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). The electronic locking differential is for use in mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition where you need maximum traction. It is not for use on dry pavement. SWITCHING THE ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL ON AND OFF Activating the Electronic Locking Differential Note: The electronic locking differentials are for off-road use only and not for use on dry pavement. Using the electronic locking differentials on dry pavement results in increased tire wear, noise and vibration. E333068 A Front locking differential switch B Rear locking differential switch You can activate the front or rear locking differential by pressing the switch on the center switch pack. Note: The front electronic locking differential is only available in four-wheel drive low. Note: Locking the front differential reduces your ability to make tight turning maneuvers and creates additional resistance to steering inputs. Front Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability Four-Wheel Drive Mode Maximum Engagement Speed Automatic Disengagement Speed Automatic ReEngagement Speed 4L 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h) 190 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped) Rear Electronic Locking Differential Engagement Speed and Availability Drive Modes (FourWheel Drive Modes) Maximum Engagement Speed Automatic Disengagement Speed Automatic ReEngagement Speed Normal (2H,4A, 4H) 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h) Eco (2H, 4A, 4H) 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h) Sport (2H, 4A, 4H) 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h) Slippery (2H, 4A, 4H) 20 mph (32 km/h) 25 mph (41 km/h) 20 mph (32 km/h) No Speed Limit No Speed Limit No Speed Limit Deep Snow/Sand 1 (4H, 4L) 1 Mud/Ruts (4H, 4L) Baja (2H, 4H, 4L) 1 Rock Crawl (4L) 1 Automatically engages when you select these drive modes. You have the ability to manually override the automatic engagement by pressing the electronic locking differential switch. Drive Modes (FourWheel Drive Modes) Maximum Engagement Speed Automatic Disengagement Speed Automatic ReEngagement Speed 4L No Speed Limit No Speed Limit No Speed Limit If the electronic locking differential is selected and the indicator in the cluster is gray or turns from amber to gray while driving, one of the following has occurred: ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL INDICATORS E325779 E328595 • • Rear locking differential Indicator. Front locking differential Indicator. • • If the front or rear indicator in the cluster is amber, both wheels of the indicated axle are locked together providing additional traction. 191 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Your vehicle speed is too high. The accelerator pedal is too high during an engagement attempt. Your vehicle is experiencing an anti-lock brake activation. The left and right wheel speed difference is too high during an engagement attempt. Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped) If the electronic locking differential is selected and the indicator in the cluster does not turn on, one of the following has occurred: • • • The electronic locking differential is not allowed in the current drive mode and is accompanied by SELECTED LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL NOT AVAILABLE IN CURRENT DRIVE MODE in the information display. The electronic locking differential is not allowed in the current 4x4 mode and is accompanied by SELECTED LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL NOT AVAILABLE IN CURRENT 4x4 MODE in the information display. The system has malfunctioned and is accompanied by CHECK LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL in the information display. See your authorized dealer for assistance. ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL – TROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details Selected Locking Differential Not Available in Current Drive Mode The selected electronic locking differential is not available in current drive mode. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). Selected Locking Differential Not Available in Current 4x4 Mode The selected electronic locking differential is not available in your current four-wheel drive mode. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). To Engage Locking Differential Release Accelerator Pedal The selected electronic locking differential requires that you release the accelerator pedal in order to engage. Check Locking Differen- An electronic locking differential system fault is present. See tial your authorized dealer as soon as possible. The following conditions affect the electronic locking differential: 192 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Electronic Locking Differential (If Equipped) • • • • • • Based on drive mode selection, the rear electronic locking differential does not engage if your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h). The front electronic locking differential does not engage if your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) in four-wheel drive low (4L). Based on drive mode selection, the electronic locking differential automatically disengages at speeds above 25 mph (41 km/h) and automatically re-engages at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). The electronic locking differential may not engage if you press your accelerator pedal during an engagement attempt. A message may display in the instrument display guiding you to release the accelerator pedal. In four-wheel drive low (4L), the front electronic locking differential automatically disengages at speeds above 25 mph (41 km/h) and automatically re-engages at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). The AdvanceTrac system has the ability to take over control of the electronic locking differential and disable it during driving maneuvers when necessary. release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction when rolling. We recommend engaging and disengaging the electronic locking differential at a stop when you mount a spare or mismatched tire on either axle. Operating Electronic Locking Differential With a Spare or Mismatched Tires On vehicles with an electronic locking differential, the size of the spare tire can affect performance of the system. If there is a significant difference between the two rear tires or two front tires, you may have limited electronic locking differential functionality. If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, 193 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Brakes stop. Move the transmission to park (P), switch the engine off and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for any interference. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It may take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury. LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ • Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. See Under Hood Overview (page 319). LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM • ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM LIMITATIONS CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID The anti-lock braking system does not eliminate the risk of crash when: • You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. • Your vehicle is hydroplaning. • You take corners too fast. • The road surface is poor. See Under Hood Overview (page 320). WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. WARNING: Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. Note: If the system activates, the brake pedal could pulse and could travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. BRAKE OVER ACCELERATOR In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician. 194 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Brakes BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION WARNING: The brake system could be affected if the brake fluid level is below the MIN mark or above the MAX mark on the brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Specification (page 404). BRAKES – TROUBLESHOOTING BRAKES – WARNING LAMPS If the ABS indicator illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Your vehicle continues to have normal braking without the anti-lock braking system function. See an authorized dealer. It also momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. E170684 E270480 1. Park your vehicle on a level surface. 2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see where the brake fluid level is relative to the MIN and the MAX marks on the reservoir. Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir cap must remain in place and fully tight, unless you are adding fluid. The brake indicator momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. It may also illuminate when you apply the parking brake and the ignition is on. If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving, make sure the parking brake is disengaged. If the parking brake is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system fault. See an authorized dealer. Only use fluid that meets our specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). 195 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Brakes BRAKES – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, check the brake system immediately. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 194). Check Brake System Have the system checked before continuing on your journey. 196 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Brakes BRAKES – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Is it normal for my brakes to make noise? Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding, or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake lining could be worn-out. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. There is an electrical motor sound when I press on the brake pedal or activate the park brake switch. Is this normal? Yes, those sounds are the electronic brake booster or the electronic park brake operating. Note: Brake dust could accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See Cleaning Wheels (page 361). 197 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Electric Parking Brake WHAT IS THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE The electric parking brake continues to slow your vehicle down unless you release the switch. The electric parking brake is used to hold your vehicle on slopes and flat roads. The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone sounds and the stoplamps turn on when you use the electric parking brake in an emergency. APPLYING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake when your vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. MANUALLY RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Push the switch down. WARNING: If you drive extended distances with the parking brake applied, you could cause damage to the brake system. E267156 1. The red warning lamp turns off. Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a Trailer The switch is on the lower part of the instrument panel. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. Pull the switch upward and hold it. Shift into gear. Press the accelerator pedal until engine has developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the hill. 5. Release the switch and pull away in a normal manner. Pull the switch up. The red warning lamp flashes during operation and illuminates when the parking brake is applied. Note: You can apply the electric parking brake when the ignition is off. Note: The electric parking brake could apply when you shift into park (P). See Park (P) (page 178). AUTOMATICALLY RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE APPLYING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IN AN EMERGENCY 1. Close the driver door. 2. Shift into gear. 3. Press the accelerator pedal and pull away in a normal manner. You can use the electric parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency. 1. Pull the switch up and hold it. 198 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Electric Parking Brake ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE AUDIBLE WARNING ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – TROUBLESHOOTING Sounds when the parking brake is on and your vehicle is moving. If the warning tone continues after you have released the parking brake, this indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – WARNING LAMPS Brake System It illuminates red when you apply the parking brake and your E270480 vehicle is on. If the lamp flashes when the parking brake has been released, this indicates the parking brake system requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IF THE VEHICLE BATTERY HAS RUN OUT OF CHARGE Note: Lamps may vary depending on region. WARNING: The electric parking brake does not operate if the vehicle battery has run out of charge. Electric Parking Brake Connect a booster battery to the vehicle battery to release the electric parking brake if the vehicle battery has run out of charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 301). When the lamp illuminates yellow, it indicates a malfunction in the electric parking brake. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. E146190 199 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Electric Parking Brake ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – INFORMATION MESSAGES Park Brake Message Details To Release: Press Brake The electric parking brake is set and you attempted a manual and Switch release without pressing the brake. Park Brake Use Switch to Release With the electric parking brake set, you attempted an automatic release with no success. Perform a manual release. Release Park Brake The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving. Park Brake Not Applied The electric park brake is not fully applied. Park Brake Not Released The electric park brake is not fully released. Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Limited Function Service Required The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality may still be available. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that Service Now requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. 200 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Hill Start Assist WHAT IS HILL START ASSIST SWITCHING HILL START ASSIST ON AND OFF MANUAL TRANSMISSION Hill Start Assist makes it easier for you to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without using the parking brake. You can switch hill start assist on and off on the touchscreen: HOW DOES HILL START ASSIST WORK 1. Press Features on the touchscreen. 2. Press Driver Assistance. 3. Switch Hill Start Assist on or off. Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. When the system activates, your vehicle remains stationary for a few seconds after you release the brake pedal. This gives you time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. The brakes release when the engine has developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. SWITCHING HILL START ASSIST ON AND OFF AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The system activates when your vehicle is in any forward gear and facing uphill, or when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and facing downhill. Hill start assist is active when you switch the ignition on. You cannot switch the system on or off. HILL START ASSIST PRECAUTIONS HILL START ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING HILL START ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake. Message Action Displays when Hill Start Assist Not system is not availAvailable able. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. WARNING: The system turns off if there is a malfunction or if you excessively rev the engine. 201 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Traction Control When you switch the system off, a message and an illuminated icon appear on the instrument cluster. WHAT IS TRACTION CONTROL The traction control system helps to avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. Use the switch again to return the traction control system to normal operation. HOW DOES TRACTION CONTROL WORK Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active. Note: When you place your vehicle into four-wheel drive low, the traction control disables. Traction control resumes when you put your vehicle back into two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive high. If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction. Note: For additional information on the traction and stability control systems. See Stability Control (page 204). SWITCHING TRACTION CONTROL ON AND OFF TRACTION CONTROL INDICATOR Stability and Traction Control Indicator WARNING: Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If the indicator does not illuminate when you switch the E138639 ignition on, or remains on when the engine is running, this indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system turns on each time you switch the ignition on. If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. The traction control off indicator illuminates when you switch the E130458 traction control system off, or when an alternative stability control mode is selected that requires the traction control off depending on the drive mode selected. Switching the System Off E348750 The switch for the stability and traction control system is on the instrument panel. 202 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Traction Control TRACTION CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING TRACTION CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Traction Control Off The status of the traction control system after you switched it off. Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched it on. 203 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Stability Control HOW DOES STABILITY CONTROL WORK WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo speakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If a driving condition activates either the stability control or traction control you may experience the following conditions: • • • The stability and traction control light flashes. Your vehicle slows down. Reduced engine power. The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle: WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It's always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator's ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Electronic Stability Control Electronic stability control enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power. Roll Stability Control Roll stability control enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually. Curve Control Curve control enhances your vehicle’s ability to follow the road when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve control operates by reducing engine power and, if necessary, applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually. 204 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Stability Control Side Wind Stabilization Side wind stabilization is an advanced feature that works by carefully applying the brakes on one side of the vehicle to reduce the effect of a side wind gust on the vehicle's path. Torque Vectoring by Brakes Torque vectoring control applies brake torque on the inner driven wheel in a curve for better traction to avoid an understeer, or oversteer situation. Unlike electronic stability control, enhanced torque vectoring control does not slow the vehicle. It helps control excessive wheel slip and gives the vehicle improved cornering agility. E72903 Traction Control Traction control enhances your vehicle’s ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See What Is Traction Control (page 202). A Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface. SWITCHING STABILITY CONTROL ON AND OFF The system turns on each time you switch the ignition on. The electronic stability control system is disabled when the transmission selector is in reverse (R). You can switch the traction control independently. See Switching Traction Control On and Off (page 202). Note: When you place your vehicle into four-wheel drive low, the stability control disables. Stability control resumes when you put your vehicle back into two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive high. 205 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Stability Control ESC Features Button Functions Mode Stability Control Electronic Traction Control Off Light Stability Control Systems Default at start- Default - Traction Control On up and Normal Advancetrac On during bulb check Enabled Enabled Button Traction Control momentarily Off pressed - single press On Enabled Disabled Button pressed and held for five seconds AdvanceTrac Off On Disabled Disabled Button pressed when Traction Control Off or Advance Trac Off Return to Default Off Enabled Enabled Note: Do not use the AdvanceTrac Off setting on public roadways. • • If a fault occurs in either the stability control or the traction control system, you may experience the following conditions: • • The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily. The stability control and traction control systems do not enhance your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of the wheels. STABILITY CONTROL INDICATOR If it does not illuminate when you switch the power on, or remains E138639 on, this indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If a driving condition activates either the stability control or the traction control system you may experience the following conditions • • • • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual. If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal may move as the system applies higher brake force. The stability and traction control light flashes. Your vehicle slows down. Reduced engine power. A vibration in the brake pedal. 206 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trail Control (If Equipped) WHAT IS TRAIL CONTROL WARNING: The system does not control speed in low traction conditions or extremely steep slopes. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Trail control lets you focus on steering during low-speed and off-road use by controlling your vehicle's acceleration and braking to maintain the speed that you set. You may hear a noise from the anti-lock brake system pump motor when you use the system. This is normal. E329455 Note: If your vehicle is equipped with trail one pedal drive, this will activate trail one pedal drive if you are in four wheel drive high or four wheel drive low mode, until you set a speed for trail control. TRAIL CONTROL LIMITATIONS Trail control is unavailable when any of the following occur: • Your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) in two-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive high modes. • Your vehicle speed is greater than 9 mph (15 km/h) in four-wheel drive low mode. • Your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) in reverse (R). • The transmission is in park (P). • The driver side door is open or your seatbelt is off when the driver side door is removed. • Cruise control is on. • Pro trailer backup assist is on. The system switches off if you press the button again or exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). SETTING THE TRAIL CONTROL SPEED Note: The buttons are on the steering wheel. Drive to the speed you prefer. Press the button to set or increase the set speed. Press and hold to adjust the speed in larger increments. Press the button to set or decrease the set speed. Press and hold to adjust the speed in larger increments. SWITCHING TRAIL CONTROL ON AND OFF Note: The indicator changes color. Press the button on the center console. 207 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trail Control (If Equipped) TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE PRECAUTIONS You can also adjust the set speed by braking, then pressing the + or - button. Note: Pressing the brake pedal does not switch off the system. WARNING: This system is an extra driving aid. It does not replace your attention and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake pedal when necessary, you may collide with another vehicle. CANCELING THE SET SPEED Press the button on the steering wheel to cancel the set speed. Note: If your vehicle has trail one pedal drive and you are in four-wheel drive high (4H) or four-wheel drive low (4L) mode, cancelling the set speed activates this feature. Shifting into drive (D) or reverse (R) does not cause the vehicle to move. You can press the brake pedal to increase braking. This does not turn the system off. TRAIL CONTROL INDICATORS Trail one pedal drive could apply the parking brake when your vehicle is not moving and not in park (P). E318506 Note: Always check the transmission selection before accelerating. TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE (IF Note: Only use trail one pedal drive on slippery or loose surfaces. Using trail one pedal drive on dry, hard surfaces could produce some vibration, driveline bind up and potential excessive tire and vehicle wear. EQUIPPED) WHAT IS TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE Trail one pedal drive allows you to accelerate and brake using only the accelerator pedal. The system assists when driving through difficult off-road terrain. Pressing the accelerator pedal down accelerates your vehicle and releasing pressure on the accelerator pedal, with your foot still on the pedal, slows your vehicle down. Releasing the accelerator pedal may allow your vehicle to come to a complete stop, some situations may require you to press the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE LIMITATIONS Trail one pedal drive is unavailable when any of the following occur: • Your vehicle is not in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low modes. • Using cruise control. • Using trail control. • You exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Releasing the accelerator pedal may allow your vehicle to come to a complete stop, some situations may require you to press the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. 208 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trail Control (If Equipped) SWITCHING TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE ON AND OFF Selecting a driveline mode other than four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low switches trail one pedal drive off. If you exceed 42 mph (68 km/h) trail one pedal drive switches off. Pressing either button when trail one pedal drive is active turns trail control on and places trail one pedal drive into standby mode. Switching from Trail Control to Trail One Pedal Drive When using trail control in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low modes, you can switch to trail one pedal drive by pressing the button on the steering wheel. E343599 TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE INDICATORS Switching Trail One Pedal Drive On When trail one pedal drive is active, the indicator displays green in the instrument cluster. When the system is switched on but is unavailable or in standby mode, it displays grey. Press the trail features button when in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low to activate trail one pedal drive. 1 E328584 Switching Trail One Pedal Drive Off Press the trail features button again to switch trail one pedal drive off. 209 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trail Control (If Equipped) TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE – TROUBLESHOOTING (IF EQUIPPED) TRAIL ONE PEDAL DRIVE – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Trail 1-Pedal Drive Active Use SET Button for Trail Control Displays when trail one pedal drive is active, use the SET+ or SET- to switch to trail control. Trail Control with Trail 1- Pedal Drive Off Displays when you switch trail one pedal drive off. Trail Control Enabled Use SET button to Set Speed Trail 1-Pedal Drive Available in 4H or 4L Trail control is in two-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive auto. Set a speed to activate trail control or change the driveline state to four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low modes to active trail one pedal drive. 210 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trail Control (If Equipped) TRAIL CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING TRAIL CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details Reduce Speed To Enter Trail Control Displays when you must reduce your vehicle speed to use trail control. Trail Control Not Available with Displays when you must release the park brake to use Park Brake Applied trail control. Trail Control Not Available While Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Active Displays when you must switch off the trailer backup assist to use trail control. Trail Control Enabled Use SET Button to Set Speed Displays when you successfully enabled trail control and can set a speed with the Set+ or Set- control. Trail Control Off Driver Resume Displays when a system fault has occurred when trail Control control was active and the driver must resume control. Trail Control Off Displays when the system has turned off. Trail Control Fault See Manual Displays when a system fault is present. See the trail control section in your Owner's Manual. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis. Trail Control To Activate Select Displays when you must be in drive (D), neutral (N) or Gear reverse (R) to use trail control. Trail Control Not Available with Displays when you must switch the cruise control off Cruise Control Active to use trail control. Trail Control Not Available with Driver Door Open Displays when you must close the driver door to use trail control. Set Trail Control to 1 MPH to Aid Displays when the system detects you may be stuck in sand and recommends using trail control on to the in Getting Unstuck in Sand lowest set speed. Doing this could slowly pull sand Set Trail Control to 2 km/h to under the tires to free the vehicle. Aid in Getting Unstuck in Sand Descent Control Now Active Press Trail Control Switch To Exit Due to some driver action, Trail Control propulsion was turned off but the vehicle will still brake if descending a hill. The driver must press the Trail Control switch to turn the feature OFF, they can then turn it back on. Trail Control Not Available with Seatbelt Off Displays when you must have the seatbelt on to use trail control. 211 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trail Turn Assist (If Equipped) WHAT IS TRAIL TURN ASSIST SWITCHING TRAIL TURN ASSIST ON AND OFF Trail turn assist can reduce the turning radius of your vehicle by applying the brakes to the inside rear wheel in low-speed, high steering-angle maneuvers. While in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low, press the trail turn assist button to turn the feature on. trail turn assist will be on at this time but will not activate until: TRAIL TURN ASSIST PRECAUTIONS • Note: Do not use trail turn assist on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive line, or braking components. Trail turn assist is only intended for slippery, or loose surfaces. • • You may hear noise from the anti-lock brake system while trail turn assist is active. This is normal operation. • TRAIL TURN ASSIST LIMITATIONS • Vehicle speed is less than 12 mph (19.3 km/h). Rear differential is fully unlocked. Steering wheel is almost fully turned to the left or right. You can turn off trail turn assist by doing any of the following: • Pressing the trail turn assist button again. Selecting a two-wheel drive high, or four-wheel drive auto. Turning on the rear locking differential. TRAIL TURN ASSIST INDICATORS You can only use trail turn assist when the system is in four-wheel drive high (4H), or four-wheel drive low (4L) mode. When trail turn assist is on, one of these two indicators will be displayed, depending on the direction of the vehicle’s last turn. When the feature is on but E338900 not in use, the indicator light will be grey. When the feature is active the indicator light will be green. You cannot use trail turn assist with the rear differential engaged. If the system detects that the rear differential has recently been engaged, it may not activate trail turn assist until it can confirm that the rear differential is disengaged. E338899 If the vehicle’s rear differential is engaged when pressing the trail turn assist button, the rear differential will attempt to disengage to allow for trail turn assist operation. 212 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trail Turn Assist (If Equipped) TRAIL TURN ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING TRAIL TURN ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details Trail Turn Assist Available in 4L or 4H Switch to four-wheel drive low or four-wheel drive high to activate trail turn assist. See Selecting a FourWheel Drive Mode (page 185). Trail Turn Assist Not Available See Manual Trail turn assist system malfunction could be present. if this condition persists, have your vehicle serviced. Trail Turn Assist ON You have activated trail turn assist. Trail Turn Assist OFF You have switched trail turn assist off. TRAIL TURN ASSIST – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why does Trail Turn Assist not activate after unlocking the rear differential? The rear differential may not be fully disengaged. When possible, turn off the rear axle locker while driving straight before using trail turn assist. If you are already in a tight turn when you encounter this situation, driving the vehicle for a short distance in reverse could allow the differential to fully disengage. 213 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Stabilizer Bar Disconnect (If Equipped) SWITCHING THE STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT ON AND OFF WHAT IS THE STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT Stabilizer bar disconnect is a feature that allows the front stabilizer bar to be disconnected for off-road use. This allows for increased front wheel articulation to improve capability and comfort on off-road terrain. Switching the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect On Switch the system on by pressing the button on the instrument panel. The stabilizer bar disconnects when the vehicles speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). An amber indicator illuminates to show that the stabilizer bar disconnected. E329476 STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT PRECAUTIONS When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h), the stabilizer bar reconnects and a grey indicator illuminates, indicating the system is in standby mode. The stabilizer bar disconnects again once the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). WARNING: If the stabilizer bar disconnect warning lamp illuminates red, a fault could be detected and the stabilizer bar could not be connected. Do not drive your vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) and have the system checked as soon as possible. Driving your vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) could reduce vehicle stability. If the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) and the system is on, the request is stored and a grey indicator illuminates to indicate that the system is in standby mode. When the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h), the stabilizer bar disconnects and the amber indicator illuminates, indicating that the stabilizer bar has disconnected. WARNING: Do not get under a vehicle that is switched on as the stabilizer bar disconnect could activate and the vehicle could unexpectedly drop. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: The grey indicator stays on until either the vehicle speed reduces and the stabilizer bar disconnects or, the system turns off. If an amber warning message appears in the cluster indicating that the system requires service, the stabilizer bar disconnect will not be available. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The stabilizer bar system also turns on and disconnects when you select the Rock Crawl drive mode. See Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode (page 242). Note: The stabilizer bar disconnect is not available in certain drive modes. See Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode (page 242). Note: The stabilizer bar disconnect could be delayed during wheel slippage, dynamic maneuvers, dynamic cornering, or when there is an anti-lock brake system or electronic stability control event in progress. 214 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Stabilizer Bar Disconnect (If Equipped) Switching the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Off STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT – TROUBLESHOOTING Switch the system off by pressing the stabilizer bar disconnect button, which reconnects the stabilizer bar if currently disconnected. STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT – INFORMATION MESSAGES The stabilizer bar disconnect system also turns off when: • • • Message Action Sta-Bar Disconnect The selected drive Not Available In mode does not Selected Drive allow you to turn on Mode the stabilizer bar disconnect feature. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). The engine is switched off. You switch out of four-wheel drive low or four-wheel drive high. You select a drive mode that does not allow the stabilizer bar to disconnect. Note: The stabilizer bar can be reconnected at any time, it is not necessary for the vehicle to be on a level surface as the stabilizer bar self-aligns. Sta-Bar Disconnected Sta-Bar Reconnects over 20 MPH STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT INDICATORS The stabilizer bar has been disconnected. Sta-Bar Disconnected Sta-Bar Reconnects over 32 km/h An indicator illuminates when you switch the stabilizer bar disconnect system on. The color of the indicator changes to indicate the system status. E329476 Sta-Bar Disconnect The stabilizer bar Available Below 20 disconnect is availMPH able below 20 mph (32 km/h). Sta-Bar Disconnect Available Below 32 km/h Amber indicates that the stabilizer bar is disconnected. Grey indicates that the stabilizer bar is connected and in standby. Sta-Bar Disconnect The selected 4WD Available in 4L or mode does not 4H allow you to turn on the stabilizer bar disconnect feature. Red indicates that there is a fault with the system, have the system checked as soon as possible. 215 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Stabilizer Bar Disconnect (If Equipped) Message Action Sta-Bar Disconnect Not Available See Manual Stabilizer bar disconnect is not available. See Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Frequently Asked Questions (page 216). Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not disconnecting? The vehicle's battery charge is low and needs to be changed or charged. Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not disconnecting? There is a fault active in another system on the vehicle, have the system checked as soon as possible. Sta-Bar Disconnect Drive Below 32 km/h Service Now Stabilizer bar disconnect fault detected, drive below 20 mph Sta-Bar Disconnect (32 km/h). Have Drive Below 20 your vehicle MPH Service Now checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not disconnecting? The vehicle is in a drive mode that does not allow the stabilizer bar to disconnect and needs to be switched to a different drive more. STABILIZER BAR DISCONNECT – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not disconnecting? The engine is turned off and needs to be turned on. Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not disconnecting? The vehicle is not in four-wheel drive low or four-wheel drive high, and needs to be switched to either mode. Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not disconnecting? Vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) and needs to be reduced in order for the stabilizer bar to disconnect. Why is the stabilizer bar disconnect not disconnecting? The vehicle is on a very significant lateral incline, and needs to be moved to more level ground. 216 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Hill Descent Control - Manual Transmission HILL DESCENT CONTROL PRECAUTIONS WHAT IS HILL DESCENT CONTROL Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed while descending steep slopes in various surface conditions. WARNING: The system does not control speed in low traction conditions or extremely steep slopes. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. HOW DOES HILL DESCENT CONTROL WORK Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill slopes between 2–20 mph (3–32 km/h). Above 20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains on but the descent speed cannot be set or maintained. WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake. Note: The system does not function below 2 mph (3 km/h). SWITCHING HILL DESCENT CONTROL ON AND OFF The system requires a cool down interval after a period of sustained use. Hill descent control provides a warning in the message center and a tone sounds when the system is about to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as needed to maintain descent speed. Press the button on the center console. A light in the instrument E328593 cluster illuminates when the system is active. Note: The amount of time that the system can remain active before cooling varies with conditions. SETTING THE HILL DESCENT SPEED To increase or decrease the descent speed, press the accelerator or brake pedal, or use the SET + and SET - buttons on the steering wheel. Once you reach the preferred speed remove your feet from the pedals. HILL DESCENT CONTROL INDICATOR E328593 217 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Illuminates when you switch hill descent control on. Hill Descent Control - Manual Transmission HILL DESCENT CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING HILL DESCENT CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details Hill Descent Control OFF Displays when you deactivate hill descent control mode. For Hill Descent Reduce Speed Displays when the speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) and hill descent control is unavailable. Hill Descent Control Not Available With Cruise Control Active Displays when Cruise Control is Active and driver attempts to turn on hill descent control. Hill Descent Driver Resume Control Displays when the hill descent control mode requires you to resume control. Hill Descent Control Fault Displays when a hill descent system fault is present. Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling Displays when the hill descent control turns off to cool the brake system. Hill Descent Control Ready Displays when you activate the hill descent control mode. 218 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Steering ELECTRIC POWER STEERING Switch the vehicle off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the vehicle on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked as soon as possible. HOW DOES ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WORK The electric power steering system assists the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems. WARNING: If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Failure to do so may result in loss of steering control. If your vehicle loses electrical power or detects a concern when you are driving the system switches off and you retain normal steering function. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems. Adapt your speed and driving behavior according to reduced steering assist. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and damage to the steering system. If this occurs, you will not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually nor will it cause damage to the system. Normal steering and driving allows the system to cool down and steering assist returns to normal. ELECTRIC POWER STEERING PRECAUTIONS WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Note: There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. 219 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Steering STEERING – TROUBLESHOOTING STEERING – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Steering Fault Service Now The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Steering Loss Stop Safely The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Steering Assist Fault Service Required The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now The steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 220 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Steering STEERING – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why does it seem that the steering is wandering or pulling? Check your vehicle for an improperly inflated or uneven tire, loose or worn suspension or steering components, or improper vehicle alignment. The system is functioning properly and the components have been checked, why is the steering system continuing to pull or wander? A high crown in the road or crosswinds could make the steering system feel like it is wandering or pulling. 221 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Parking Aids (If Equipped) Note: If your vehicle sustains damage leaving the sensors misaligned, this will cause inaccurate measurements or false alerts. PARKING AID PRECAUTIONS WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system. When you connect a trailer to your vehicle, the rear parking aid detects the trailer and provides an alert. Disable the parking aid when you connect a trailer to prevent the alert. WARNING: The system may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb reflection. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. Note: Certain add-on devices installed around the bumper or fascia may create false alerts, for example, large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate brackets, bumper covers or any other device that could block the normal detection zone of the parking aid system. Aftermarket spare tires or spare tire covers mounted to the rear tailgate could cause false alerts from the park aid system. Remove the add-on device to prevent false alerts. WARNING: Traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, external motors and fans may affect the correct operation of the sensing system. This may cause reduced performance or false alerts. WARNING: The system may not detect small or moving objects, particularly those close to the ground. Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system's accuracy can be affected. WARNING: The parking aid system can only assist you to detect objects when your vehicle is moving at parking speeds. To help avoid personal injury you must take care when using the parking aid system. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. WARNING: The system may not function if the sensor is blocked. SWITCHING PARKING AID ON AND OFF Note: When using a programmed MyKey you cannot switch this off. See MyKey™ (page 74). WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. E139213 Press the parking aid button and use the menu to switch the system on and off. You can also switch the system off using the pop-up message that appears when you are in reverse (R). WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 222 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Parking Aids (If Equipped) LOCATING THE REAR PARKING AID SENSORS REAR PARKING AID WHAT IS THE REAR PARKING AID Rear parking sensors detect objects behind your vehicle when in reverse (R). REAR PARKING AID LIMITATIONS There is a decreased coverage area at the outer corners. When using a programmed MyKey, you cannot switch the rear parking aid off. The rear parking aid sensors are active when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). E130178 The sensor coverage area is up to 71 in (180 cm) from the rear bumper. The rear parking aid sensors are in the rear bumper. The rear parking aid detects large objects when you shift into reverse (R) and any of the following occur: • Your vehicle is moving backward at a low speed. • Your vehicle is stationary but an object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a low speed. • Your vehicle is moving backward at a low speed and an object is moving towards your vehicle, for example another vehicle at a low speed. REAR PARKING AID AUDIBLE WARNINGS A warning tone sounds when your vehicle approaches an object. As your vehicle moves closer to an object, the rate of the tone increases. The warning tone continuously sounds when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the rear bumper. If your vehicle remains stationary for a few seconds, the audible warning turns off. If your vehicle moves backward the tone sounds again. Note: When the parking aid system sounds a tone, the audio system could reduce the set volume. FRONT PARKING AID WHAT IS THE FRONT PARKING AID Front parking sensors detect objects in front of your vehicle. 223 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Parking Aids (If Equipped) LOCATING THE FRONT PARKING AID SENSORS FRONT PARKING AID LIMITATIONS The front parking aid sensors are active when your vehicle is in any position other than park (P) and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). The sensor coverage area is up to 28 in (70 cm) from the bumper. If your vehicle is in reverse (R), the front parking aid detects objects when your vehicle is moving at a low speed or an object is moving toward your vehicle and provides an audio warning, for example another vehicle at a low speed. Once your vehicle reaches a stop, the audio warning stops after a few seconds. Visual indication is always active in reverse (R). E187330 The front parking aid sensors are in the front bumper. If your vehicle is in any forward gear, the front parking aid provides audible warnings and visual indication when your vehicle is moving at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or below and the system detects an object within the detection zone. Once your vehicle reaches a stop, the visual indication and audio warning stops after a few seconds. FRONT PARKING AID AUDIBLE WARNINGS A warning tone sounds when there is an object within 28 in (70 cm) from the front bumper. As your vehicle moves closer to an object, the rate of the tone increases. The warning tone continuously sounds when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front bumper. If your vehicle is in neutral (N), the front and rear sensors provide visual indication only when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and obstacles are detected inside the detection areas. Once your vehicle stops, the visual indication and audio warning stops after a few seconds. Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from your vehicle, visual indication remains on. 224 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Parking Aids (If Equipped) • PARKING AID INDICATORS • As the distance to the object decreases, the indicator blocks illuminate and move toward the vehicle icon. If there is no object detected, the distance indicator blocks are gray. Visual indication remains on when the transmission is in reverse (R). When you stop your vehicle, visual indication turns off after four seconds. If the system is not available, the side distance indicator blocks do not display. PARKING AIDS – TROUBLESHOOTING PARKING AIDS – INFORMATION MESSAGES E190459 If a fault is present in the parking aids, a warning message appears in the instrument cluster or the information and entertainment display. The system provides object distance indication through the information display. Message Action Check Front Park Aid The system detects a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Check Rear Park Aid The system detects a condition that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. 225 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear View Camera Note: When towing, the camera only sees what you are towing. This might not provide adequate coverage and you might not see some objects. In some vehicles, the guide lines may disappear when you connect the trailer tow connector. WHAT IS THE REAR VIEW CAMERA The rear view camera provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle when the transmission is in reverse (R). LOCATING THE REAR VIEW CAMERA REAR VIEW CAMERA PRECAUTIONS The rear view camera is in the spare tire carrier. WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. REAR VIEW CAMERA GUIDE LINES Note: Active guide lines and fixed guide lines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. Note: The centerline is only available if the active or fixed guide lines are on. WARNING: Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Use caution when the rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image could be incorrect. All guide lines disappear when the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. 226 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear View Camera Use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects get closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle. REAR VIEW CAMERA OBJECT DISTANCE INDICATORS The system provides an image of your vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones highlight green, yellow, and red when the parking aid sensors detect an object in the coverage area. REAR VIEW CAMERA SETTINGS ZOOMING THE REAR VIEW CAMERA IN AND OUT E306774 A. B. C. D. E. F. Active guide lines. Centerline. Fixed guide line: Green zone. Fixed guide line: Yellow zone. Fixed guide line: Red zone. Rear bumper. WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. Selectable settings for this feature are zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the symbol on the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is zoom off. Active guide lines only show with fixed guide lines. To use active guide lines, turn the steering wheel to point the guide lines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position changes while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the intended path. This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse (R). The fixed and active guide lines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight. Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: Only the centerline shows when you enable manual zoom. 227 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear View Camera SWITCHING REAR VIEW CAMERA DELAY ON AND OFF 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Features on the touchscreen. Press Driver Assistance. Press Rear View Camera. Switch Rear View Camera Delay on or off. When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until: • • Your vehicle speed reaches approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). You shift your vehicle into park (P). 228 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 360 Degree Camera (If Equipped) WHAT IS THE 360 DEGREE CAMERA 360 DEGREE CAMERA PRECAUTIONS The 360 degree camera system consists of front, side and rear cameras. WARNING: The 360 degree camera system still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out of the windows, and checking the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. The 360 degree camera system: • • • Allows you to see what is directly in front of or behind your vehicle. Provides a cross traffic view in front of and behind your vehicle. Allows you to see a top-down view of the area outside your vehicle, including the blind spots. WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. The system provides visibility around your vehicle to you in parking maneuvers such as: • • • WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. Centering in a parking space. Obstacles near your vehicle. Parallel parking. WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. HOW DOES THE 360 DEGREE CAMERA WORK The 360 degree camera system: • • • • Allows you to see what is directly in front of or behind your vehicle. Helps you when parallel parking and centering in a parking space. Provides a cross traffic view in front of and behind your vehicle. Allows you to see a top-down view of the area outside your vehicle, including the blind spots and obstacles near your vehicle. 360 DEGREE CAMERA LIMITATIONS Note: Use caution if a door is ajar. The 360 degree camera could be out of position and the image could be incorrect. 229 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 360 Degree Camera (If Equipped) LOCATING THE 360 DEGREE CAMERAS Rear View Camera The rear view camera is in the spare tire carrier. It provides an image of the area behind your vehicle. Front View Camera The front video camera is in the grille. It provides a video image of the area in front of your vehicle. To use the front camera system, place the transmission in any gear except reverse (R) and press the camera icon in the corner of the screen. Note: The front camera system switches on when you are in mud/sand, rock crawl, or baja mode. Side View Camera The side view cameras are on the outside mirrors. They provide a video image of the area on the sides of your vehicle to aid you when parking. E306774 360 DEGREE CAMERA GUIDE LINES Note: Active guide lines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). A Active guide lines. B Centerline. C Fixed guide line: Green zone. D Fixed guide line: Yellow zone. E Fixed guide line: Red zone. F Rear bumper. Active guide lines only show with fixed guide lines. Turn the steering wheel to point the guide lines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position changes when reversing, your vehicle could deviate from the intended path. 230 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 360 Degree Camera (If Equipped) • • • The fixed and active guide lines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight. Normal view. Normal view with 360. Split view. Note: The rear view camera activates when you switch into reverse (R). Additional views are then accessible on the touchscreen. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects get closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle. When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the front images display when you press the button. When in reverse (R), only the rear images display when you press the button. Note: The 360 degree camera system turns off when your vehicle is in motion at low speed, except when in reverse (R). Keep Out Zone SWITCHING THE 360 DEGREE CAMERA VIEW E224483 E224783 E310341 E224784 The Keep Out Zone is represented by the yellow dotted lines running parallel to your vehicle. E224785 360 DEGREE CAMERA SETTINGS Press to access the different camera views. Normal + 360 view: Contains the normal camera view next to a 360 degree camera view. Normal view: Provides an image of what is directly in front of or behind your vehicle. Split view: Provides an extended view of what is in front of or behind your vehicle. Zooms in on the image. E224485 SWITCHING THE 360 DEGREE CAMERA ON AND OFF The 360 degree camera system button is on the instrument panel and allows you to toggle through different camera views. The front and rear cameras have multiple screens which consist of: E332186 231 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) SETTING THE CRUISE CONTROL SPEED WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed could increase above the set speed. The system does not apply the brakes. Requirements Use cruise control when the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph in imperial units and 20 km/h in metric units. Drive to the speed you prefer. Press either the Set+ or Setbuttons to set the current speed. SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF WARNING: Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Note: The indicator changes color in the information display. Changing the Set Speed The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Press the Set+ button to increase the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the Set+ button to accelerate. Release the button when you have reached your preferred speed. Switching Cruise Control On Press the button to activate the system. When the system E332905 activates, the set speed is equal to whichever is greater, the current vehicle speed, or 15 mph when in imperial units or 20 km/h when in metric units. If the speed is too low, or other conditions are not correct for cruise control activation, the system will instead enter standby mode. Press the Set- button to decrease the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the Set- button to decelerate. Release the button when you have reached your preferred speed. Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed does not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set. Switching Cruise Control Off E332905 Press the button when the system is active or switch the ignition off. Note: When you switch cruise control off, the set speed clears. 232 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) CANCELING THE SET SPEED E308130 Press the button, or tap the brake pedal to cancel the set speed. Note: The system remembers the set speed. Note: The system cancels if the vehicle speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under the set speed when driving uphill. RESUMING THE SET SPEED Press the button. E308130 CRUISE CONTROL INDICATORS Illuminates when you switch the system on. E71340 233 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL WORK WARNING: Do not use the system when towing a trailer that has aftermarket electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Adaptive cruise control uses a radar sensor to adjust your vehicle speed to maintain a set gap between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane. WARNING: Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL PRECAUTIONS WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not use the system with a snow plow blade installed. WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow. When Following a Vehicle WARNING: Pay close attention to changing road conditions such as entering or leaving a highway, on roads with intersections or roundabouts, roads without visible lanes of travel, roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep slopes. WARNING: When following a vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does not always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention. Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: The system does not control speed in low traction conditions or extremely steep slopes. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Hilly Condition Usage You should select a lower gear when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep slopes, for example in mountainous areas. The system needs additional engine braking in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it from overheating. WARNING: The system is not a crash warning or avoidance system. 234 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) Note: An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it applies brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to cool. The system functions normally again after the brakes cool. WARNING: The system does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL LIMITATIONS WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction. Sensor Limitations WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly track lane markings as other structures or objects. This can result in a false or missed warning. WARNING: On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. WARNING: If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. WARNING: Large contrasts in outside lighting can limit sensor performance. E327935 The camera is mounted on the windshield behind the interior mirror. WARNING: The system only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: The system may not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h). E327936 WARNING: The system does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road. The radar sensor is in the lower grille. Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind a fascia panel. 235 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front protectors, aftermarket lights, additional paint or plastic coatings could also degrade sensor performance. Detection issues can occur: A message displays if something obstructs the camera or the sensor. When something blocks the sensor, the system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not function. See Adaptive Cruise Control – Information Messages (page 240). The radar sensor has a limited field of view. It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle image does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you. E71621 A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front. B With vehicles that edge into your lane. The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully into your lane. C There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone could change. This could result in a missed or false vehicle detection. 236 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) Automatic Cancellation or Deactivation Optimal system performance requires a clear view of the road by the windshield-mounted camera. The system may cancel if: • The tires lose traction. • You apply the parking brake. • Your vehicle speed falls significantly below 15 mph or 20 km/h. Optimal performance may not occur if: • • • The camera is blocked. There is poor visibility or lighting conditions. There are bad weather conditions. The system may cancel and set the parking brake if: • You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the driver door after you stop your vehicle. SWITCHING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. See Cruise Control (page 232). The system may turn off or prevent activating when requested if: • The vehicle has a blocked sensor. • The brake temperature is too high. • There is a failure in the system or a related system. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On Press the button to activate the system. When the system activates, the set speed is equal to the current vehicle speed. If the speed is too low, or other conditions are not correct for adaptive cruise control activation, the system enters standby mode. E144529 SETTING THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SPEED Drive to the speed you prefer. Press the toggle button upward or downward to set the current speed. Note: The minimum set speed is 15 mph or 20 km/h. The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the instrument cluster display. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off E144529 The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display. Press the button when the system is in standby mode or switch the ignition off. Note: When you switch the system off, the set speed clears. E255686 237 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) A vehicle image illuminates if there is a vehicle detected in front of you. Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display. Manually Changing the Set Speed Press and release the toggle button upward to increase the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the toggle button upward to increase the set speed in large increments. Release the button when you reach the speed you prefer. Press and release the toggle button downward to decrease the set speed in small increments. Press and hold the toggle button downward to decrease the set speed in large increments. Release the button when you reach the speed you prefer. E348855 Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the speed you prefer. Press the toggle button upward or downward to select the current speed as the set speed. The selected gap appears in the instrument cluster display as shown by the bars in the image. Note: The gap setting is time dependent and therefore, the distance adjusts with your vehicle speed. The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions. SETTING THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL GAP Note: A minimum vehicle speed of 15 mph or 20 km/h must be met, before you can set the gap. Press the button to cycle through the four gap settings. 238 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) If the system determines that its maximum braking level is not sufficient, an audible warning sounds, a message appears in the instrument cluster display and an indicator flashes when the system continues to brake. Take immediate action. Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings Graphic Display, Bars Indicated Between Vehicles Gap Distance Dynamic Behavior 1 Closest. Sport. 2 Close. Normal. 3 Medium. Normal. 4 Far. Comfort. CANCELING THE SET SPEED Press the button or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. RESUMING THE SET SPEED Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting. Press the button. Following a Vehicle Your vehicle speed returns to the previously set speed and gap setting. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain the gap setting. Note: When you are following a vehicle and you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive cruise control may provide a small, temporary acceleration to help you pass. Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it. OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from the vehicle ahead until: • The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle in front of you moves out of the lane you are in. • You set a new gap distance. WARNING: If you override the system by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead. The system applies the brakes to slow down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from the vehicle in front of you. The system only applies limited braking. You can override the system by applying the brakes. When you press the accelerator pedal, you override the set speed and gap distance. Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally exceed the set speed limit. Note: The brakes may emit noise when applied by the system. 239 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) When you override the system, the green indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon does not appear in the instrument cluster display. Use the touchscreen to select the following: Select Settings. Select Driver Assist.. Select Cruise Control. Select Normal. The cruise control indicator replaces the adaptive cruise E71340 control indicator if you select normal cruise control. The gap setting does not display, and the system does not respond to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains active to maintain set speed. The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. 1. 2. 3. 4. The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL INDICATORS Illuminates when you switch adaptive cruise control on. The E144529 color of the indicator changes to indicate the system status. White indicates the system is on but inactive. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING Green indicates that you set the speed and the system is active. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE CONTROL Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all messages display or are available. Note: The system could abbreviate or shorten certain messages depending upon which cluster type you have. WARNING: Normal cruise control will not brake when your vehicle is approaching slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary. Message Action Adaptive Cruise Malfunction A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation. Adaptive Cruise Not Available Conditions exist preventing the system from being available. 240 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) Message Action Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual You have a blocked radar because of poor radar visibility due to inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this. Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle. Normal Cruise Active Adaptive Braking Off You have selected normal cruise control. The system does not brake or react to traffic. Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control Displays when the adaptive cruise control is going to cancel and you must take control. Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to Activate Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise control and there is no lead vehicle in range. 241 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing G.O.A.T. Mode Control Note: Your vehicle has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor all systems for proper operation. If a mode is unavailable due to a system fault, your vehicle defaults to normal mode and the driveline remains in the four-wheel drive setting that you last selected prior to the system fault. WHAT IS G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL Your vehicle has several goes over any-type of terrain (G.O.A.T.) modes that you can select for different driving conditions. Depending on the mode that you select, the system adjusts various vehicle settings. SELECTING A G.O.A.T. MODE HOW DOES G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL WORK Each selectable mode changes various electronic and mechanical settings within your vehicle to tailor its performance and driving characteristics to on-road or off-road driving conditions. The system may alter steering feel and effort, traction control, stability control, chassis controls, powertrain response, transmission shift points, four-wheel driveline setting, exhaust noise level and suspension dampening to a pre-determined setting, depending upon the mode that you select. Your vehicle reverts to normal mode each time it is started. If you switch your vehicle off in a drive mode other than normal mode at startup, the instrument cluster screen displays a pop-up asking if you would like to return to your last used mode. If you select yes to the pop-up, your vehicle returns to the last selected mode and the default four-wheel driveline setting associated with that mode. If you select no, your vehicle remains in normal mode and the default four-wheel driveline setting associated with that mode. If you do not select yes or no, the pop up message times out, your vehicle remains in normal mode, and the four-wheel driveline setting remains in its last used setting. E324543 To select a mode, use the console mounted controller. Note: Mode changes may not be available when the ignition is off or when the engine is not running. Note: Button icons may vary. 242 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing G.O.A.T. Mode Control ECO Note: To optimize off-road driving performance, the system disables the brake over accelerator feature on off-road modes, including mud/ruts, sand, baja and rock crawl modes. A message displays in the instrument cluster when you select an off-road mode. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Information Messages (page 246). Brake over accelerator enables when an off-road mode is exited or during the next ignition key-cycle. Return to on-road modes, normal, eco, sport or slippery, when driving on regular roads. See Brake Over Accelerator (page 194). For efficient driving. This mode helps deliver maximum fuel efficiency and helps to increase driving range. E295413 Two-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is not selectable in eco mode. The front electronic locking differential is not available in eco mode. The rear electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h). G.O.A.T. MODES The stabilizer bar disconnect is not available in eco mode. BAJA MUD/RUTS For high speed off-road driving. Baja mode optimizes the throttle E225314 control for better response and torque delivery. For off-road driving. This mode enhances vehicle performance to traverse muddy, rutted or uneven terrains. Four-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive auto is not selectable in baja mode. Four-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is selectable in mud/rut mode. The front electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic locking differential is available at any speed in all selectable four-wheel drive modes. The front electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic locking differential is engaged when in mud/ruts mode and is available at any speed in all selectable four-wheel drive modes. E296606 The stabilizer bar disconnect is available in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low. The stabilizer bar disconnect is available in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low. Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard pavement. This could produce some vibration, driveline bind up, and potential excessive tire and vehicle wear depending on the four-wheel drive mode selection. Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard pavement. This could produce some vibration, driveline bind up, and potential excessive tire and vehicle wear depending on the four-wheel drive mode selection. 243 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing G.O.A.T. Mode Control NORMAL Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard pavement. This could produce some vibration, driveline bind up, and potential excessive tire and vehicle wear depending on the four-wheel drive mode selection. For everyday driving. This mode is the perfect balance of excitement, comfort and convenience. This is the default mode after each ignition cycle, the driveline settings remain the same prior to the ignition cycle. E317283 SAND Two-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive modes are selectable when in normal mode. For off-road driving on soft, dry sand or deep snow. This mode may help get your vehicle unstuck from deep snow or sand. The front electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h). Four-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is selectable in sand mode. E332185 The front electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic locking differential is engaged when in sand mode and is available at any speed in all selectable four-wheel drive modes. Note: The rear electronic locking differential is available at any speed when in four-wheel drive low. The stabilizer bar disconnect is available in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low. The stabilizer bar disconnect is available in four-wheel drive high or four-wheel drive low. ROCK CRAWL Note: The front camera system switches on when you are in sand mode and your speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h). If you exceed 15 mph (24 km/h), the camera shuts off until your vehicle speed is below 12 mph (20 km/h). For off-road driving and optimum rock-climbing ability. Rock crawl mode optimizes the throttle and transmission response to provide you additional control of your vehicle. E322413 Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard pavement. This could produce some vibration, driveline bind up, and potential excessive tire and vehicle wear depending on the four-wheel drive mode selection. Four-wheel drive low is the only four-wheel drive mode selectable in rock crawl, the system prompts you to put your vehicle into four-wheel drive low upon selection. Note: Sand mode is not intended for use on firm, slippery surfaces, such as paved roads covered with snow or ice. For slippery, firm surfaces use slippery mode. The front electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic locking differential is engaged when in rock crawl mode and is available at any speed. The stabilizer bar disconnects when in rock crawl mode. 244 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing G.O.A.T. Mode Control SLIPPERY - 4X4 WITH PART TIME ENGAGEMENT The front electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h). For less than ideal road conditions such as snow or ice covered roads. This mode can be used for crossing terrain where a firm surface is covered with loose, wet or slippery material. Slippery mode lowers throttle response and optimizes shifting for slippery surfaces. E295414 Note: The rear electronic locking differential is available at any speed when in four-wheel drive low. The stabilizer bar disconnect is not available in slippery mode. Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard pavement. This could produce some vibration, driveline bind up, and potential excessive tire and vehicle wear depending on the four-wheel drive mode selection. Four-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. All four-wheel drive modes are selectable in slippery mode. The front electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h) when in four-wheel drive low. The rear electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h). SPORT - 4X4 WITH PART TIME ENGAGEMENT For sporty driving with improved performance handling and E246593 response. This mode increases accelerator pedal response and provides a sportier steering feel. The powertrain system holds onto lower gears longer, helping your vehicle accelerate faster. Note: The rear electronic locking differential is available at any speed when in four-wheel drive low. The stabilizer bar disconnect is not available in slippery mode. Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard pavement. This could produce some vibration, driveline bind up, and potential excessive tire and vehicle wear depending on the four-wheel drive mode selection. Two-wheel drive high is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is not selectable in sport mode. The front electronic locking differential is not available in sport mode. The rear electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h). SLIPPERY - ADVANCED 4X4 WITH 4A MODE For less than ideal road conditions such as snow or ice covered roads. This mode can be used for crossing terrain where a firm surface is covered with loose, wet or slippery material. Slippery mode lowers throttle response and optimizes shifting for slippery surfaces. The stabilizer bar disconnect is not available in sport mode. E295414 Four-wheel drive auto is the default four-wheel drive mode. Two-wheel drive high is not selectable in slippery mode. 245 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing G.O.A.T. Mode Control SPORT - ADVANCED 4X4 WITH 4A MODE The stabilizer bar disconnect is not available in sport mode. For sporty driving with improved performance handling and E246593 response. This mode increases accelerator pedal response and provides a sportier steering feel. The powertrain system holds onto lower gears longer, helping your vehicle accelerate faster. G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL – WARNING LAMPS Some drive modes reduce traction and stability control E130458 performance and the indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster. Four-wheel drive auto is the default four-wheel drive mode. Four-wheel drive low is not selectable in sport mode. The front electronic locking differential is not available in sport mode. The rear electronic locking differential is available below 25 mph (40 km/h). G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details Changing to Normal Drive Mode for Improved Towing Performance Displays when the system switches to normal mode to support towing performance. Drive Mode Not Available Displays when you select a drive mode that is not available. Select a different drive mode. Drive Mode Preconditions Not Met Displays when you select a drive mode that is not available. Check the four-wheel drive mode, electronic locking differential and stabilizer bar before selecting a drive mode. Drive Mode Selection Reduced due to System Fault Displays when you select a drive mode that is not available. Have the system checked. Off-Road Use Only Displays when you select an off-road drive mode. 246 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing G.O.A.T. Mode Control Message Details Selected 4x4 Mode Not Available in Current Displays when you select a four-wheel drive mode that is not available in the current Drive Mode drive mode. Select an available four-wheel drive mode. Selected Locking Differential Not Available in Current Drive Mode Displays when you select an electronic locking differential that is not available in the current drive mode. Select an available electric locking differential. Sta-Bar Disconnect Not Available In Selected Drive Mode Displays when you attempt to disconnect the stabilizer bar in the current drive mode. Select a different drive mode to disconnect the stabilizer bar. 247 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing G.O.A.T. Mode Control G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why did the system default to normal mode? If a mode is unavailable due to a system fault, it defaults to normal mode and the driveline settings remain the same as prior to the system fault. 248 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Lane Keeping System (If Equipped) WHAT IS THE LANE KEEPING SYSTEM WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly track lane markings as other structures or objects. This can result in a false or missed warning. The lane keeping system alerts you by providing temporary steering assistance or steering wheel vibration when it detects an unintended lane departure. WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. HOW DOES THE LANE KEEPING SYSTEM WORK WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction. The lane keeping system uses a forward looking camera mounted on the windshield to monitor vehicle movement within the travel lane. WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. When the camera detects a drift out of the travel lane, the lane keeping system alerts the driver by vibrating the steering wheel, or aids the driver by providing a small steering input to move the vehicle back into the travel lane. WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us. The driver can select one of three modes: • • • Alert (If Equipped) Aid Alert + Aid WARNING: Large contrasts in outside lighting can limit sensor performance. LANE KEEPING SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS LANE KEEPING SYSTEM LIMITATIONS The lane keeping system only operates when the vehicle speed is greater than 40 mph (64 km/h). WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. The system works when the camera can detect at least one lane marking. The lane keeping system may not correctly operate in any of the following conditions: • The lane keeping system does not detect at least one lane marking. • You switch the turn signal on. WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. 249 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Lane Keeping System (If Equipped) • • • • • You apply direct steering, accelerate fast or brake hard. The vehicle speed is less than 40 mph (64 km/h). The anti-lock brake, stability control or traction control system activates. The lane is too narrow. Something is obscuring the camera or it is unable to detect the lane markings due to environment, traffic or vehicle conditions. SWITCHING THE LANE KEEPING SYSTEM MODE The lane keeping system has different settings that you can view or adjust using the information display. The system stores the last known selection for each of these settings. You do not need to readjust your settings each time you switch on the system. To change the lane keeping system mode, use the touchscreen: The lane keeping system may not correct lane positioning in any of the following conditions: • High winds. • Uneven road surfaces. • Heavy or uneven loads. • Incorrect tire pressure. 1. Select Driver Assistance. 2. Select Lane Keeping System. 3. Select Mode. 4. Select a setting. Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. If the system detects a MyKey™, the mode is set to alert. SWITCHING THE LANE KEEPING SYSTEM ON AND OFF E308131 ALERT MODE To activate the lane keeping system, press the button on the steering wheel. WHAT IS ALERT MODE Alert mode vibrates the steering wheel when it detects an unintended lane departure. To deactivate the lane keeping system, press the button again. Note: When switching the system on or off a message appears in the information and entertainment display to show the status. Note: The system stores the on or off setting until manually changed, unless it detects a MyKey™. If the system detects a MyKey™, it defaults to the last setting for that MyKey™. Note: If the system detects a MyKey™, pressing the button does not affect the on or off status of the system. You can only change the mode and intensity settings. 250 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Lane Keeping System (If Equipped) HOW DOES ALERT MODE WORK HOW DOES AID MODE WORK E165515 E165516 When in alert mode, the lane keeping system alerts you by vibrating the steering wheel. The intensity of the vibration is set through the lane keeping system menu. The lane keeping system aids you when an unintentional lane departure occurs. The system provides a small steering input to move the vehicle towards the center of the lane. ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL VIBRATION INTENSITY ALERT AND AID MODE To change the steering wheel vibration intensity, use the touchscreen: WHAT IS ALERT AND AID MODE 1. 2. 3. 4. Select Driver Assistance. Select Lane Keeping System. Select Intensity. Select a setting. Alert and aid mode uses multiple features to keep you in your lane. The system first provides a small steering input to bring your vehicle back towards the center of the lane. If your vehicle moves too far out of the center of the lane the system alerts you with vibration in the steering wheel. AID MODE WHAT IS AID MODE Aid mode provides temporary steering assistance toward the center of the lane. 251 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Lane Keeping System (If Equipped) HOW DOES ALERT AND AID MODE WORK LANE KEEPING SYSTEM INDICATORS E165517 A Alert. B Aid. E339671 The lane keeping system detects a lane departure and provides aid when the vehicles enters B and applies the additional alert warning if A is entered. If you switch the lane keeping system on, a graphic with lane markings appears in the information display. When you switch the system off, the lane marking graphics do not display. Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still display if adaptive cruise control is enabled. While the lane keeping system is on, the color of the lane markings change to indicate the system status. Gray Green Yellow Indicates that the Indicates that the Indicates that the system is temporsystem is available system is providing arily unavailable to or ready to provide a or has just provided provide a warning or warning or interven- a lane keeping aid intervention on the tion on the indicated intervention. indicated side. side. 252 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Red Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning. Lane Keeping System (If Equipped) LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable. Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition that requires you to clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly. Front Camera Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Keep Hands on Steering Wheel The system requests that you keep your hands on the steering wheel. 253 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Lane Keeping System (If Equipped) LANE KEEPING SYSTEM – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Why is the feature not available (lane markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road? Your vehicle speed is less than 40 mph (65 km/h). The sun is shining directly into the camera lens. A quick intentional lane change has occurred. Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings for an extended interval of time. Driving at high speeds in curves. The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago. Ambiguous lane markings, for example, in construction zones. Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light. Sudden offset in lane markings. ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active. There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield. You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you. Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings, or vice versa. There is standing water on the road. Faint lane markings, for example, partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads. Lane width is too narrow or too wide. You have not calibrated the camera after a windshield replacement. Driving on tight or on uneven roads. 254 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Lane Keeping System (If Equipped) Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid, or Aid + Alert mode? High cross winds are present. There is a large road crown. Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs. Heavy, uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure. You changed the tires or modified the suspension. 255 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped) WHAT IS BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. Blind spot information system detects vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone. HOW DOES BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM WORK Note: Blind spot information system does not prevent contact with other vehicles. It does not detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals or other infrastructure. Blind spot information system uses sensors on both sides of your vehicle, detecting rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The detection area extends to approximately 59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) to alert you of faster approaching vehicles. BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS Blind spot information system does not operate in park (P) or reverse (R). The system may not alert you if a vehicle quickly passes through the detection zone. BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TRANSMISSION Blind spot information system turns on when all the following occur: • You start your vehicle. • You shift into drive (D). • The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). E255695 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not use the blind spot information system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The blind spot information system is not a replacement for careful driving. 256 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped) LOCATING THE BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM SENSORS BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Blind spot information system turns on when all the following occur: • You start your vehicle. • You shift into drive (D). • The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). SWITCHING BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM ON AND OFF E339014 To switch blind spot information system on or off, use the touchscreen: The sensors are behind the rear fascia panel. 1. 2. 3. 4. Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Press Features on the touchscreen. Press Driver Assistance. Press Blind Spot Information System. Switch the feature on or off. Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects. Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor. We recommend switching the feature off when using a bike or cargo rack. When you switch blind spot information system off, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. When you switch the system on or off, the alert indicators flash twice. Note: Blocked sensors may affect system accuracy. Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. If the sensors become blocked, a message appears in the instrument cluster display. See Blind Spot Information System – Information Messages (page 258). The alert indicators illuminate but the system does not alert you. To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer. 257 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped) When blind spot information system detects a vehicle, an alert indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. If you turn the turn signal on for that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator flashes. BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM INDICATORS E249861 E142442 BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Blind Spot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Blind Spot Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual Something is blocking the sensors. Clean the sensors. Blind Spot Alert Deactivated Trailer Attached The system automatically turns off and displays this message when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off through the touchscreen. 258 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped) CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT PRECAUTIONS WHAT IS CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT The system alerts you of vehicles approaching from the sides behind your vehicle when you shift into reverse (R). WARNING: Do not use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before reversing out of a parking space. The cross traffic alert system is not a replacement for careful driving. HOW DOES CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT WORK Cross Traffic Alert detects vehicles that approach at a speed between 4–37 mph (6–60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or fully obstructed. WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT LIMITATIONS Cross Traffic Alert may not correctly operate when any of the following occur: • Something is blocking the sensors. • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are obstructing the sensors. • Vehicles approach at speeds less than 4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). • Your vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph (12 km/h). • You reverse out of an angled parking space. E142440 The sensor on the left-hand side is only partially obstructed and zone coverage on the right-hand side is maximized. E142441 SWITCHING CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT ON AND OFF Zone coverage also decreases when parking at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage on that side is severely reduced. To switch cross traffic alert on or off use the touchscreen. 1. Press Features on the touchscreen. 2. Press Driver Assistance. Note: Slowly reversing helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness. 259 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped) 3. Switch Cross Traffic Alert on or off. Note: The system switches on every time you switch the ignition on. To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer. Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor. We recommend switching the feature off when using a bike or cargo rack. LOCATING THE CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT SENSORS If something is blocking the sensors, a message may appear in the information display when you shift into reverse (R). Note: Blocked sensors may affect system accuracy. CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT INDICATORS When the cross traffic alert detects an approaching vehicle, a tone sounds, a warning lamp illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror and arrows appear in the information display to show which side the vehicle is approaching from. E268294 E339014 Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp illuminates in the instrument cluster and a message appears in the information display. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects. Note: If arrows do not display, a message appears in the information display. The sensors are behind the rear fascia panel. Note: In some conditions, the system could alert you, even when there is nothing in the detection zone, for example a vehicle passing further away from your vehicle. 260 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped) CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Cross Traffic Alert Displays instead of indication arrows when the system detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic. Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean the sensors. If the message See Manual continues to appear, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Cross Traffic System Fault The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Cross Traffic Alert Deactivated Trailer Attached Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle. 261 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pre-Collision Assist Note: If you perceive pre-collision assist alerts as being too frequent or disturbing, then you can reduce the alert sensitivity, although the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings. WHAT IS PRE-COLLISION ASSIST Pre-collision assist detects and warns of approaching hazards in the roadway. If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours, or a pedestrian within your driving path, the system provides multiple levels of assistance to help avoid a collision. Each system has various levels of detection capabilities. See Pre-Collision Assist Limitations (page 263). PRE-COLLISION ASSIST PRECAUTIONS HOW DOES PRE-COLLISION ASSIST WORK The system warns the driver of potential hazards by providing three levels of assistance. WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. E156130 If your vehicle is rapidly approaching potential hazards the system provides the following levels of functionality: WARNING: The system does not detect vehicles that are driving in a different direction, cyclists or animals. Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. 1. Alert. 2. Brake Support. 3. Automatic Emergency Braking. Alert: When active, a flashing visual warning appears and an E329466 audible warning tone sounds. WARNING: The system does not operate during hard acceleration or steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury. Brake Support: The system is designed to help reduce the impact speed by preparing the brakes for rapid braking. The system does not automatically apply the brakes. If you press the brake pedal, the system could apply additional braking up to maximum braking force, even if you lightly press the brake pedal. WARNING: The system may fail or operate with reduced function during cold and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the system. Keep the front camera and radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Automatic Emergency Braking: Automatic emergency braking may activate if the system determines that a collision is imminent. 262 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pre-Collision Assist Note: Brake support and automatic emergency braking are active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h). If the vehicle has a radar sensor included with adaptive cruise control, then brake support and automatic emergency braking are active up to the maximum speed of the vehicle. WARNING: Take additional care if your vehicle is heavily loaded or you are towing a trailer. These conditions could result in reduced performance of this system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Pedestrian Detection Limitations WARNING: The system cannot help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain a safe distance and speed. Pedestrian detection is active at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h). Pedestrian detection operates optimally when detected hazards are clearly identifiable. System performance may reduce in situations where pedestrians are running, partly obscured, have a complex background, or cannot be distinguished from a group. WARNING: In situations where the vehicle camera has limited detection capability, this may reduce system performance. These situations include but are not limited to direct or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail lights, unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians with complex backgrounds, running pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or pedestrians that the system cannot distinguish from a group. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Intersection Assist (If Equipped) If your vehicle comes with a radar sensor included in adaptive cruise control, the pre-collision assist system may operate in a scenario where you are turning across an oncoming vehicle's path. Detection of vehicles driving in an oncoming direction is active if your vehicle is driving at speeds up to 19 mph (30 km/h). PRE-COLLISION ASSIST LIMITATIONS Pre-collision assist depends on the detection ability of its camera and sensors. Any obstructions or damage to these areas can limit detection or prevent the system from functioning. See Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors (page 264). The system is active at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h). E309750 Note: The pre-collision assist system automatically disables when you select four-wheel drive low, manually disable AdvanceTrac™, or select rock crawl mode. 263 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pre-Collision Assist SWITCHING PRE-COLLISION ASSIST ON AND OFF LOCATING THE PRECOLLISION ASSIST SENSORS To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Features on the touchscreen. Press Driver Assistance. Press Pre-Collision Assist. Switch the feature on or off. Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist Settings You can adjust the following settings by using the touchscreen controls in the pre-collision assist menu: • Change alert and distance alert sensitivity to one of three possible settings. • Switch distance indication and alert on or off. • If required, switch automatic emergency braking on or off. • If required, switch the entire pre-collision assist feature on or off. • If required, switch evasive steering assist on or off. E327933 1 Camera. 2 Radar sensor (if equipped). If a message regarding a blocked sensor or camera appears in the information display, something is obstructing the radar signals or camera images. If your vehicle has a radar sensor, it is behind the fascia cover in the center of the lower grille. With a blocked sensor or camera, the system may not function, or performance may reduce. See Pre-Collision Assist – Information Messages (page 267). Note: Automatic emergency braking and evasive steering turn on every time you switch the ignition on. Note: If your vehicle has a radar sensor, we recommend that you switch the system off if you install a snow plow or similar object in such a way that it may block the radar sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected setting across key cycles. DISTANCE INDICATION WHAT IS DISTANCE INDICATION Distance indication displays the gap between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you. Note: If you switch automatic emergency braking off, evasive steering assist switches off. Note: The graphic does not display if you switch on cruise control or adaptive cruise control. 264 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pre-Collision Assist Vehicle Speed System Sensitivity Distance Indicator Color Distance Gap Time Gap 62 mph (100 km/h). Normal. Gray. Greater than 82 ft (25 m). Greater than 0.9 seconds. Yellow. 56–82 ft (17–25 m). 0.6-0.9 seconds. Red. Less than 56 ft (17 m). Less than 0.6 seconds. 265 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pre-Collision Assist SWITCHING DISTANCE INDICATION ON AND OFF AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen: 1. 2. 3. 4. WHAT IS AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING Press Features on the touchscreen. Press Driver Assistance. Press Pre-Collision Assist. Switch Distance Indication on or off. Automatic emergency braking may activate if the system determines that a collision is imminent. The system may help reduce impact damage to avoid the crash completely. DISTANCE INDICATION INDICATOR Automatic emergency braking is only available up to certain speeds. See Pre-Collision Assist Limitations (page 263). The indicator displays the time gap between your vehicle and vehicles traveling in the same direction ahead of you. SWITCHING AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING ON AND OFF To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Features on the touchscreen. Press Driver Assistance. Press Pre-Collision Assist. Press Auto Emergency Braking. Switch the feature on or off. EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST WHAT IS EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a road user, evasive steering assist helps you steer around the road user. E254791 266 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pre-Collision Assist After you turn the steering wheel in an attempt to avoid a crash with the road user, the system applies additional steering torque to help you steer around the road user. After you pass the road user, the system applies steering torque when you turn the steering wheel to steer back into the lane. The system deactivates after you fully pass the road user. Note: Evasive steering assist does not activate if the distance to the road user ahead is too small and the system cannot avoid a crash. Note: Evasive steering does not activate with cyclists or pedestrians. SWITCHING EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST ON AND OFF Note: Road users are defined as another stationary vehicle in the same lane or a vehicle traveling in the same lane in the same direction as you. See Pre-Collision Assist Precautions (page 262). To switch the system on or off, use the touchscreen: 1. Press Features on the touchscreen. 2. Press Driver Assistance. 3. Press Pre-Collision Assist. 4. Switch Evasive Steering on or off. Note: If you switch automatic emergency braking off, evasive steering assist turns off. EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST LIMITATIONS Evasive steering assist only activates when all the following occur: • Automatic emergency braking and evasive steering assist are on. • The system detects a road user ahead and starts to apply the brakes. • You significantly turn the steering wheel to steer around a road user. Note: Automatic emergency braking and evasive steering assist turn on every time you switch the ignition on. PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – TROUBLESHOOTING Note: Evasive steering assist does not automatically steer around a road user. If you do not turn the steering wheel, evasive steering assist does not activate. PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – WARNING LAMPS E335612 A telltale illuminates in the cluster to indicate if the system is disabled or unavailable. PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor Blocked You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Pre-Collision Assist Not Available A fault with the system has occurred. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 267 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pre-Collision Assist PRE-COLLISION ASSIST – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact. Have your vehicle serviced to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation. Camera Troubleshooting The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed. Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera. The windshield in front of the camera is clean, but the message remains in the instrument cluster display. Wait a short time. It could take several minutes for the camera to detect that there is no obstruction. Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped) The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed. Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction. The surface of the radar in the grille is clean, but the message remains in the instrument cluster display. Wait a short time. It could take several minutes for the radar to detect that there is no obstruction. Heavy rain, spray or fog is interfering with the radar signals. The pre-collision assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactivates a short time after the weather conditions improve. Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface of the road could interfere with the radar signals. The pre-collision assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactivates a short time after the weather conditions improve. 268 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driver Alert (If Equipped) WHAT IS DRIVER ALERT WARNING: Certain driving styles may result in the system warning you even if you are not feeling tired. Driver alert alerts you if it determines that you are becoming drowsy or if your driving deteriorates. WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. HOW DOES DRIVER ALERT WORK Driver Alert calculates your alertness level based on your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings and other factors through use of the front camera sensor behind the interior mirror. WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us. WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction. E309385 Note: If something is blocking the camera or damaged the windshield, Driver Alert may not function. DRIVER ALERT PRECAUTIONS WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. DRIVER ALERT LIMITATIONS Driver alert may not function correctly if: • The sensor cannot track the road lane markings. • Your vehicle's speed is less than approximately 40 mph (65 km/h). WARNING: Take regular rest breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system to warn you. 269 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driver Alert (If Equipped) SWITCHING DRIVER ALERT ON AND OFF DRIVER ALERT INDICATORS To switch driver alert on or off, use the touchscreen: The warning system has two stages: System Warnings 1. A temporary warning is issued to advise you to take a rest. This message only appears for a short time. 2. If you do not rest and the system continues to detect that your driving deteriorates, it issues a further warning. This remains in the instrument cluster display until you cancel it. Note: The system does not warn you if the vehicle speed falls below approximately 40 mph (65 km/h). 1. Press Features on the touchscreen. 2. Press Driver Assistance. 3. Switch Driver Alert on or off. Note: The system remains on or off depending on the last selection. Resetting Driver Alert You can reset the system by either: • Switching the ignition off and on. • Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver door. DRIVER ALERT – TROUBLESHOOTING DRIVER ALERT – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Driver Alert Warning Rest Now Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so. Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested Take a rest soon. 270 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying LOAD CARRYING PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification label vehicle weight limits can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before you load your vehicle, become familiar with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight rating, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label or Safety Compliance Certification label. WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower your vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. WARNING: When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may 271 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying WHAT IS THE GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The gross combined weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating. GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These numbers are on the Safety Compliance Certification label. LOCATING THE SAFETY COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION LABELS WHAT IS THE GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes all options, equipment, passengers and cargo. It appears on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Safety Compliance Certification Label Example: WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM LOADED TRAILER WEIGHT E198828 Maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information. See Towing a Trailer (page 283). The Safety Compliance Certification label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. WHAT IS THE GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking 272 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying damage. (Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer, or online at the website that follows. RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides 273 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying is the maximum payload for your vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any additional equipment on your vehicle, you must determine the new payload. Subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire and Loading label. When towing, trailer tongue weight or king pin weight is also part of payload. CALCULATING PAYLOAD Tire and Loading Label Information Example: CALCULATING THE LOAD LIMIT Steps for determining the correct load limit: 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.) E198719 Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading label. The label is either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a tire and loading label. Look for “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire and Loading Information label 274 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. 275 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the front or the rear gross axle weight rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Make sure that you securely fasten the load. Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE ROOF RACK Removing the Roof Rack (If Equipped) ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED) 2 1 ROOF RACK PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when you are fitting a roof rack. E339405 1. Using the provided T30 tool, remove the front roof rack cover fasteners. 2. Remove the front roof rack covers by pulling upward at the rear edge and rotating forward. WARNING: When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Note: If you use a roof rack, the fuel consumption of your vehicle will be higher and you may experience different driving characteristics. E339073 3. Using the provided T30 tool, remove the front roof rack fasteners. Note: Never place loads directly on the roof panel. The roof panel is not designed to directly carry a load. You must place loads directly on the crossbars fitted to the roof rack side rails. When using the roof rack system, we recommend that you use genuine Ford accessory crossbars specifically designed for your vehicle. 276 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying Installing the Roof Rack 2 1 E339074 4. Remove the cover to access the rear fastener. 5. Using the supplied special tool, loosen the fastener until you can remove the rack. 6. Remove the rack from the vehicle. E339406 1. To remove, press the button on the rear of the cover and rotate forward. 2. Remove the fasteners and remove the trim cover retaining plate. 3. Store the trim cover components. E339073 4. Position the roof rack on the vehicle. 5. Hand start the front roof rack fasteners. 6. Using the provided T30 tool, tighten the front roof rack fasteners. Torque bolts to 7.7 lb.ft (10.5 Nm). 7. Align the cover with the alignment slot and rotate rearward. 8. Hand start the front roof rack cover fasteners. 9. Using the provided T30 tool, tighten the front roof rack cover fasteners. Torque bolts to 5.9 lb.ft (8 Nm). E339407 Note: The windshield trim cover, retaining plate and fasteners are provided. The trim cover is installed when you remove the roof rack. 7. Locate the trim cover components. 8. Place the trim cover retaining plate over the mounting studs. 9. Install the supplied fasteners. Torque nuts to 7.7 lb.ft (10.5 Nm). 10. Align the cover with the alignment slot at the front of the cover, then rotate rearward and snap into place. 277 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying ADJUSTING A ROOF RACK CROSSBAR Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped) E339074 Note: The rear crossbar is part of the clamping system. If you removed the crossbar you must install it first for proper attachment to the hard top. 10. Using the supplied special tool, tighten the fastener. Note: The supplied special tool stops turning the fastener when you have proper torque applied. 11. E339075 Install the rear roof rack fastener cover. 1. Using the provided T30 tool, remove the crossbar bolts. 2. Move the crossbar to the new position. 3. Using the provided T30 tool, install the crossbar bolts. Note: Torque bolts to 5.9 lb.ft (8 Nm). Note: Moving the crossbars forward may increase wind noise. To limit wind noise return the crossbars to the rearward position. ROOF RACK LOAD CAPACITIES Maximum Recommended Load Amounts Description Maximum Recommended Load When in motion 110 lb (50 kg) When stationary 450 lb (204 kg) Vehicles with 315/70R17 Tires 0 lb (0 kg) 278 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Load Carrying Note: The maximum recommended load is based on the load being evenly distributed on the crossbars. FENDER ANCHOR POINTS LOCATING THE FENDER ANCHOR POINTS E331351 FENDER ANCHOR POINT LOAD CAPACITIES The maximum recommended load is 150 lb (68 kg). 279 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Rear Cargo Area LOCATING THE REAR CARGO AREA ANCHOR POINTS REAR CARGO AREA ANCHOR POINTS REAR CARGO AREA ANCHOR POINT PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others. WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. E324512 REAR CARGO AREA ANCHOR POINT LOAD CAPACITIES Maximum Load Value WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. 2,000 lb (907 kg) 280 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Connecting a Trailer CONNECTING A TRAILER PRECAUTIONS CONNECTING A TRAILER Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not adjust the spring bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is higher than before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and could result in serious personal injury. Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer. E163167 See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications. When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions. Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 455). Trailer Lamps If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you. WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required. When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions. Account for the trailer coupler weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight. Most towed vehicles require trailer lamps. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Do not exceed the load limits. See Calculating the Load Limit (page 274). Safety Chains Install trailer safety chains to the trailer hitch as recommended by the manufacturer. Cross the chains under the trailer coupler and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. 281 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Connecting a Trailer Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Always connect the safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer hitch. E265060 If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch, make sure to fully close the latch. CONNECTING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING CONNECTING A TRAILER – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Description Trailer Disconnected The system senses a trailer connection disconnecting, either intentionally or unintentionally, during a given ignition cycle. 282 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Towing a Trailer TOWING A TRAILER PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch could reduce the hitch rating. WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. WARNING: The anti-lock brake system does not control the trailer brakes. WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. TRAILER BRAKE PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. WARNING: Do not exceed the lowest rating capacity for your vehicle or trailer hitch. Overloading your vehicle or trailer hitch can impair your vehicle stability and handling. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not tow a trailer fitted with electric trailer brakes unless your vehicle is fitted with a compatible aftermarket electronic trailer brake controller. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. WARNING: Make sure that the vertical load on the tow ball is between the minimum and maximum recommended weight at all times. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations. The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating. 283 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Towing a Trailer • Certain states require functioning trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. Ford Motor Company recommends separate functioning brake systems for trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb (680 kg) when loaded. TOWING A TRAILER LIMITATIONS • The vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer. Note: Your vehicle could have reduced performance when operating at high altitudes and when heavily loaded or towing a trailer. When driving at elevation, to match driving performance as perceived at sea level, reduce gross vehicle weight and gross combination weight by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation. Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. The trailer tongue weight should never exceed 10% of the maximum towing capacity. Select a ball mount with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side. TRAILER TOWING HINTS Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Periodically inspect these components during and after any towing operation. When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. LOADING YOUR TRAILER Your vehicle may have a temporary or conventional spare tire. A temporary spare tire is different in diameter or width, tread-type, or is from a different manufacturer than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using. To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving: • Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor. • Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires. 284 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Towing a Trailer When towing a trailer: • Obey country specific regulations for towing a trailer. • Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 mi (800 km). • Do not make full-throttle starts. • Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km). • When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the transmission in park (P) to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A/C performance. • Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off when you are towing on long, steep slopes. • Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not continuously apply the brakes, as they may overheat and become less effective. • If your transmission has Grade Assist or Tow/Haul, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. • Your vehicle has AdvanceTrac with roll stability control. When towing a trailer, additional loads could cause the AdvanceTrac system to engage during cornering maneuvers. Reduce cornering speeds to make sure that you can maintain control of the vehicle and trailer if the AdvanceTrac system engages. • • Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and gradually brake. Avoid parking on a slope. However, if you must park on a slope, turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow, set the parking brake, place the transmission in park (P) and place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. Note: Chocks are not included with your vehicle. LAUNCHING OR RETRIEVING A BOAT OR PERSONAL WATERCRAFT When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Exceeding 6 in (15 cm) could allow water to enter vehicle components, causing internal damage to the components and affecting driveability, emissions and reliability. Note: Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water. Note: Disconnect the trailer wiring connector before backing the trailer into the water. Note: Reconnect the trailer wiring connector after removing the trailer from the water. 285 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Towing a Trailer TOWING WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Market Website United States of America https://www.fleet.ford.com/ towing-guides/ Canada https://www.fleet.ford.ca/towingguides/ 286 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Towing a Trailer • • • Driver weight. Passenger weight. Payload, cargo and luggage weight. • Aftermarket equipment weight. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination. Note: The trailer tongue load is considered part of the payload for your vehicle. Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight. Note: Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure. WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM LOADED TRAILER WEIGHT The maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. CALCULATING THE MAXIMUM LOADED TRAILER WEIGHT FOR YOUR VEHICLE 1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model and axle ratio. 2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle: • Vehicle curb weight. • Hitch hardware weight, for example a draw bar, ball, locks or weight distributing hardware. TOWING A TRAILER – TROUBLESHOOTING TOWING A TRAILER – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Details Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control detects trailer sway. Reduce the vehicle's speed. 287 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Trailer Sway Control 2. Press Towing. 3. Switch Trailer Sway Control on or off. HOW DOES TRAILER SWAY CONTROL WORK The system turns on each time you start your vehicle. The system applies the brakes to the individual wheels and reduces engine torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer begins to sway, the stability control lamp flashes and the message Trailer Sway Reduce Speed appears in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Check the vertical weight on the tow ball and trailer load distribution. TRAILER SWAY CONTROL PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation. Note: This feature only activates when significant trailer sway occurs. Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it begins. Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may activate multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed. SWITCHING TRAILER SWAY CONTROL ON AND OFF 1. Press Features on the touchscreen. 288 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints Before you venture off road, have a clear mental picture of the underside of your vehicle. Learn the location of any low hanging items and any skid plates that may be on the vehicle. You can avoid snagging them on rocks and other obstacles if you know where they are. OFF-ROAD DRIVING WHAT IS OFF-ROAD DRIVING Off-road driving is driving your vehicle on unsurfaced roads or trails, made from dirt, rocks, sand and mud. Memorizing some basic dimensions helps you confidently deal with off-road obstacles. Get to know your vehicle’s height and width, its lowest point, its wading depth and angles. Familiarize yourself with your vehicle’s on-board technology features. Your vehicle has been designed and equipped to explore those places where the road cannot take you, whether you choose a forest trail or the open desert. OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS We recommend driving at least two vehicles when driving off-road. The buddy system helps make sure that help is close at hand should a vehicle become stuck or damaged. WARNING: If you continue to drive your vehicle when the engine is overheating, the engine could stop without warning. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle. We recommend taking supplies such as a first aid kit, supply of water, tow strap and cell or satellite phone with you any time you plan an off-road excursion. Before going off-road, consult with your local governmental agencies to determine designated off-road trails and recreation areas. Also, be sure to understand any off-road vehicle registration requirements for the area in which you plan on driving. BASIC OFF-ROAD DRIVING TECHNIQUES Grip the steering wheel with your thumbs on the outside of the rim. This reduces the risk of injury due to abrupt steering wheel motions that occur when negotiating rough terrain. Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nation’s wilderness areas. The U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management is encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly. Control your throttle, brake and steering inputs in a smooth manner. Sudden inputs to the controls can cause a loss of traction for the vehicle, especially when on sloped terrain or crossing obstacles such as rocks or logs. Before taking your vehicle off-road, perform a basic vehicle inspection to make sure the vehicle is in top working condition. 289 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints DRIVING OFF-ROAD Look ahead on your route noting upcoming obstacles, surface texture or color changes or any other factors which may indicate a change in available traction. Adjust the vehicle speed and route to avoid a loss in traction. Conditions can change causing the course to vary day to day. Mark obstacles with GPS markers to avoid potential vehicle damage. Where necessary, get out of your vehicle and check the terrain. Driving In Snow and Ice WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle. When driving off-road, if the front or rear suspension is bottoming-out or excessive contact with the skid-plates is happening, reduce the vehicle's speed to avoid potential damage to your vehicle. If you are driving in a dusty area, be sure to leave ample distance between your vehicle and any other vehicles to allow for adequate vision. Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. If your vehicle slides when driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Slowly and steadily apply the accelerator when starting from a full stop. Avoid sudden braking. When driving off-road verify that your wipers and washers are working properly and reduce your speed for better visibility. When driving in desert conditions, we recommend driving with your headlamps on to help other drivers easily see you. When convoying with other vehicles, we recommend that communication is used, and the lead vehicle notify other vehicles of upcoming obstacles. WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. Keep available ground clearance in mind and pick a route that minimizes the risk of catching the underside of the vehicle on an obstacle. When negotiating low speed obstacles, applying light brake pressure in conjunction with the throttle allows you to negotiate the obstacle in a more controlled manner. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between your vehicle and other vehicles for stopping. Driving off-road requires a high amount of concentration. Even if your local law does not prohibit drinking alcohol when driving off-road we do not recommend it. In emergency stopping situations, do not pump the brake pedal, apply the brake firmly. 290 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints Driving In Sand If you lose traction on your wheels facing uphill, stop and choose a more suitable route. When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Drive through the terrain without varying vehicle speed. Apply the accelerator and avoid excessive wheel slip. Leave a generous gap between your vehicle and other vehicles to minimize the risk of damage from flying gravel. Avoid dust clouds as they reduce visibility. Use the vehicle's momentum to maintain forward motion in sand. Avoid coming to a stop on steep sand slopes as the vehicle may not be able to continue forward after it has stopped. Before navigating on uneven ground, secure anything inside the vehicle. If possible, remove any roof-rack items. Use the lowest gear possible and approach the obstacle at a slow speed. Driving In Mud If your vehicle begins to slide down a slope, steer downhill and gently apply the throttle. If you lose traction on your uphill wheels, stop immediately and choose a more suitable route. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle. Approach logs, rocky steps or ditches diagonally. Keep at least three wheels on the ground at all times. Climbing A Hill After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the wheels and tires and rotating driveshafts. Excess mud stuck on the wheels and tires and rotating driveshafts can cause an imbalance that could damage drive components. WARNING: Extreme care should be used when steering the vehicle in reverse down a slope so as not to cause the vehicle to swerve out of control. Note: The vehicle brakes are less effective when wet or muddy. Although natural obstacles can make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, try to drive straight up or straight down. Driving Over Rocks and Gravel Gravel is a constantly changing, low-grip surface. Driving at slow speeds on gravel reduces the risk of losing traction when you stop, accelerate or turn a corner. Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possible vehicle roll over. When approaching large rocks, position the vehicle so that the tires pass over the largest obstacle. Whenever driving on a hill, you must first determine the route you can use. When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. Note: Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage. Note: Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills if your vehicle does not have rock rails. 291 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom of the water's condition. On soft bottoms, the vehicle sinks in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Make sure to consider this when determining the depth of water. If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn around because this could cause your vehicle to roll over. It is better to reverse back to a safe location. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. Determine the depth and speed of the current before attempting a water crossing. Be aware that obstacles and debris may be beneath the water’s surface. If the vehicle is unable to make it up the hill, do not attempt to turn back down the slope. Note: Cross flowing water at an angle heading slightly upstream. Apply the accelerator just enough for the wheels to climb the hill. Note: You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment. Note: Too much acceleration can cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Drive slowly when crossing water. Proceed with a constant slow speed lightly pressing on the accelerator. Descending A Hill: • Use the same gear you would use to climb the hill. • Do not descend in neutral. • Disengage overdrive. • Avoid sudden and excessive braking. Drive through the water very slowly when entering, then build up momentum. Keep your vehicle moving at a steady pace. Note: Do not try to accelerate through the water crossing. When driving too fast in water or through deep water, the engine, transmission, transfer case, axles, electrical components or vehicle interior could ingest water. Water can cause permanent damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. See Driving Through Water Limitations (page 294). Note: The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer your vehicle. When descending a steep hill in a manual transmission vehicle do not leave the vehicle in gear with the clutch pressed. This could cause damage to your driveline. Driving Through Water Note: Failure to follow the recommended speeds can result in vehicle damage. WARNING: Do not attempt to cross a deep, fast flowing body of water. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless your vehicle ingested water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Ease off the accelerator as you reach the other side to diminish the front wave. Apply the accelerator slowly and as necessary to climb out of the other side. As the water depth increases, you must reduce your vehicle speed to avoid potential vehicle damage. 292 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints Avoid Getting High-Centered Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris into the radiator. Always keep available ground clearance in mind and pick a route that minimizes the risk of catching the underside of the vehicle on an obstacle and getting high-centered. Extra care must be taken crossing any type of water. Do not drive into water unless necessary. You should only drive through areas that are designated and approved. Freeing A Stuck Vehicle High currents even in shallow water can wash the dirt out from around your tires or push your vehicle across slippery rocks or surfaces. WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Never attempt to cross flowing water that is deeper than your vehicles ground clearance. Even in low currents your vehicles body surface area can be pushed downstream and out of control. Recovery hooks are mounted to the vehicle's structure and are used to pull out the vehicle from a surface or location when stuck. Recover your vehicle using various towing apparatus attached to your recovery hook such as winch, open hook, or strap. Do not cross any body of water that is fast flowing and rising, wait for the flow rate to reduce. Note: Do not use recovery hooks to recreationally tow your vehicle. See Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle (page 307). Determine exit points that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting. If there are other vehicles ahead, wait until they’ve left the water. Unsettled water can make a safe passage more challenging. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, you may rock it out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press the accelerator in each gear. Know your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. Keep the doors fully closed during a water crossing. Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature damage to the transmission may occur. Vehicles used to traverse water regularly should be periodically inspected for signs of water ingestion in all of the vehicle's fluids. If water is found inside your vehicle fluids, service your vehicle or see an authorized dealer. Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so, check the brakes, horn, lights, and steering wheel to make sure everything is still in working order. If you are unable to free your vehicle call roadside assistance. See Roadside Assistance (page 299). 293 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints OFF-ROAD DRIVING AIDS Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut Selecting an Off-Road Drive Mode Review the path ahead before attempting to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle from outside the vehicle for an understanding of the terrain condition in front of and behind the obstacle. Approach obstacles slowly and inch the vehicle over. Ditches and washouts should be crossed at a 45 degree angle when possible. Using the appropriate drive mode increases your vehicle's control. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). Note: Drive modes are selected by using the Goes Over Any-type of Terrain G.O.A.T. MODES controller. Using Four-Wheel Drive Driving Over Logs Your vehicle has a four-wheel drive system that offers various modes to help you optimize traction on any off-road surface. See Four-Wheel Drive (page 182). Review the path ahead before attempting to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle from outside the vehicle for an understanding of the terrain condition in front of and behind the obstacle. Using the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Approach obstacles slowly and inch the vehicle over, approaching at a 15 degree angle. The stabilizer bar disconnect improves suspension articulation, improving traction and comfort in rough terrain. Note: It is best to have a front tire on top of the log when the other begins to climb over. The vehicle's disconnect system is hydraulically actuated. If a large obstacle near the log such as a rock cannot be avoided, choose a path that places the rock directly under the tire rather than the undercarriage of the vehicle. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle. Your vehicle is capable of disconnecting under high load. Your vehicle is also capable of reconnecting under all conditions. It is not necessary for the vehicle to be on level ground in order to reconnect the stabilizer bar. See Stabilizer Bar Disconnect (page 214). DRIVING THROUGH WATER LIMITATIONS Model Maximum Wading Depth Vehicles without the Sasquatch Package. 31.5 in (800 mm) Vehicles with the Sasquatch Package. 33.5 in (850 mm) Using the Cameras Off-Road Use the 360 degree camera to enhance your off-road experience. See 360 Degree Camera (page 229). When you are driving through water do not exceed 4 mph (7 km/h). 294 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints Using the Front and Rear Differential Lock Use this when driving over large obstacles, such as rocks or logs, to help maintain a constant vehicle speed. When engaged, the front and rear differential lock provides additional traction to your vehicle by forcing either the two rear wheels or two front wheels to turn at the same speed. In 4H, the system offers lift pedal braking and auto hill hold functionality. See What Is Trail One Pedal Drive (page 208). You can activate and deactivate the front and rear differential lock on the fly within the operating speed range. See Electronic Locking Differential (page 190). Using Trail Turn Assist Note: Trail one pedal drive is only available when the vehicle is in 4H or 4L. The feature reduces the turn radius of the vehicle on off-road surfaces. Using Trail Control The system reduces driver effort to negotiate difficult off-road terrain by allowing the vehicle to make a tight turn in a single maneuver that might otherwise require a three point turn. See Trail Turn Assist (page 212). The system works in a similar manner to cruise control in off-road conditions. Trail Control provides you the ability to maneuver the vehicle without using the throttle and brake pedals. Trail Control allows you to set a speed between 1 mph (1.6 km/h) to 14 mph (23 km/h) in a forward motion and 1 mph (1.6 km/h) to 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse. The system controls acceleration and braking in difficult off-road environments, which allows you to focus on steering. See Trail Control (page 207). Note: Trail turn assist is only available when the vehicle is in 4H or 4L. Note: Trail turn assist cannot activate if the rear differential is locked. What Are Rock Rails (If Equipped) Rock rails protect the rocker and body side from damage and provide a sliding surface to allow the vehicle to cross boulders and rock ledges. Trail Control Performance: • Manages wheel slip to maximize traction. • Removes the need for you to use both feet when driving in off-road situations. • Provides braking to maximize traction in descents. • Gives you confidence in difficult environments. Rock rails also can act as a pivot point to sharply turn the vehicle in tight spaces with high walls or rocks present. AFTER DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE OFF-ROAD Using Trail One Pedal Drive WARNING: After off-road use, before returning to the road, check the wheels and tires for damage. Off-road use may cause damage to your wheels and tires that can lead to tire failure, loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Trail one pedal drive coordinates propulsive and braking torque through your application of the accelerator pedal to simulate a two footed driving technique. 295 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints Driving off-road places more stress on your vehicle than most on-road driving. After driving off-road, check for damage to the wheels, chassis and underbody. Note: If you have removed the impacted material from the wheels and your vehicle still has a vibration check your vehicle for damage or see an authorized dealer. Inspect the underbody of your vehicle by checking tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage. Inspect the exhaust system for damage or looseness. Make sure that the brakes are in proper working order and free of any mud, stones and debris, which can become trapped around the brake rotor, backing plate and caliper. Inspect the tires for any cuts in the tread or sidewall area. Also inspect the sidewall for any bulge indicating damage to the tire. Make sure the tires are inflated to proper tire pressure as indicated on the tire placard. Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks, or other damage. Inspect undercarriage fasteners. If any are loose or damaged, tighten or replace ensuring that the proper torque specification is used. Check the radiator for mud and debris and clean as needed. Check that the air filter is clean and dry. Inspect for torn or punctured boots on ball joints, half shafts, steering gears. Remove accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard or hide damage to the fuel lines, brake hoses and propeller shafts. Refit the front license plate if removed previously. Make sure the grille and radiator are clear of any obstructions that may affect cooling. DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE AT HIGH SPEEDS After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, inspect the wipers and washers to make sure they are working. Before off-road driving in unfamiliar areas at high speeds, do a low speed reconnaissance run to become aware of any obstacles that you could encounter. Note: Mud caked windows are hard to see through and can damage wiper blades or motor. Your vehicle can incur damage if driven beyond its capabilities. Skid plates and rock rails are designed to help limit damage to vital components and exterior finishes, but cannot prevent all damage if driven in extreme off-road conditions. Damage to skid plates, rock rails and exterior finishes as well as bent, cracked or broken body, frame and chassis components may not be covered by warranty. Check wipers for debris or anything that may scratch the windshield. If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause vibrations when driving and wheel imbalance. Remove the material to reduce the vibration. It is important that you take the time to become familiar with the controls and dynamics of your vehicle before attempting higher speed off-road driving. 296 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints Some points to consider: • Slowly build up speed. Initially, drive at a speed that allows ample time to fully assess the terrain around you and to understand how the vehicle responds to both the terrain and your inputs. Increase speed as comfort increases, being mindful of how the vehicle responds to various conditions at different speeds. • Find a wide open place to experiment with different functions on your vehicle and different driving techniques. Try a given maneuver with different functions, such as drive modes, four-wheel drive modes or switching the electronic locking differential on and off and see how your vehicle responds. If the vehicle is tending to push straight ahead when trying to negotiate a turn, a light application of the brake when turning could help turn your vehicle. A wider entry to a corner or entering a corner more slowly could help your vehicle turn and allow you to apply the throttle sooner after negotiating the turn. • As speed increases, look farther ahead of the vehicle so that there is time to react to oncoming obstacles. Remember that in many off-road environments, obstacles can be hard to see until they are relatively near. A good strategy is to alternate between looking far ahead and up closer to the front of your vehicle when driving. • Remember that you may not be the only one in a particular recreational area. Be aware of others in your area. This is especially true of motorcycles and all-terrain vehicles that may be more difficult to spot than a full-sized vehicle. • • When driving in desert conditions, the midpoint of the day is the most difficult time to see many of the small ridges and dips due to flat shadows from the sun being at its highest point. Extreme care should be taken at these times. We encourage you to switch on off-road modes for off-road driving. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 242). COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS The functional operation of some components and systems can be affected at temperatures below approximately -13°F (-25°C). BREAKING-IN Your vehicle requires a break-in period. For the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km), avoid driving at high speeds, heavy braking, aggressive shifting or using your vehicle to tow. During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. DRIVING ECONOMICALLY The following helps to improve fuel consumption: • Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and anticipate the road ahead to avoid heavy braking. • Regularly check your tire pressures and make sure that they are inflated to the correct pressure. • Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and carry out the recommended checks. 297 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Driving Hints • • • • • • • Plan your journey and check the traffic before you set off. It is more efficient to combine errands into a single trip whenever possible. Avoid idling the engine in cold weather or for extended periods. Start the engine only when you are ready to set off. Do not carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel. Do not add unnecessary accessories to the exterior of your vehicle, for example running boards. If you use a roof rack, remember to fold it down or remove it when not in use. Do not shift into neutral when you are braking or when your vehicle is slowing down. Shut all windows when driving at high speeds. Switch off all electric systems when not in use, for example air conditioning. Make sure that you unplug any accessories from the auxiliary power points when not in use. WARNING: Secure the floor mat to both retention devices so that it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This could result in the floor mat interfering with the operation of the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while your vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control. FLOOR MATS WARNING: Use a floor mat designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. E142666 To install the floor mats, position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position. WARNING: Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make sure they are secure. 298 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Crash and Breakdown Information • ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • 24 hours a day, seven days a week. • For the coverage period supplied with your vehicle. • Roadside Assistance covers: • A flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit). • Battery jump start. • Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). • Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. • Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries. Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km). Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services. Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the Owner's Manual kit. United States vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts. 299 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Crash and Breakdown Information Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States. JUMP STARTING PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage is concurrent with the powertrain coverage period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. If you require more information, please call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. SWITCHING THE HAZARD FLASHERS ON AND OFF The hazard flasher button is on the instrument panel. Press the button to switch the hazard flashers on if your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other road users. WARNING: Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps. WARNING: Make sure that the cables are clear of any moving parts and fuel delivery system parts. When you switch the hazard flashers on, all front and rear direction indicators flash. WARNING: Connect batteries with only the same nominal voltage. Note: The hazard flashers operate when the ignition is in any position, or if the key is not in the ignition. The battery loses charge and could have insufficient power to restart your vehicle. WARNING: If the engine is running while the hood is open, stay clear of moving engine components. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. Press the button again to switch them off. Do not attempt to push-start an automatic transmission vehicle. This could cause transmission damage. 300 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Crash and Breakdown Information Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. This could damage your vehicle's electrical system. PREPARING THE VEHICLE Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch. JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING: Do not connect the negative jumper cable to any other part of your vehicle. Use the ground point. Note: If you are using a jump pack or booster box, follow the manufacturer's instructions. E281345 1. Pull the red rubber boot backward. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) jumper cable to an exposed metal part of the disabled vehicle's engine, as shown in the following illustration, away from the battery and fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) jumper cable to a ground connection point if available. 301 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Crash and Breakdown Information HOW DOES THE POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM WORK The system is designed to turn the hazard flashers on and to intermittently sound the horn in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag or the seatbelt pretensioners. POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM LIMITATIONS E309115 Depending on applicable laws in the country your vehicle was built for, the horn does not sound in the event of a serious impact. Starting the Engine 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and moderately rev the engine, or gently press the accelerator to keep the engine speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as shown in your tachometer. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once you start the disabled vehicle, run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. SWITCHING THE POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM OFF Press the hazard flasher switch or the unlock button on the remote control to switch the system off. Note: The alert turns off when the vehicle battery runs out of charge. Removing the Jumper Cables AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. WHAT IS AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF Note: Do not switch the headlamps on when disconnecting the cables. The peak voltage could blow the bulbs. The automatic crash shutoff is designed to stop the fuel going to the engine in the event of a moderate or severe crash. Note: Not every impact causes a shutoff. POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM WHAT IS THE POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system helps draw attention to your vehicle in the event of a serious impact. 302 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Crash and Breakdown Information AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Never link two straps together with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if the strap breaks and can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the fuel system checked. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. RE-ENABLING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Switch the ignition off. 2. Attempt to start your vehicle. 3. Switch the ignition off. 4. Attempt to start your vehicle. Note: If your vehicle does not start after the third attempt, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. E335946 RECOVERY TOWING A. ACCESSING THE FRONT TOWING POINT A Front recovery hooks. Note: Do not apply a load to the recovery hooks that is greater than the gross vehicle weight rating of your vehicle. Before using recovery hooks: • Make sure all attaching points are secure and capable of withstanding the applied load. • Do not use chains, cables or tow straps with metal hook ends. • Only use recovery straps that have a minimum breaking strength two to three times the gross vehicle weight of the stuck vehicle. • Make sure the recovery strap is in good condition and free of visible cuts, tears or damage. WARNING: Using recovery hooks is dangerous and should only be done by a person familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety practices. Improper use of recovery hooks may cause hook failure or separation from the vehicle and could result in serious injury or death. WARNING: Slowly remove the slack from the recovery strap prior to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce significantly higher loads which can cause the recovery hooks to break off, or the recovery strap to fail which can cause serious injury or death. 303 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Crash and Breakdown Information • • • • Use a damper device such as a tarp, heavy blanket or piece of carpet, and place it over the recovery strap to help absorb the energy in the event the strap breaks. Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded heavier than its gross vehicle weight rating specified on the certification label. Align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle in a straight line, within 10 degrees. Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the length of the recovery strap. This helps avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle lurching into their path. E335947 A. A Rear recovery hooks. Note: Do not apply a load to the recovery hooks that is greater than the gross vehicle weight rating of your vehicle. ACCESSING THE REAR TOWING POINT Before using recovery hooks: • Make sure all attaching points are secure and capable of withstanding the applied load. • Do not use chains, cables or tow straps with metal hook ends. • Only use recovery straps that have a minimum breaking strength two to three times the gross vehicle weight of the stuck vehicle. • Make sure the recovery strap is in good condition and free of visible cuts, tears or damage. • Use a damper device such as a tarp, heavy blanket or piece of carpet, and place it over the recovery strap to help absorb the energy in the event the strap breaks. • Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded heavier than its gross vehicle weight rating specified on the certification label. WARNING: Using recovery hooks is dangerous and should only be done by a person familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety practices. Improper use of recovery hooks may cause hook failure or separation from the vehicle and could result in serious injury or death. WARNING: Slowly remove the slack from the recovery strap prior to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce significantly higher loads which can cause the recovery hooks to break off, or the recovery strap to fail which can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: Never link two straps together with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if the strap breaks and can cause serious injury or death. 304 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Crash and Breakdown Information Align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle in a straight line, within 10 degrees. Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the length of the recovery strap. This helps avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle lurching into their path. We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Vehicle damage could occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means. TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE We recommend towing a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. However, it is acceptable to use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle configuration, you perform the following before towing: • • Make sure front-wheel and rear-wheel drive vehicles have their designated drive wheels off the ground regardless of towing direction. Use tow dollies to prevent damage to the transmission. • If your vehicle has an electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make sure you switch the four-wheel drive control to the 2H position before towing. Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without disengaging the front hubs could cause damage to the automatic transmission. Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) could cause damage to the automatic transmission. E143886 If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a professional towing service or your roadside assistance service provider. Your manufacturer produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures. 305 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Towing Your Vehicle You can only tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground by placing the transfer case in its neutral position by engaging the recreational tow feature. Perform the following steps after positioning your vehicle behind the tow vehicle and properly securing them together. TOWING YOUR VEHICLE PRECAUTIONS Use the following guidelines when towing your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Note: Make sure you properly secure your vehicle to the tow vehicle. Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. Note: If you are unsure of the vehicle’s configuration, contact an authorized dealer. Note: Failure to put the transfer case in its neutral position can damage vehicle components. RECREATIONALLY TOWING YOUR VEHICLE - MANUAL TRANSMISSION Note: You can check the towing status at any time by opening the driver door or turning the ignition to the accessory or on position. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral appears in the instrument cluster display to confirm you can recreationally tow your vehicle. WARNING: Do not disconnect the battery when recreationally towing your vehicle. This prevents the transfer case from shifting properly and could cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in gear. Note: If your vehicle has an anti-theft alarm, make sure you switch perimeter sensing on when towing. Note: A tone could sound for up to 30 minutes if you recreationally tow with the doors removed. WARNING: Placing the transfer case in its neutral position could cause your vehicle to freely roll. Make sure you press and hold the brake pedal and the vehicle is in a secure, safe position when you place the transfer case in its neutral position. Switching Neutral Tow On 1. 2. Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. These guidelines are to make sure that you do not damage the transmission. 3. 4. 5. 6. 306 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Switch your vehicle to accessory mode by pressing the push button ignition switch without pressing any pedals. Press the 2H button on the four-wheel drive mode control. Leave the gearshift lever in the neutral position and fully press and hold both the clutch and the brake pedal. Using the instrument cluster controls on the steering wheel, select Settings. Select Neutral Tow. Press and hold the OK button until a confirmation message appears in the information display. Towing Your Vehicle 4. Apply the parking brake, then disconnect your vehicle from the tow vehicle. 5. Release the parking brake, start your vehicle, and shift into either a forward or a reverse gear to make sure the transfer case is out of the neutral tow position. 6. If the transfer case did not successfully shift out of its neutral position, set the parking brake. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Note: If completed successfully, the information display shows Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral. This indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels on the ground. Note: If you do not see a confirmation message in the instrument cluster display, you must perform the procedure again from the beginning. Note: You may hear noise as the transfer case shifts into its neutral position. This is normal. 7. Release both the clutch and the brake pedals and leave the gearshift lever in the neutral position. 8. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the push button ignition switch once without pressing any pedals. Resolving the Shift Delayed Drive Forward Message 1. Fully press and hold both the brake and the clutch pedals. 2. Press the push button ignition switch. 3. With the vehicle running, shift into a forward gear and release the clutch. Let the vehicle roll forward up to 3 ft (1 m). Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal. Switching Neutral Tow Off 1. With your vehicle properly secured to the tow vehicle, switch your vehicle to accessory mode by pressing the push button ignition switch without pressing any pedals. 2. Starting with both the brake and clutch pedal released, fully press and hold both pedals at the same time for approximately seven seconds. Continue holding both pedals until the instrument cluster display shows 2H and Neutral Tow Disabled. Note: If completed successfully, the instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral Tow Disabled. 4. Make sure the instrument cluster displays Neutral Tow Disabled. RECREATIONALLY TOWING YOUR VEHICLE - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING: Do not disconnect the battery when recreationally towing your vehicle. This prevents the transfer case from shifting properly and could cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in park (P). Note: You must perform the switching neutral tow on and switching neutral tow off procedures again from the beginning if the indicator light and message do not display. Note: You may hear a noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal. 3. Release the pedals. 307 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Towing Your Vehicle Switching Neutral Tow On WARNING: Placing the transfer case in its neutral position could cause your vehicle to freely roll. Make sure you press and hold the brake pedal and the vehicle is in a secure, safe position when you place the transfer case in its neutral position. 1. Switch your vehicle to accessory mode by pressing the push button ignition switch without pressing any pedals. 2. Press the 2H button on the four-wheel drive mode control. 3. Fully press and hold the brake pedal and shift the transmission to neutral (N). 4. Using the instrument cluster controls on the steering wheel, select Settings. 5. Select Neutral Tow. 6. Press and hold the OK button until a confirmation message appears in the information display. Note: If completed successfully, the information display shows Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral. This indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels on the ground. Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. These guidelines are to make sure that you do not damage the transmission. You can only tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground by placing the transfer case in its neutral position by engaging the recreational tow feature. Perform the following steps after positioning your vehicle behind the tow vehicle and properly securing them together. Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. Note: If you do not see a confirmation message in the instrument cluster display, perform the procedure again from the beginning. Note: Failure to put the transfer case in its neutral position can damage vehicle components. Note: You may hear noise as the transfer case shifts into its neutral position. This is normal. Note: You can check the towing status at any time by opening the driver door or turning the ignition to the accessory or on position. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral appears in the instrument cluster display to confirm you can recreationally tow your vehicle. 7. Note: If your vehicle has an anti-theft alarm, make sure you switch perimeter sensing on when towing. 1. Release the brake pedal and leave the transmission in neutral (N). 8. Switch your vehicle off by pressing the push button ignition switch once without pressing any pedals. Switching Neutral Tow Off Note: A tone could sound for up to 30 minutes if you recreationally tow with the doors removed. 308 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing With your vehicle properly secured to the tow vehicle, switch your vehicle to accessory mode by pressing the push button ignition switch without pressing any pedals. Towing Your Vehicle 2. Starting with the brake pedal released and the transmission in neutral (N), fully press and hold the brake pedal for approximately seven seconds and shift the transmission to park (P). Continue holding the brake pedal until the instrument cluster display shows 2H and Neutral Tow Disabled. Note: If completed successfully, the instrument cluster displays 2H and Neutral Tow Disabled. 6. If the transfer case did not successfully shift out of its neutral position, set the parking brake. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Resolving the Shift Delayed Drive Forward Message 1. Fully press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Press the push button ignition switch. 3. With the vehicle running, shift into drive (D). Let the vehicle roll forward up to 3 ft (1 m). Note: You could hear a noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal. Note: Perform the switching neutral tow on and switching neutral tow off procedures again from the beginning if the indicator light and message do not display. Note: You could hear a noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal. 4. Make sure the instrument cluster displays Neutral Tow Disabled. 3. Release the brake pedal. 4. Apply the parking brake, then disconnect your vehicle from the tow vehicle. 5. Release the parking brake, start your vehicle, and shift into either drive (D) or reverse (R) to make sure the transfer case is out of the neutral tow position. EMERGENCY TOWING If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING TOWING YOUR VEHICLE – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Description Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral The transfer case is in the neutral position and your vehicle is safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground. Shift Delayed Drive Forward There is a transfer case gear tooth blockage present. With your vehicle on, shift the transmission into drive (D) and let the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m). Neutral Tow Disabled The transfer case is not in the neutral position and your vehicle is not safe to tow with all four wheels on the ground. 309 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses FUSE PRECAUTIONS UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX LOCATING THE UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. E329461 ACCESSING THE UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX E329462 310 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX E330939 Item Rating Protected Component 1 30 A Body control module battery power in feed 1. 3 30 A Body control module battery power in feed 2. 4 30 A Fuel pump. 6 25 A Powertrain control module power. 7 30 A Powertrain components. 8 20 A Powertrain components. 9 20 A Ignition coils. 13 40 A Blower motor. 16 10 A Rear windshield washer. 18 30 A Starter motor. 311 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses Item Rating Protected Component 21 10 A Not used (spare). 22 10 A 360 degree camera module. 23 10 A Anti-lock brake system runstart feed. 24 10 A Powertrain control module. Power steering module. 25 10 A Blind spot information system. Rear view camera. Adaptive cruise control. Driveline control module. 26 15 A Transmission control module. 28 60 A Anti-lock brake system valves. 29 60 A Anti-lock brake system pump. 30 30 A Driver power seat. 31 30 A Passenger power seat. 32 20 A Auxiliary power point. 33 20 A Auxiliary power point. 34 20 A Auxiliary power point. 36 40 A 150 watt DC/AC inverter. 38 30 A Heated seat module. 42 30 A Trailer brake control module. 44 10 A Brake on-off switch. 46 20 A SYNC module. 50 40 A Heated rear windshield. 54 40 A Driveline control module. 55 30 A Trailer tow park lamp relay. 312 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses Item Rating Protected Component 58 20 A Trailer tow backup lamps. 60 30 A Upfitter switch #1. 61 15 A Upfitter switch #2. 62 10 A Upfitter switch #3. 63 10 A Upfitter switch #4. 64 10 A Upfitter switch #5. 65 10 A Upfitter switch #6. 66 10 A Stability bar disconnect module. 69 30 A Front windshield wiper. 71 30 A Rear windshield wiper. 91 40 A Trailer tow light module. 100 20 A Left-hand headlamps. 101 20 A Right-hand headlamps. 107 30 A Trailer tow battery charge. 120 10 A Fuel injectors (2.7L). 124 5A Not used (spare). 125 10 A USB smart charger 1. 139 5A USB smart charger 2. 140 5A Not used (spare). 141 5A Not used (spare). 146 20 A Amplifier. 158 10 A Stability bar disconnect module run/start. 160 10 A Smart data link control. 182 60 A Driver door module. 313 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses Item Rating Protected Component 183 60 A Passenger door module. 202 60 A Body control module B+. 210 30 A Body control module start stop. ACCESSING THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FUSE BOX BODY CONTROL MODULE FUSE BOX LOCATING THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FUSE BOX E329071 E329070 314 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FUSE BOX E145984 Item Rating Protected Component 1 — Not used. 2 10 A Power windows. DC/AC inverter. 3 7.5 A Exterior mirrors. Wireless charging module. 4 20 A Not used (spare). 5 — Not used. 6 10 A Anti-theft alarm horn. 7 10 A Not used. 8 5A Not used (spare). 9 5A Not used (spare). 10 — Not used. 11 — Not used. 12 7.5 A Climate control. Gateway module. 315 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses Item Rating Protected Component 13 7.5 A Steering column control module. Instrument cluster module. 14 15 A Not used (spare). 15 15 A Not used (spare). 16 — Not used. 17 7.5 A Not used (spare). 18 7.5 A Not used (spare). 19 5A Ignition switch. Headlamps. 20 5A Telematics modem. 21 5A In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 22 5A Not used. 23 30 A Not used (spare). 24 30 A Not used (spare). 25 20 A Not used (spare). 26 30 A Not used (spare). 27 30 A Not used (spare). 28 30 A Not used (spare). 29 15 A Not used (spare). 30 5A Brake on-off switch. 31 10 A Terrain management switch. Integrated control panel switch. Driveline and chassis controls switch panel. 12 inch center display. Radio frequency receiver module. 32 20 A Audio control module. 316 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Fuses Item Rating Protected Component 33 — Not used. 34 30 A Run/start relay. 35 5A Not used (spare). 36 15 A Automatic high beam. Image processing module A. 37 20 A Auto-dimming interior mirror. Parking assist control module. Heated steering wheel. 38 30 A Circuit Breaker Not used. IDENTIFYING FUSE TYPES FUSES – TROUBLESHOOTING FUSES – FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS When do I need to check a fuse? If electrical components in the vehicle are not working. When do I need to replace a fuse? If a fuse has blown. E267379 A Micro 2. B Micro 3. C Maxi. D Mini. E M Case. F J Case. G J Case Low Profile. H Slotted M Case. How do I identify a blown fuse? You can identify a blown fuse by a broken wire within the fuse. 317 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD Service your vehicle regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. Opening the Hood If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. E331612 1. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). • • • • • Do not work on a hot engine. Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Keep all open flames and other burning material, such as cigarettes, away from the battery and all fuel related parts. Set the parking brake, shift the transmission to park (P) and block the wheels. Pull the hood release handle under the left-hand side of the instrument panel. E331900 2. Release the hood latch by pushing the secondary release lever to your left-hand side. 318 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance 3. Open the hood and support it with the hood strut. Closing the Hood WARNING: Make sure that you fully latch the hood before driving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 1. Fully stow the strut prior to lowering the hood. 2. To close, lower the hood and make sure that it fully latches. E331793 UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ E339861 A Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 322). B Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid (page 93). C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 321). 319 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance D Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 321). E Brake fluid reservoir. See Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir (page 194). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box (page 310). G Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 326). H Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 326). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ E339862 A Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant (page 322). B Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Adding Washer Fluid (page 93). C Engine oil filler cap. See Adding Engine Oil (page 321). D Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 321). E Brake fluid reservoir. See Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir (page 194). F Engine compartment fuse box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box (page 310). 320 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance G Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 326). H Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 326). 6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, immediately add oil. 7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is fully seated. Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km). ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK OVERVIEW ADDING ENGINE OIL WARNING: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. WARNING: Do not add engine oil when the engine is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. E270482 A Minimum. B Nominal. C Maximum. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that the vehicle warranty may not cover. 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it. 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. 3. Add engine oil that meets our specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). 4. Reinstall the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 2. Check the oil level before starting the engine, or switch the engine off after warming up and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. 4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. 5. Remove the dipstick again to check the oil level. Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil. Note: Immediately soak up any oil spillage with an absorbent cloth. 321 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL CHANGE REMINDER ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to reset the oil change reminder. For filling information, please refer to the Capacities and Specifications section of your owner's manual. See Engine Oil Capacity and Specification (page 398). From the main menu scroll to: Message Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Convenience Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Oil Life Reset CHECKING THE COOLANT Action and Description Settings When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 452). Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the minimum and maximum marks on the coolant reservoir. Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. Hold OK to Press and hold the OK Reset button until the instrument cluster displays the following message. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration. Reset Successful When the oil change reminder resets the instrument cluster displays 100%. Remaining Life {00}% Adding Coolant If the instrument cluster displays one of the following messages, repeat the process. WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Not Reset Reset Cancelled 322 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance 1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap. 2. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach the correct level. Note: We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant. WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. 3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn the cap clockwise until it contacts the hard stop. 4. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. If necessary, repeat step 2. WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. WARNING: Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of engine coolant per month, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without engine coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. Service your vehicle as soon as possible. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. It is very important to use prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and could void the vehicle Warranty. Water alone, without engine coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. Do not use the following as a coolant substitute, as they can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing: • Alcohol. • Methanol. • Brine. • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, use the approved concentrated coolant diluting it to 50/50 with deionized or distilled water. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). Using water that has not been deionized may contribute to deposit formation, corrosion and plugging of the small cooling system passageways. Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant. To top up the coolant level do the following: 323 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance Severe Climates A warning lamp illuminates and a message may appear in the information display. If you drive in extremely cold climates, you may need to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. Note: A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and could cause engine damage. When this occurs, your vehicle still operates, however: • Engine power is limited. • The air conditioning system turns off. If you drive in extremely hot climates, you may need to decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation. Note: A coolant concentration of 40% provides improved overheat protection. Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the overheat and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and could cause engine damage. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. Coolant Change Change the coolant at specific mileage intervals. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 455). When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury. Note: Dispose of used coolant in the appropriate manner. Follow your community's regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Fail-Safe Cooling Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before any incremental component damage occurs. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain. How Fail-Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone: 324 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance Engine Coolant Temperature Management (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the coolant temperature reduces. If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the engine may temporarily reach a higher temperature during severe operating conditions, for example ascending a long or steep grade in high ambient temperatures. Your vehicle has limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not maintain high-speed operation and the engine could operate poorly. Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation: At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone and a message may appear in the information display. 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch the engine off. 2. If you are a member of a roadside assistance program, we recommend that you contact your roadside assistance service provider. 3. If this is not possible, wait for a short period of time for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. 5. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. Note: Driving your vehicle without repair increases the chance of engine damage. You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power in order to manage the engine coolant temperature. Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on vehicle loading, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to stop your vehicle. You can continue to drive. The air conditioning may automatically turn on and off during severe operating conditions to protect the engine from overheating. When the coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, the air conditioning turns on. If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red zone, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display, do the following: 325 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift into park (P) or neutral (N). Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle returns to the normal position. If the temperature does not drop after several minutes, follow the remaining steps. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. If the coolant level is normal, restart the engine and continue. E340582 CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER 1. Remove the screws from the air filter housing cover. 2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. 3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER Change the air filter element at the proper intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 452). Your vehicle has a lifetime fuel filter that integrates with the fuel tank. It does not need regular maintenance or replacement. When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element listed. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element could result in severe engine damage that the vehicle Warranty may not cover. WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not allow foreign material to enter the air induction system. The engine is susceptible to damage from even small particles. 326 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry and the battery cables tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If any corrosion is present on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. We recommend that you disconnect the negative battery cable terminal from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period. WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Note: If you only disconnect the negative battery cable terminal, make sure it is isolated or placed away from the battery terminal to avoid unintended connection or arcing. To maintain correct operation of the battery management system, if you add any electrical devices to your vehicle, do not connect the ground connection directly to the negative battery terminal. A connection at the negative battery terminal can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation. WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling. Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to your vehicle this may adversely affect battery performance, durability and the performance of other electrical systems on your vehicle. WARNING: This vehicle may have more than one battery. Removing the battery cables from only one battery does not disconnect your vehicle electrical system. Make sure you disconnect the battery cables from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury or property damage. If you replace the battery make sure it matches the electrical requirements of your vehicle. If you disconnect or replace the battery and your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it must relearn its adaptive strategy. Because of this, the transmission may shift firmly when first driven. This is normal operation while the transmission fully updates its operation to optimum shift feel. The battery is in the engine compartment. See Under Hood Overview (page 320). Your vehicle has a maintenance-free battery. It does not require additional water during service. 327 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance Remove and Reinstall the Battery Note: To calibrate the steering angle sensor, drive the vehicle above 30 mph (50 km/h) for a minimum of 1.2 mi (2 km). Make sure to drive straight ahead for a minimum of 30 seconds. Several vehicle functions are disabled and a warning light could appear until the sensor is calibrated. To disconnect or remove the battery, do the following: 1. Apply the parking brake and switch the ignition off. 2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for example lights and radio. 3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before disconnecting the battery. Note: The engine management system has a power hold function and remains powered for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting the battery without waiting can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Battery Management System The battery management system monitors battery conditions and takes actions to extend battery life. If excessive battery drain is detected, the system temporarily disables some of the following features: • • • • • • 4. Disconnect the negative battery cable terminal. 5. Disconnect the positive battery cable terminal. 6. Remove the battery securing clamp. 7. Remove the battery. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Note: Before reconnecting the battery, make sure the ignition remains switched off. Heated rear window. Heated seats. Climate control. Heated steering wheel. Audio unit. Navigation system. A message may appear in the information display to alert you that battery protection actions are active. After battery replacement, or in some cases after charging the battery with an external charger, the battery management system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to relearn the battery state of charge. During this time your vehicle must remain fully locked with the ignition off. Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals are fully tightened. Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to the vehicle, it may adversely affect battery performance and durability. This may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery, make sure you reinstall the battery cover or shield. If you disconnect or replace the vehicle battery, you must reset the following features: • Window bounce-back. See Window Bounce-Back (page 103). • Clock Settings. • Pre-set radio stations. • Steering Angle Sensor. Battery Disposal Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. E107998 328 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, contact an authorized dealer to check and realign your headlamps. Headlamp Aiming Target E167358 4. On the wall or screen, observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge toward the right. If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line, adjust the beam so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line. E142592 A 8 ft (2.4 m). B Center height of lamp to ground. C 25 ft (7.6 m). D Horizontal reference line. 1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away. 2. Measure the height from the center of your headlamp, indicated by a 3 millimeter circle on the lens, to the ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height, a piece of masking tape works well. 3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall. E339582 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise or clockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp. 6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the other headlamp. 329 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance 7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. EXTERIOR BULBS Horizontal Aim Adjustment EXTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable. Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time. Lamp Specification Power (Watt) LED LED Center high mounted stop lamp. Daytime running lamp. LED LED Front turn signal and parking lamp. LED LED Front fog lamp. LED LED Front side marker lamp. LED LED Headlamp low beam. LED LED Headlamp high beam. LED LED Rear turn signal - high series. LED LED WT21W/7W 21/7 WT21W 21 Rear lamp, stoplamp, rear side marker lamp and rear turn signal - low series. Reversing lamp - low series. Reversing lamp - high series. LED LED Side turn signal lamp. LED LED Taillamp. LED LED Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. 330 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance REMOVING A REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY 1. Make sure the headlamps are off. E334849 5. Remove the lower trim piece by disengaging the retaining tabs. Pull from the inside edge first, then pull from the outside edge. E334894 2. Loosen the quarter-turn fastener on the rearmost fender flare. 3. Fully open the tailgate. See Opening the Tailgate From Outside Your Vehicle (page 84). E334850 6. Remove the lower retaining bolt from the inside trim piece. Pull on the lower part of the trim piece to disengage the upper retaining clips. E334848 4. Remove the three pushpins from inside the trim panel. E339584 331 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Maintenance 7. 1. Remove the rear lamp assembly. See Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly (page 331). 2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the rear lamp assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Pull the rear lamp away from the vehicle and disconnect the electrical connectors as needed. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. INTERIOR BULBS Remove the three retaining bolts securing the rear lamp to the body. Note: Remove and install the retaining bolt near the wheel well before the retaining bolts near the luggage compartment. CHANGING A REAR LAMP BULB INTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not serviceable items. See an authorized dealer if they fail. DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ A B E161383 E339583 A. Stoplamp, rear and turn signal bulb. B. Reversing lamp bulb. 332 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing A. Long drive belt is on the first pulley groove closest to engine. B. Short drive belt is on the second pulley groove farthest from engine. Maintenance DRIVE BELT ROUTING - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ E340713 333 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components REMOVABLE WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED) REMOVABLE WINDOWS PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not drive unless all rear windows are removed or securely installed. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury. Note: Use caution when moving or handling the windows. Do not drop the windows. Note: Do not place the windows directly on hard or sharp surfaces. This could cause damage to the window. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE REAR QUARTER WINDOWS VEHICLES WITH: MODULAR HARD TOP E334214 1. Lift the latch to release the quarter window. Note: The quarter window opens slightly to provide access. The following procedure shows the passenger side rear window, driver side is similar. 334 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components E334216 E347134 2. Rotate the quarter window while pulling down to separate the glass from the frame. 1. To install the glass back on your vehicle: 1. Rotate the quarter window in to the rubber seal. 2. Push the rear glass into the latch mechanism. The latch engages when correctly installed. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE REAR QUARTER WINDOWS VEHICLES WITH: SOFT TOP The following procedure shows the driver side rear window, passenger side similar. 335 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Release the rear edge of the panel by pulling the fabric out of the slot. Removable Vehicle Components 3. Release the front edge of the panel by pulling the fabric out of the slot to remove. E347137 4. Slide the bottom panel forward out of the slot to remove. 5. To install the rear quarter window, perform the steps above in reverse order. E347135 2. Unbuckle the three clips at the top. E347138 6. When installing the rear quarter windows, make sure the window is tucked under the tension cable. E347136 336 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE REAR WINDOW - VEHICLES WITH: SOFT TOP Note: When installing the rear edge of the rear quarter window into the slot, you can unlatch the soft top for easier installation. See Opening and Closing the Soft Top (page 348). E347139 7. After installing the rear quarter windows, press along the top of the window to secure the Velcro strips. Note: The buckles snap together and windows are flush when correctly installed. If the parts have visible gaps or stick out they are not correctly secured. E347143 1. 337 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Pull the bottom corners of the backlight rearward to disengage the clip. Removable Vehicle Components 3. Unbuckle the four clips at the top. E347146 4. Slide the bottom out of the slot left or right to remove. 5. To install the rear window, perform the above steps in reverse order. E347144 2. Remove the top corners from the slots. E347147 6. After installing the rear window, press along the top of the window to secure the Velcro strips. Note: The buckles snap together and windows are flush when correctly installed. If the parts have visible gaps or stick out they are not correctly secured. E347145 338 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components 5. Locate the fender protector in the tool pouch and install it over the fender edge near the top door hinge. REMOVABLE DOORS REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE DOORS Removing the Doors WARNING: Removal of doors for off-road use only. Removing the doors from the vehicle will affect protection provided by the doors and may affect safety system performance, including safety canopy and front seat mounted side airbags, during a crash or rollover. E328722 6. To release the door harness connector, open the connector door. Pull the connector straight out. WARNING: Vehicle needs to be turned off before reconnecting doors to verify all electrical connections have been properly connected. Failure to follow these instructions may affect safety system performance, including safety canopy and front seat mounted side airbags, during a crash or rollover. 1. Fully open the windows on the doors you are removing. 2. Switch your vehicle off. 3. Fold the mirrors toward the front of your vehicle before removing the front doors. 4. Fully open the door you are removing. E328724 7. Make sure to seat the connector door in the closed position. 8. We recommend that you use a door storage bag on the door you are removing. Note: Make sure you fully secure the bag. Make sure the bag contains the edge and corners of the door to prevent accidental door damage before proceeding with the removal of the door. E347602 339 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components E328730 9. Locate the tool pouch and use the hex tool to remove the lower hinge bolt. E346853 11. Locate the lower lift handle. E328731 10. Remove the upper hinge bolt. Note: Store the hinge bolts in the pocket of the tool pouch. E346854 12. Use the door handle as the upper lift handle. 13. With the help of another person, lift the door vertically to separate it from the vehicle. Note: Use caution when removing the doors as they are heavy. Note: Store the doors out of the elements to prevent damage. 14. 340 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing To remove additional doors, repeat Steps 4 – 13. Removable Vehicle Components 15. Return the hex tool to the tool pouch and secure it in vehicle. 16. Return mirrors to the driving position. Note: When you remove the doors, the rear seat occupant alert no longer functions. Installing the Doors 1. Switch your vehicle off. 2. Fold the mirrors towards the front of the vehicle before installing the front doors. 3. Inspect and clean debris from the bodyside and door hinges. 4. If you are using a storage bag, unzip it far enough to allow access to the hinges. E347537 6. Locate the lower bodyside hinge and install alignment pin. E347604 E347540 5. Locate the fender and door protectors in the tool pouch. Install one over the fender edge near the upper door hinge and the other on the door edge near the bottom door hinge. 7. 341 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Locate the upper door hinge portion. Removable Vehicle Components 11. Hand start the hinge bolts to the upper and lower door hinges. 12. Use the hex tool to tighten the bolts. Note: We recommend that you use a torque wrench to make sure you tighten the bolts to the required 22 lb.ft (30 Nm) specification. 13. 14. If using a storage bag, remove it from the door. Open the harness connector door. E347538 8. Locate the upper bodyside hinge. E328723 15. Insert the door harness into the connector. E347242 9. With the help of another person, lower the door onto the body hinges, aligning the upper door portion to the upper body pin and the lower door portion to the alignment pin. Note: Make sure you do not pinch the wiring connector harness between the door and the body of the vehicle. 10. E328726 16. 17. Remove the lower alignment pin. 342 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Open and close the installed door a few times to make sure you aligned it properly and that it operates normally. To install additional doors, repeat Steps 3 – 16. Removable Vehicle Components 18. 19. If there is any damage to the roof panels, see an authorized dealer. Close the doors and switch the ignition on. Check for any warning messages. Return the mirrors to the driving position. Make sure the locating pins on the rear roof panel sit flush in your vehicle when installed. Failure to follow these instructions could cause interior water damage, stains or mildew: • Properly position the hard top assembly to seal the top to your vehicle during installation. Improper installation could cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. • Properly handle and store the removable roof panels. Improper handling and storage could damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. • Do not place anything on top of the rear roof panel when it is removed from the vehicle. This could cause damage to the rear roof panel and its seals. DOORS AND LOCKS AUDIBLE WARNINGS Sounds when a door is not fully closed or removed and your vehicle is moving. REMOVABLE ROOF PANELS (IF EQUIPPED) REMOVABLE ROOF PANEL PRECAUTIONS WARNING: When opening, closing, removing or installing the removable vehicle components, take care not to get your fingers or hands caught in the mechanism. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE FRONT ROOF PANEL Remove the driver side front roof panel before removing the passenger side front roof panel. WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle with only the center or the rear roof panel removed. Failure to follow this instruction could cause unintended separation of the roof panels from your vehicle. 1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield. WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle unless the installed roof panels are properly secured. Failure to follow this instruction could cause unintended separation of the roof panels from your vehicle. Removal of the center and rear roof panels requires two adults. Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the roof panels or attach anything other than the factory-installed roof rack. E333995 343 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE REAR ROOF PANEL - 2-DOOR 2. Turn the three L-shaped latches on the driver side front roof panel, unlocking them from the roof. 3. Unlatch the driver side header panel latch at the top of the windshield. 4. Remove the driver side front roof panel. 5. Repeat the steps to remove the passenger side panel front roof panel. 6. Store the front roof panels in the storage bag. See Storing the Roof Panels (page 359). See Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels (page 352). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Remove the front panels before removing the rear roof panel. 1. Open the rear doors. 2. Open the tailgate window. See Opening and Closing the Windows (page 103). 3. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the driver side rear inside corner of the vehicle. 4. Release the locking tab by pushing it down. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE CENTER ROOF PANEL - 4-DOOR Remove both of the front roof panels before removing the center roof panel. E335339 6 5 5. Push the tab inward when pulling down to disconnect and remove the wiring harness. 6. Push the release button on the hose connector and pull down to remove the washer hose. E333996 1. Turn the three L-shaped latches on the center roof panel, unlocking them from the rear roof panel. 2. Unlatch the driver side and passenger side latches of the center roof panel. 3. Remove the center roof panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 344 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components Note: Store the rear roof panel with the tailgate window open to prevent damage to the glass seal. 7 8 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Torque the fasteners that secure the rear roof panel to your vehicle to 15 ± 2 lb.ft (20 ± 3 Nm). Note: Make sure the locating pins on the rear roof panel sit flush in your vehicle when installed. Note: Do not overtighten the fasteners. You can strip the fasteners if they are overtightened. Removing and Installing the Modular Roof Panel (If Equipped) E335340 7. Secure the wiring harness to the body side by plugging it into the receptacle and pushing up on the locking tab. 8. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into the top of the body side receptacle. Store the modular roof panel in a safe place when you remove it to prevent part damage. E342198 1. Pull and hold the spring-loaded slide. 2. Turn the L-shaped latch. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 on the other latch to unlock the modular roof panel from the roof. 4. Push up on the front of the panel. 5. Slide the panel forward to remove it from your vehicle. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. E333997 9. Remove the four fasteners on each side of your vehicle that secure the rear roof panel to the vehicle using the provided head driver and ratchet. 10. With the tailgate window open, grab the opening with one hand and slightly lift with the other hand. Lift the rear roof panel straight up and off. Place the rear roof panel on a soft surface to prevent damage. 345 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components Note: Make sure the modular roof panel slides back into place and the locating pins sit in the front latch receiver when installing the modular roof panel. 7 8 Note: You do not need to pull and hold the spring-loaded slides to turn the latches to lock the modular roof panel. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE REAR ROOF PANEL - 4-DOOR Remove the front panels and center panel before removing the rear roof panel. 1. Open the rear doors. 2. Open the tailgate window. See Opening and Closing the Windows (page 103). 3. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the driver side rear inside corner of the vehicle. 4. Release the locking tab by pushing it down. E335339 E335340 7. Secure the wiring harness to the body side by plugging it into the receptacle and pushing up on the locking tab. 8. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into the top of the body side receptacle. 6 5 5. Push the tab inward when pulling down to disconnect and remove the wiring harness. 6. Push the release button on the hose connector and pull down to remove the washer hose. E345383 9. Remove the two fasteners that secure the rear roof panel at the C-pillar using the provided head driver and ratchet. 346 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components REMOVABLE HARD TOP (IF EQUIPPED) REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE HARD TOP WARNING: When opening, closing, removing or installing the removable vehicle components, take care not to get your fingers or hands caught in the mechanism. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. E333997 10. Remove the four fasteners on each side of your vehicle that secure the rear roof panel to the vehicle using the provided head driver and ratchet. 11. With the tailgate window open, grab the opening with one hand and slightly lift with the other hand. Lift the rear roof panel straight up and off. Place the rear roof panel on a soft surface to prevent damage. Note: Store the rear roof panel with the tailgate window open to prevent damage to the glass seal. 1. Remove the roof panels. See Removable Roof Panels (page 343). 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Removing the Soft Top Trim Piece (If Equipped) Make sure to remove the soft top trim pieces before installing the hard top. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Torque the fasteners that secure the rear roof panel to your vehicle to 15 ± 2 lb.ft (20 ± 3 Nm). Note: Make sure the locating pins on the rear roof panel sit flush in your vehicle when installed. Note: Do not overtighten the fasteners. You can strip the fasteners if they are overtightened. E334239 Remove the three fasteners to the soft top trim piece on each side of your vehicle using the provided head driver and ratchet. 347 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components REMOVABLE SOFT TOP (IF EQUIPPED) OPENING AND CLOSING THE SOFT TOP WARNING: When opening, closing, removing or installing the removable vehicle components, take care not to get your fingers or hands caught in the mechanism. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. E342767 3. Attach the provided straps if you are off-road driving or driving on rough roads. 4. To close, rotate the soft top forward, making sure it latches in place. Note: Do not drive without the soft top properly latched or fully opened. Partially Opening the Soft Top Note: Do not store your vehicle in cold weather with the soft top open. Fully Opening the Soft Top E337137 1. Unlatch the two latches in the headliner. 1. Remove the rear quarter windows and the rear window. See Removable Windows (page 334). Note: Do not drive unless all rear windows are removed or installed. 2. Follow the steps to partially open the soft top. E337153 2. Push the soft top up and rearward. 348 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 1 2 Vehicle Components Removable 5. To return to the partially open position, press down and lift the handle on the driver side of your vehicle to unlatch the soft top, then rotate the soft top forward. Note: Do not store your vehicle in cold weather with the soft top open. Accessing the Rear Cargo Area 1. Open the tailgate. E348154 3. Press down the handle on the driver side of your vehicle to unlatch the soft top. Lift and rotate the soft top rearward, making sure to keep your hands and fingers free of the mechanism. E343763 2. Unlatch the soft top. E339888 4. Press down on the driver side and passenger side of the soft top to fully secure it. 349 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components E342245 2. Remove the three fasteners on each side in the rear cargo area using the provided head driver and ratchet. 3. Remove the soft top. Note: Safely store the soft top when it is off your vehicle. E343786 3. Lift the rear of the soft top and support it with the soft top strut. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Torque the fasteners that secure soft top to the vehicle to 15 ± 2 lb.ft (20 ± 3 Nm). Note: Make sure the soft top is set flush on the locating pins. REMOVING AND INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP Note: Do not overtighten the fasteners. You can strip the fasteners if they are overtightened. WARNING: When opening, closing, removing or installing the removable vehicle components, take care not to get your fingers or hands caught in the mechanism. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. 1. Installing the Soft Top Trim Piece (If Equipped) Make sure to install the soft top trim pieces before installing the soft top. Fully open the soft top. See Opening and Closing the Soft Top (page 348). 350 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components REMOVING THE FENDER FLARES E334239 Secure the three fasteners to the soft top trim piece on each side of your vehicle using the provided head driver and ratchet. REMOVABLE FENDERS REMOVABLE FENDER PRECAUTIONS E334073 1. Unlock the five quarter turn clips by turning the clips counterclockwise. WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with fenders removed as you will lose the protection they provide in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. E334101 2. Pull outward on the fender flare with your hands to unseat the 5 push pin clips from the sheet metal. 351 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components Note: Push pins and quarter pins should not be removed from fender flare. 2. Lock the five quarter turn clips by turning the clips clockwise. Installing the Fender Flares STORING THE DOORS AND THE ROOF PANELS - 4-DOOR (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not store removed doors or roof panels in vehicle without using the Ford onboard storage kit, and verifying they have been secured per instructions. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: Cargo can shift under severe vehicle use, to reduce the risk of damage, avoid high speed or extreme rock crawl off-road situations when storing the doors in the cargo area. E334101 1. Note: Inspect the bags and harness periodically to make sure they are not damaged. Inspect the door retention harness straps to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. Press the five push clips in until they are seated. Note: Clean the roof panels and doors prior to storing them in the bags as dirt may damage the finish. Storing the Front Roof Panels 1. E342192 352 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Remove the front roof panels. See Removing and Installing the Front Roof Panel (page 343). Removable Vehicle Components E338782 2. Open the bag and pull out the divider. Place the first panel into the bag. Replace the divider before placing the second panel into the bag. 3. Zip the bag closed. 4. Gently slide the roof panel bag into the cargo area. E340967 2. Secure the upper roof bag strap around the rear seat headrests. Adjust the tension on the strap until it is snug. Note: Do not over-tighten the strap. This may cause damage to the headrest. Securing the Front Roof Panels Vertically 1. Raise the bag to the vertical position. 3. Secure the lower bag hooks to the forward cargo rings. Note: Some vehicle accessories may prevent vertical storage of the panels. 353 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components Securing the Door Retention Harness Securing the Front Roof Panels Horizontally E346658 1. Install the loops through the two D-rings and secure the panels. Note: Do not place objects on the roof panel bag to avoid damaging the panels. E339591 1. Install the eyebolts located in the Ford onboard storage kit into the rear cargo area pillars. E339585 2. Use the ratchet tool provided in the kit to assist in tightening the eyebolts. The eyebolts should rest in the groove of the handle. Using the tool as a lever, apply force until fully tightened. 354 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components Note: We recommend tightening the eyebolts to 13 lb.ft (17 Nm). 6. Place the narrow strap loop over all the rear headrests and tighten until snug. Note: Do not over-tighten the strap. This may cause damage to the headrest. Note: The eyebolts can remain installed on the vehicle. Make sure the eyebolts are fully tightened each time they are used. 7. 3. Fully open the tailgate and rear lift glass, or open the soft top cargo access and connect the prop rod to hold open. Place the remaining harness over the seat so it is out of the way. Storing the Front Doors 1. Adjust the seat backrest to the optimal seating position. Pull the lever up, and push the backrest rearward when storing the two front doors. This creates more space between the front door sail and the upper trim. Ensure the cargo area is clear of any other items. See Adjusting the Seat Backrest (page 134). 2. See Securing the Door Retention Harness earlier in this chapter and complete Steps 1-7. 3. Open the passenger side front door and install the door bag See Removing and Installing the Doors (page 339). E339054 4. Install the door retention harness. Note: Refer to harness label for image. E339061 5. Attach upper straps 1 and 2 to the eyebolts. Attach lower straps 3 and 4 to the forward cargo rings. E339067 355 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components 9. Lift the retention harness over the doors. Make sure the straps are straight. 10. Secure the upper straps 5 and 6 to the eyelet bolts and lower straps 7 and 8 to the rear cargo rings. 11. Tighten all adjustable straps to secure the doors. 12. To prevent the doors from moving, fold the unused rear door bags to use as a spacer and place them between the doors and lower cargo hooks as shown. 1 2 3 E350241 E346666 4. Zip the bag fully closed and gently place the door in the cargo area. Avoid contacting the rear pillars, speakers, striker, and trim. For soft tops, take care to avoid contacting the prop rod. 5. Slide the door into position with the bag label facing rearward. Center the door to make sure there is space between the door and cargo box trim panels. 6. Push the lower edge of the door forward until it stops to create space for the door peak. 7. Secure the door bag to the retention harness with the clip. 8. Repeat Steps 3-5 for the driver side front door. Secure the bags using the clips on the bags. E350274 Note: The doors should not move when pressure is applied. 356 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components Storing the Front Roof Panels and the Front Doors 4. Zip the bag fully closed and gently place the door in the cargo area. Avoid contacting the rear pillars, speakers, striker, and trim. 5. Slide the door into position with the bag label facing rearward. Center the door to make sure there is space between the door and cargo box trim panels. 6. Push the lower edge of the door forward until it stops to create space for the door peak. 7. Secure the door bag to the retention harness with the clip. 8. Repeat Steps 3-5 for the driver side front door. Secure the bags using the clips on the bags. 9. Place the front roof panels in the bag, and then into the cargo area. See Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels (page 352). Note: Do not use the roof bag retention system in this orientation. Secure the roof panels by the harness. 1. Adjust the seat backrest to the optimal seating position. Pull the lever up, and push the backrest rearward when storing the two front doors. This creates more space between the front door sail and the upper trim. Ensure the cargo area is clear of any other items. See Adjusting the Seat Backrest (page 134). 2. See Securing the Door Retention Harness earlier in this chapter and complete Steps 1-7. 3. Open the passenger side front door and install the door bag. See Removing and Installing the Doors (page 339). 10. Lift the retention harness over the doors. Make sure the straps are straight. 11. Secure the upper straps 5 and 6 to the eyelet bolts and lower straps 7 and 8 to the rear cargo rings. 12. Tighten all adjustable straps to secure the doors and roof panels. Note: The doors and roof panels should not move when pressure is applied. Storing all Four Doors 1. E346666 357 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Adjust the rear seat backrest to the upright position and raise the center headrest to the highest position. Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that it has fully latched. Ensure the cargo area is clear of any other items. See Adjusting the Seat Backrest (page 134). Removable Vehicle Components 6. Align the door peak with the highest point in the upper trim. Note: Four door storage in the cargo area will prevent the soft tops from fully retracting. Limit to the partially open position. Note: Make sure the rear seat headrests are upright. 2. See Securing the Door Retention Harness earlier in this chapter and complete Steps 1-7. 3. Open the driver-side rear door and install the bag. See Removing and Installing the Doors (page 339). E339016 7. Secure the door bag to the retention harness with the clip. 8. Repeat Steps 3-5 for the remaining doors. Secure the bags with the harness clips. Note: In order to store all four doors onboard, you must store the doors in the following sequence: driver-side rear, driver-side front, passenger-side front, passenger-side rear. 9. Lift the retention harness over the doors. Make sure the straps are straight. 10. Secure the upper straps 5 and 6 to the eyelet bolts and lower straps 7 and 8 to the rear cargo rings. 11. Tighten all adjustable straps to secure the doors. Note: The doors should not move when pressure is applied. Note: When closing the tailgate, make sure the tailgate and glass do not strike the stowed doors. E338915 4. Zip the bag fully closed and gently place the door in the cargo area. Avoid contacting the rear pillars, speakers, striker, and trim. For soft tops, take care to avoid contacting the prop rod. 5. Slide the door into position with the bag label facing rearward. 358 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Removable Vehicle Components 3. Zip the bag closed. 4. Gently slide the roof panel bag into the cargo area in the vertical position. 5. Secure the upper roof bag strap around the rear seat headrests. Adjust the tension on the straps until it is snug. Note: Do not over-tighten the strap. This may cause damage to the headrest. STORING THE ROOF PANELS - 2-DOOR (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not store removed doors or roof panels in vehicle without using the Ford onboard storage kit, and verifying they have been secured per instructions. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: The two-door vehicle is not capable of on board storage of the doors. Store the doors in a secure area to avoid damage. Note: Roof panels should be clean prior to storage in bags as dirt may damage the finish. 1. Remove the front roof panels. See Removing and Installing the Front Roof Panel (page 343). E347721 6. Secure the lower bag hooks to the forward cargo rings. E338782 2. Open the bag and pull out the divider. Place the first panel into the bag. Replace the divider before placing the second panel into the bag. 359 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Care CLEANING PRODUCTS or products of equivalent quality: Materials For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. For best results, use the following products Name Specification Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37F/M (Canada) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada) Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar from your vehicle. These items may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. CLEANING THE EXTERIOR CLEANING THE EXTERIOR PRECAUTIONS Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash. If you have a Sasquatch or soft top package, wash your vehicle by hand, or by using a touchless commercial wash with no mechanical tracks on the floor. 360 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Care CLEANING HEADLAMPS AND REAR LAMPS Note: Do not use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads, as they can scratch these surfaces. We recommend that you only use cold or lukewarm water containing car shampoo to clean the headlamps and the rear lamps. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. CLEANING WHEELS Do not scrape the lamps. Only use a recommended wheel and tire cleaner to clean the wheels weekly. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. Do not wipe lamps when they are dry. CLEANING WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. 1. Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust. 2. Rinse well after cleaning. Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers. Note: When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately. • If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before parking your vehicle. This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. Do not clean the wheels when they are hot. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. This can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Some car washes could damage wheel rims and covers. Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel cleaners or abrasive materials could damage wheel rims and covers. CLEANING CHROME, ALUMINIUM OR STAINLESS STEEL CLEANING THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT We recommend that you only use a car shampoo, a soft cloth and water on bumpers and other chrome, aluminium or stainless steel parts. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove debris from the screen area below windshield. Note: For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. Note: If you are not familiar with the parts around the engine do not wash the engine compartment. Avoid frequent engine washes. Note: Rinse the area well after cleaning. 361 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Care • When washing the engine compartment: • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running. • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well. • Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage. • Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface. Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover remove the cover before application of shampoo and degreaser. • CLEANING CAMERA LENSES AND SENSORS Spray an approved engine shampoo and degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and rinse with water. We recommend that you only use lukewarm or cold water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens and sensors. Note: Do not pressure wash camera lens and sensors. CLEANING THE CONVERTIBLE TOP CLEANING THE UNDERBODY Remove lint with a lint roller or a vacuum with a soft bristle brush. Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle using water. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material. Wash with an approved high quality convertible top cleaner and protectant. Note: Do not use stiff bristle brushes, abrasive materials or household cleaning products. CLEANING THE INTERIOR Note: High pressure water may cause water leaks and possible seal damage to the convertible top. CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL CLEANING STRIPES OR GRAPHICS WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. It is recommended to wash your vehicle by hand however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions: • • Do not use water pressure higher than 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa). Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C). Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern. Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface. We recommend that you only clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a damp soft cloth. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. 362 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Care Note: Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. 4. Rub the conditioner into the leather until it disappears. Allow the conditioner to dry, then repeat the process for the entire interior. If a film appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean cloth. 5. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. CLEANING PLASTIC We recommend that you only use a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. CLEANING FABRIC SEATS AND HEADLINERS CLEANING DISPLAYS AND SCREENS WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a crash. We recommend that you only use a microfiber cloth in a circular motion to clean off the fingerprint or dust. If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth and try to clean it again. We recommend that you only clean the fabric seats and headliners in the following way: Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen. Note: Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen. 1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. 2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. 3. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. CLEANING LEATHER AND VINYL We recommend that you only clean the leather and vinyl surfaces in the following way: 1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. 2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. 3. Make sure the leather is dry, then apply a small amount of conditioner to a clean, dry cloth. For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire area immediately, but do not oversaturate or the ring could set. CLEANING CARPETS AND FLOOR MATS We recommend that you only clean your carpets in the following way: 363 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Care CLEANING SEATBELTS 1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. 2. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. 3. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. 1. For heavy stains, spot clean the area. If a ring forms on the fabric, clean the entire area immediately, but do not over-saturate or the ring could set. Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE We recommend that you only clean your floor mats in the following way: 1. Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. 2. Wash rubber floor mats using mild soap and lukewarm or cold water. 3. Completely dry the floor mat before placing them back in your vehicle. Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color. Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout. Cleaning Rubber Floors 1. Remove the floor mats prior to washing out. See Floor Mats (page 298). Note: Prior to washing out, remove large debris to prevent clogging the drain. Read the instructions before using cleaning products. 2. Turn active drain plugs in each passenger compartment counterclockwise to open. 3. Wash out debris using a standard garden style hose. Note: Use caution to not spray seats, console, door interior, electrical connections, instrument cluster display and underside of the instrument panel on both driver and passenger sides. WAXING YOUR VEHICLE Wax the high-gloss painted surface of your prewashed vehicle once or twice a year. We recommend that you only use an approved quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer's instructions to apply and remove the wax. For additional information and assistance, we recommend that you contact an authorized dealer. 4. Wipe out remaining water or debris from the floor. 5. Install active drain plugs and turn clockwise to close. 6. Reinstall floor mats. When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. 364 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Care Note: Avoid waxing unpainted or low-gloss black colored parts, they discolor over time. 365 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Storing Your Vehicle Body PREPARING YOUR VEHICLE FOR STORAGE • If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, the following maintenance recommendations ensures your vehicle stays in good operating condition. • Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve your vehicle. • • General • • • • • • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and weather damage. Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. • • Hybrid Battery Systems We recommend the following actions for your vehicle: • When storing your vehicle for greater than 30 days the state of charge should be approximately 50%. Additionally we recommend disconnecting the 12V battery which will reduce system loads on the HV battery. Engine • • • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housings and the underside of front fenders. Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations. Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust. Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle. Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil. Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminants which may cause engine damage. Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. 12 Volt Battery • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if you disconnect the battery cables. Brakes Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully. 366 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Storing Your Vehicle • Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so to reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. • Tires • Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels. If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues. Maintain recommended air pressure. Note: If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. REMOVING YOUR VEHICLE FROM STORAGE When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: • We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again. • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces. • Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. • Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. • Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up. 367 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires us to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. LOCATING THE TIRE LABEL You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. See Locating the Safety Compliance Certification Labels (page 272). DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. 368 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information Traction AA A B C test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. INFORMATION ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. Temperature A B C WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 369 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Information on P Type Tires C D B E F G H A I J M L K E142543 P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.) A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association. 370 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. Letter rating Speed rating M 81 mph (130 km/h) N 87 mph (140 km/h) Q 99 mph (159 km/h) R 106 mph (171 km/h) S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) U 124 mph (200 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) W 168 mph (270 km/h) AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades: Y 186 mph (299 km/h) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are 371 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless. *Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. *Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. B C A D E142544 372 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing B Wheel and Tire Information LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below. A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks. B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single, defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. B A C D E E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below: A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. Information on T Type Tires T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. 373 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information *Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. *Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mi (1.6 km). *Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. * B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. *Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOLOGY *Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. *Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code. *Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. *Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. 374 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number *Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. *Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS AGE WARNING: Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently. You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used. Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. 375 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver's door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again. WARNING: For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. WARNING: Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. WARNING: When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire: • • 376 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. Wheel and Tire Information • Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. • Use both eye and ear protection. Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle. If a four tire rotation is being followed, it is recommended that both front tires or both rear tires generally be replaced as a pair if the two remaining worn tires still have usable tread depth. If a five tire rotation is being followed and the fifth tire is used to replace a single unrepairable tire, a four tire rotation should be followed with the undamaged tires. Any replacement for the damaged tire should be used as a dedicated spare until the remaining tires are replaced as a set. If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, your system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged. USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not use snow chains on snow-free roads. WARNING: Only fit snow chains to specified tires. WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted with wheel trims, remove them before fitting snow chains. To avoid potential Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) malfunction or (4WD) system damage, it is recommended to replace all tires used in the tire rotation rather than mixing significantly worn tires with new tires. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels. The use of wheels or tires not recommended may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. WARNING: If you choose to install snow tires on your vehicle, they must be the same size, construction, and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard, and they must be installed on all four wheels. Mixing tires of different size or construction on your vehicle can adversely affect your vehicle's handling and braking, and may lead to loss of vehicle control. Only use snow chains on rear wheels. Install snow chains in pairs. Do not use self-tensioning snow chains. Only use snow chains on the following specified tire sizes: 377 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Wheel and Tire Information • 255/70R16 • Only install chains that are 15 mm or less. • 255/75R17 • Only install chains that are 15 mm or less. • • We recommend you use steel wheels of the same size and specification if snow chains are required because chains may chip aluminum wheels. • Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices: • • • If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. Purchase snow chains from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions. When driving with snow chains do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer, whichever is less. Drive cautiously. If you hear the snow chains rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and tighten them. If this does not work, remove the snow chains to prevent vehicle damage. Remove the snow chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use snow chains on dry roads. If a temporary spare wheel is mounted on your vehicle, do not use snow chains on the axle with the temporary spare wheel. E292547 If you have any questions regarding snow chains, please contact your authorized dealer. Use snow chains that fit against the sidewall of the tire to prevent the chains from touching the wheel rims or suspension, see following illustration above. 378 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Care CHECKING THE TIRE PRESSURES WARNING: Do not use the tire pressure displayed in the information display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Every day before you drive, check your tires. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge. Inflate all tires to the recommended inflation pressure. See Inflating the Tires (page 379). Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. Inflate your tires to the recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. You can find the tire label with the recommended tire inflation pressure next to the tire size on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. The recommended tire inflation pressure is also found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label, affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch on the B-pillar, or on the edge of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. INFLATING THE TIRES WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! 379 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Care INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR DAMAGE INSPECTING THE TIRE FOR WEAR Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire dismounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage, such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall. If damage is observed or suspected, have the tire inspected by a tire professional. E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Safety Practices WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 380 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Care Highway Hazards Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that you could eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This could further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. INSPECTING THE WHEEL VALVE STEMS Check the valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that could permit air leakage. TIRE ROTATION WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring system, then you need to update the settings for the system sensors. Always perform the system reset procedure after tire rotation. If you do not reset the system, it may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary. Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels could be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. 381 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Care Rotating your tires at the recommended interval, as indicated in the scheduled maintenance chapter, will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. For the best tire life, a five tire rotation is recommended that includes the matching spare tire mounted on the back of the vehicle. This rotation requires a forced re-learning of your tire pressure monitor system sensors by your vehicle, and should be performed by an authorized dealer or a service center to ensure the tire pressure monitor system will provide proper warning at all times. When performing the tire rotation yourself, a four tire rotation is recommended, without using the spare tire in the rotation, so that no tire pressure monitor system sensor re-learn is required. If a five tire rotation is performed without a tire pressure monitor system sensor re-learn, the system may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary. Keep in mind that a spare tire that is not used in the tire rotation should only be used temporarily in the event of a flat tire, not as a permanent replacement. The spare tire should always be replaced if it exceeds 6 years of age, regardless of whether it is part of the tire rotation. Rear-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles with four tire rotation, front tires at left of diagram. E142548 Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. 382 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires). WHAT IS THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM The tire pressure monitoring system measures the vehicle's tire pressures. A warning lamp illuminates if one or more tires are significantly underinflated or if there is a system malfunction. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM OVERVIEW WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function. WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. 383 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressures. You should periodically check tire pressures using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. WARNING: Do not use the tire pressure displayed in the information display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Note: The use of tire sealants can damage the tire pressure monitoring system. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LIMITATIONS This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: When the outside temperature drops significantly, the tire pressure could decrease and activate the low tire pressure warning lamp. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The warning lamp could also illuminate when you use a spare wheel, or tire sealant from the inflator kit. Note: Regularly checking the vehicle tire pressures can reduce the possibility for the warning lamp to illuminate due to outside air temperature changes. Note: After you inflate the tires to the recommended pressure it could take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the warning indicator to turn off. 384 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Pressure Monitoring System Using the information display arrow keys navigate to the truck info section where you can view the tire pressures. VIEWING THE TIRE PRESSURES TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM – WARNING LAMPS The low tire pressure warning lamp has combined functions, as it warns you when your tires need air, and when the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. E224333 Warning Lamp Possible Cause Action Required Solid warning lamp One or more tires are significantly under inflated After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the tire label, on the edge of driver door or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Solid warning lamp Temporary spare wheel Repair the damaged road wheel and tire or flashing warning in use and refit it to your vehicle to restore lamp operation of the system. Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are inflated to the recomsystem malfunction mended tire pressures and the temporary spare wheel is not in use, the system detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 385 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tire Pressure Monitoring System TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES Message Action Tire Pressure Low After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the tire label, on the edge of the driver door or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault The system has detected a fault that requires service or a spare tire is in use. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 386 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Changing a Road Wheel CHANGING A FLAT TIRE WARNING: Check that the vehicle jack is not damaged or deformed and the thread is lubricated and clean. Note: You should only use tire sealants in roadside emergencies as they may cause damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensor. WARNING: Do not work on your vehicle when the jack is the only support as your vehicle could slip off the jack. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light illuminates when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. WARNING: To help prevent your vehicle from moving when changing a wheel, shift the transmission into park (P), set the parking brake and use an appropriate block or wheel chock to secure the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. For example, when changing the front left wheel, place an appropriate block or wheel chock on the right rear wheel. If you get a flat tire when driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensors. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage. WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate, contact the authorized dealer. Tire Change Procedure WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. WARNING: Use only the specified jacking points. If you use other positions, you may damage the body, steering, suspension, engine, braking system or the fuel lines. WARNING: Do not get under a vehicle that is only supported by a vehicle jack. WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and your vehicle. WARNING: The jack supplied with this vehicle is only intended for changing wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other than when you are changing a wheel in an emergency. WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and the ground. 387 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Changing a Road Wheel WARNING: Park your vehicle so that you do not obstruct the flow of traffic or place yourself in any danger and set up a warning triangle. WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. E142551 4. Find the jack and tool kit in the rear trunk of the vehicle. Turn the jack retainer counterclockwise to remove the jack and jack extension block. Note: Passengers should not remain in your vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle. E166722 Note: No maintenance or additional lubrication of your jack is required over the service life of your vehicle. E324358 5. Remove the tool bag. 1. Park the vehicle on a level firm ground and activate the hazard flashers. 2. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmission in park (P) for an automatic transmission or reverse (R) for a manual transmission and turn the engine off. 3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite of the flat tire. For example, if the left front is flat, block the right rear wheel. E343390 388 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Changing a Road Wheel 6. Remove the lug wrench from the tool bag. Turn the spare tire fasteners counterclockwise starting with the lowest first, and remove the spare tire from the rear of the vehicle. Note: The wheel lock key must be inserted into the wheel lock nut before the lug wrench can turn the locking nut. 1 2 E328732 8. When you are changing a flat front tire, connect the extension block to the jack loadrest using the wing bolt as shown. Connect the jack handle to the jack, and use the lug nut wrench to operate the jack. E328591 Note: Do not lay the wheel's face down on the ground, as there is a risk of scratching or marring the wheel if laid down on an uneven surface. 7. Loosen each road wheel nut a half a turn counterclockwise, do not remove them until the flat tire is raised off the ground. E330077 9. Do not use the extension block when you are changing a flat tire on the rear of the vehicle. Assemble the jack handle using the extensions as shown to operate the jack when placing under the rear axle. 389 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Changing a Road Wheel E330074 Note: Only use the jack on the specified jacking points and as close to the affected wheel as possible. E330076 10. The front jacking point location is indicated by an arrow-shaped mark on the frame. 12. 13. 14. 15. E343635 11. 16. Use the rear axle tube for the rear jacking point. 17. 390 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Place the jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tire you are changing. Turn the lug wrench handle clockwise until the flat tire is completely off the ground. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Replace the flat tire with the spare wheel, make sure the wheel is on with the valve stem facing outward. Install the wheel nuts snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle is lowered back onto the ground. Turn the wrench handle counterclockwise to lower the jack. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown below. Changing a Road Wheel E166719 18. Stow the flat tire on the rear of the vehicle and fully tighten the securing nuts. E324079 19. Remove the wheel blocks. 20. Stow the jack and tools in the original locations shown in the removal section and tighten the retaining screws by turning clockwise. 391 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Changing a Road Wheel WHEEL NUTS Wheel Nut Torque Specifications WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death. WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function. Bolt size lb.ft (Nm) M12 X 1.5 100 lb.ft (135 Nm) * * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only our recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 392 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Engine Specification Compression ratio. 10.0:1 Displacement. 138 in³ (2,261 cm³) Firing order. 1-3-4-2 Ignition system. Coil on plug Spark plug gap. 0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 393 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Engine Specification Compression ratio. 10.0:1 Displacement. 165 in³ (2,700 cm³) Firing order. 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system. Coil on plug Spark plug gap. 0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 394 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Component Motorcraft Part Number Air filter element. FA-2022 Battery. BAGM-94RH7-800 Cabin air filter. FP-93 FL-910-S 1 Engine oil filter. Spark plug. SP-578 Transmission fluid filter. FT-218 Windshield wiper blade-front. WW-1703 Windshield wiper blade-rear. WW-801 1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.parts.ford.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts. 395 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Component Motorcraft Part Number Air filter element. FA-2022 Battery. BAGM-94RH7-800 Cabin air filter. FP-93 FL-2062-A 1 Engine oil filter. Spark plug. SP-578 Transmission fluid filter. FT-218 Windshield wiper blade-front. WW-1703 Windshield wiper blade-rear. WW-801 1 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. We recommend Motorcraft parts that are available at your authorized dealer or at www.parts.ford.com. We engineer these parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts could impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty could be void for any damage related to use of other parts. 396 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced vehicle performance. • Reduced fuel economy. E142732 An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SP requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. Capacities Variant Including the Oil Filter All. 6.2 qt (5.9 L) Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil(U.S.) Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil / Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada) XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.) CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada) WSS-M2C961-A1 397 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. To improve engine cold start performance, Materials Name Specification Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend WSS-M2C963-A1 E240523 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. If you do not use oil that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced vehicle performance. • Reduced fuel economy. E142732 An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. 398 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SP requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. Capacities Variant Including the Oil Filter All. 7.0 qt (6.6 L) Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil(U.S.) Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil / Huile moteur de très haute qualité SAE 5W-30 Motorcraft®(Canada) XO-5W30-Q1SP(U.S.) CXO-5W30-LSP6(Canada) WSS-M2C961-A1 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. Materials Name Specification Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 - Synthetic Blend 399 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing WSS-M2C963-A1 Capacities and Specifications E240523 If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Use coolant that meets the defined specification. Capacities Variant Quantity With automatic transmission. 10.5 qt (9.9 L) With manual transmission. 9.6 qt (9.1 L) Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ Coolant(U.S.) Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant / Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune Motorcraft®(Canada) VC-13DL-G(U.S.) CVC-13DL-G(Canada) WSS-M97B57-A2 400 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications If you do not use coolant that meets the defined specification, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Use coolant that meets the defined specification. Capacities Variant Quantity All. 12.4 qt (11.7 L) Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ Coolant(U.S.) Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant / Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune Motorcraft®(Canada) VC-13DL-G(U.S.) CVC-13DL-G(Canada) WSS-M97B57-A2 FUEL TANK CAPACITY Capacities Variant Quantity Long wheelbase. 21.1 gal (80 L) Short wheelbase. 17.4 gal (66 L) 401 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications. If you do not use refrigerant and oil that meets the defined specifications, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening Capacities Variant Refrigerant All. 19.4 oz (0.55 kg) Materials Name Specification R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.) R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada) YN-33-A(U.S.) HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada) WSS-M17B21-A Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.) Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada) YN-35(U.S. & Canada) WSS-M2C300-A2 WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION Capacities Variant Quantity All. Fill as required. 402 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant(U.S.) Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motorcraft®(Canada) ZC-32-B2(U.S.) CXC-37-F/M(Canada) WSS-M14P19-A If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. • Reduced fuel economy. MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. Capacities Variant Quantity All. 1 Approximate 2.4 qt (2.3 L) 1 dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes. Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid(U.S.) Motorcraft® Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid / Huile pour boîtes embrayage double Motorcraft®(Canada) XT-11-QDC(U.S. & Canada) WSS-M2C200-D2 CLUTCH FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION The clutch and brake systems share the same fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Specification (page 404). Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. 403 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. • Reduced fuel economy. Note: Only use MERCON ULV transmission fluid for automatic transmissions that require MERCON ULV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid could cause transmission damage. Capacities Variant Quantity All. 1 Approximate 13.1 qt (12.4 L) 1 dry fill capacity. Actual amount could vary during fluid changes. Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.) Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes automatique Motorcraft®(Canada) XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada) WSS-M2C949-A, MERCON® ULV Note: We recommend you use Dot 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 specifications or ISO 4925 Class 6 standards. If you use any fluid other than the recommended fluid, it could cause reduced brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials could result in brake system damage and possible failure. BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced brake performance. Capacities Variant Quantity All. Fill as required. 404 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.) Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada) PM-20(U.S. & Canada) WSS-M6C65-A2 If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. TRANSFER CASE FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. Capacities Variant Quantity 4x4 with part time engagement. 1.3 qt (1.2 L) Advanced 4x4 with 4A mode. 1.6 qt (1.55 L) Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid(U.S.) Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid / Huile pour boîte automatique MERCON® LV Motorcraft®(Canada) XT-10-QLVC(U.S.) CXT-10-LV6(Canada) WSS-M2C938-AMERCON® LV, If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. FRONT AXLE FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. 405 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Capacities Variant Quantity With electronic locking differential. 26.2 fl oz (775 ml) Without electronic locking differential and without front axle disconnect. 29.2 fl oz (865 ml) Without electronic locking differential and with front axle disconnect. 30.4 fl oz (900 ml) Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant(U.S.) Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Axle Lubricant / Lubrifiant pour essieux de très haute qualité SAE 80W-90 Motorcraft®(Canada) XY-80W90-QL(U.S.) CXY-80W90-1L(Canada) WSP-M2C197-A If you do not use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade, it could result in: • Component damage that your vehicle warranty does not cover. • Reduced vehicle performance. REAR AXLE FLUID CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATION Use fluid that meets the defined specification and viscosity grade. Capacities Variant Quantity With electronic locking differential. 63.6 fl oz (1.88 L) Without electronic locking differential. 65.3 fl oz (1.93 L) 406 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant(U.S.) Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant / Huile synthétique de haute qualité pour engrenages hypoïdes SAE 75W-85 Motorcraft®(Canada) XY-75W85-QL(U.S. & Canada) WSS-M2C942-A 407 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Identification VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATING THE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. E142477 E311767 Note: In the illustration, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER OVERVIEW The vehicle identification number contains the following information: 408 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing A World manufacturer identifier. B Brake system, gross vehicle weight rating, restraint devices and their locations. C Make, vehicle line, series, body type. D Engine or motor type. E Check digit. F Model year. G Assembly plant. H Production sequence number. Connected Vehicle ENABLING AND DISABLING THE MODEM WHAT IS A CONNECTED VEHICLE 1. Press Settings. 2. Press Connectivity. 3. Press Connected Vehicle Features. 4. Switch vehicle connectivity on or off. A connected vehicle has technology that allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile network and for you to access a range of features. When used in conjunction with the FordPass app, it could allow you to monitor and control your vehicle further, for example checking the tire pressures, the fuel level and the vehicle location. For additional information, refer to the local Ford website. CONNECTING FORDPASS TO THE MODEM 1. 2. CONNECTED VEHICLE REQUIREMENTS 3. Connected service and related feature functionality requires a compatible vehicle network. 4. 5. Some remote features require additional service activation. Log in to your Ford account for details. Some restrictions, third party terms and message or data rates may apply. 6. 7. CONNECTED VEHICLE LIMITATIONS Make sure that the modem is enabled using the vehicle settings menu. Open the FordPass app on your device and log in. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle if already added. Select the option for vehicle details. Select the option to activate your vehicle. Make sure that the name on the screen matches the name shown in your FordPass account. Confirm that FordPass account is connected to the modem. CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO A WI-FI NETWORK Evolving technology, cellular networks, or regulations could affect functionality and availability, or continued provision of some features. These changes could even stop some features from functioning. Access the application drawer on the touchscreen. 1. Press Settings. 2. Press Connectivity. 3. Press Manage Wi-Fi Networks. 4. Switch Wi-Fi Hotspot on. 5. Press View Available Networks. 6. Select an available Wi-Fi network. Note: Enter the network password to connect to a secure network. CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO A MOBILE NETWORK WHAT IS THE MODEM The modem allows access to a range of features built into your vehicle. 409 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Connected Vehicle CONNECTED VEHICLE – TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi network. Possible Cause and Resolution – – – Password error. • Enter the correct network password. Weak network signal. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal is not obstructed. Multiple access points in range with the same SSID. • Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the default name unless it contains a unique identifier, for example as part of the MAC address. The Wi-Fi connection – disconnects after successful connection. Weak network signal. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal is not obstructed. I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot – but the network signal strength is weak. Obstructed network signal. • If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the Wi-Fi hotspot. • If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or open the windows that are facing the hotspot. • If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows and the windshield, open the windows that are facing the hotspot. • If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the garage door closed, open the garage door. I cannot see a network in the – list of available networks that I expect to see. Hidden network. • Make the network visible and try again. 410 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Connected Vehicle Symptom Possible Cause and Resolution I cannot see the Wi-Fi – hotspot name when I search for Wi-Fi networks on my cell phone or other device. System limitation. • Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on. • The system does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time. Software downloads take too long. Weak network signal. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to a place where the network signal is not obstructed. Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet connection. • Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot. – – The system seems to connect to a Wi-Fi network and the signal strength is excellent but the software does not update. – – No software update available. Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance of terms and conditions. • Test the connection using another device. If the network requires a subscription or acceptance of terms and conditions, contact the network service provider. 411 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot 2. If the portal does not open on your device, open a website and it redirects to the vehicle network carrier’s portal. Note: Secure websites do not redirect. CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI HOTSPOT You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your vehicle and allow devices to connect to it for access to the Internet. 3. Follow the instructions on the carrier portal to purchase a plan. Note: If you have an active plan, the system does not redirect to the vehicle network carrier’s portal when you connect a device. Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website to purchase more data. Select the settings option on the feature bar. E280315 1. Press Vehicle Hotspot. Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting is on. Note: If data usage information is available in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is approximate. 2. Press Settings. 3. Press Edit. 4. Press Hotspot visibility. Note: The hotspot visibility default setting is on. Note: If you carry out a master reset, the system does not remove your vehicle from your vehicle network carrier’s account. To remove your vehicle from the account, contact your vehicle network carrier. Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name and Password Note: The vehicle network carrier provides Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability. Select the settings option on the feature bar. E280315 1. Press Vehicle Hotspot. 2. Press Settings. Note: The network name is the hotspot name. CHANGING THE VEHICLE WIFI HOTSPOT NAME OR PASSWORD Select the settings option on the feature bar. 3. Press View Password. Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi Hotspot E280315 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and select the hotspot from the list of available Wi-Fi networks. 2. When prompted, enter the password. Purchasing a Data Plan 1. Connect a device to the hotspot. Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal opens on your device. 412 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press Vehicle Hotspot. Press Settings. Press Edit. Press Change Network Name. Enter your required network name. Press Done. Press Change Password. Enter your required password. Press Done. Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Changing the Wi-Fi Hotspot Frequency Note: The Vehicle Hotspot frequency band is selectable depending upon your device capabilities. You will be unable to connect your device to the Vehicle Hotspot if it does not support the selected frequency band. Select the settings option on the feature bar. E280315 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Vehicle Hotspot. Press Settings. Press Edit. Select a frequency. Press Done. 413 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System PLAYING OR PAUSING THE AUDIO SOURCE AUDIO SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS Audio Unit WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Press the button to pause playback. Press again to resume playback. Touchscreen Press the button to pause playback. Press again to resume playback. Note: Not all sources can be paused. ADJUSTING THE VOLUME Listening to loud audio for long periods of time could damage your hearing. SWITCHING THE AUDIO UNIT ON AND OFF Press the button on the volume control. SELECTING THE AUDIO SOURCE Audio Unit Press to open the media source menu. E248939 E308143 Turn to adjust the volume. You can press this multiple times to change the audio source or scroll through the media sources. Some vehicles may be able to adjust the volume using buttons on the steering wheel. Touchscreen Press Sources on the touchscreen to open the media source menu. 414 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System 2. Press Sound Settings. SWITCHING SHUFFLE MODE ON AND OFF 3. Press Balance / Fade. 4. Press the arrows to adjust the settings. Press the button on the touchscreen to switch shuffle mode on or off. Tone Settings 1. 2. 3. 4. Note: Not all sources have shuffle mode. SWITCHING REPEAT MODE ON AND OFF Press the button on the touchscreen to switch repeat mode on or off. Speed Compensated Volume 1. 2. 3. 4. Note: Not all sources have repeat mode. SETTING A MEMORY PRESET Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Sound Settings. Press Speed Compensated Volume. Press a setting. Occupancy Mode (If Equipped) 1. Select a station or channel. 2. Press and hold a memory preset button on the touchscreen. Note: The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the preset and returns once it is stored. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Sound Settings. 3. Press Occupancy Mode. 4. Press a setting. Note: You can save presets from multiple sources to the memory preset bar. Sound Mode (If Equipped) 1. 2. 3. 4. MUTING THE AUDIO Press the button on the steering wheel to mute the audio. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Sound Settings. Press Sound Mode. Press a setting. SETTING THE CLOCK AND DATE Press to mute the signal. Press again to restore the signal. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Clock Settings. 3. Set the time. Note: The AM and PM options are not available if 24-hour mode is on. ADJUSTING THE SOUND SETTINGS Balance and Fade (If Equipped) 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Press Sound Settings. Press Tone Settings. Press the arrows or slider bar to adjust the settings. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 415 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System Switching Automatic Time Updates On and Off SELECTING A RADIO STATION Manually Selecting a Radio Station 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Clock Settings. 3. Switch Automatic time zone update on or off. AM/FM RADIO AM/FM RADIO LIMITATIONS The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. E270235 Turn to search through the radio frequency band. When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. Using Direct Tune Press Direct Tune to open the number pad. 2. Enter the station you prefer. Note: You can only enter a valid station for the audio source you are currently listening to. 1. Using Seek Press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. 416 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in both analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations are only available digitally and could contain new or different content. SWITCHING THE DISPLAY ON AND OFF Audio Unit Press the button. Note: When the system first receives an HD1 station, it plays the station in the analog version until it verifies the station is an HD Radio station. Then it shifts to the digital version. E272035 Touchscreen To switch the display off: Note: There is an audio mute delay when switching to an HD2 or HD3 station because the system has to reacquire and decode the digital signal. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Display Settings. 3. Press Display Off. Note: The display defaults to on each time you switch your vehicle on. DIGITAL RADIO LIMITATIONS If you are outside the reception area, the system could not work. To switch the display on, press anywhere on the touchscreen. If you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station could mute due to weak signal strength. DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) Note: If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. If you are listening to any other multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. WHAT IS DIGITAL RADIO HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. For additional information, visit www.HDRadio.com. Depending on the station quality, you could hear a slight sound change when the station changes between analog and digital audio. HD Radio Technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS. The vehicle manufacturer and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. You cannot access a saved HD station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. SWITCHING DIGITAL RADIO RECEPTION ON AND OFF HOW DOES DIGITAL RADIO WORK 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 2. Press Radio Settings. 3. Switch AM HD Radio or FM HD Radio on or off. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts in addition to analog broadcasts. 417 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System DIGITAL RADIO INDICATORS For additional information about extended subscription terms, visit www.SiriusXM.com in the United States, www.SiriusXM.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. HD Radio Indicator The indicator appears when HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology. Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford Motor Company and its affiliates will be liable to you or any third party for any such modification, suspension or termination. E142616 SATELLITE RADIO LIMITATIONS The color of the indicator changes to indicate the system status. For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Placing luggage over the antenna may reduce performance. Gray indicates the system is acquiring a digital station. Orange indicates digital audio is playing. Multicast Indicator Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. The multicast indicator appears if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers indicate additional digital channels available. When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and could result in the audio system muting. Your display could show an error message to indicate the interference. Note: For stations that have more than one HD multicast, the HD indicator and radio text appears as a button. Press the button to cycle through all of the HD stations on that specific frequency. SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) LOCATING THE SATELLITE RADIO IDENTIFICATION NUMBER WHAT IS SATELLITE RADIO 1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source. 2. Tune to channel 0. Your factory-installed SiriusXM radio system includes a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. 418 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System SELECTING A CHANNEL Note: A default profile is available when no listener profiles are created. Manually Selecting a Channel E328569 SiriusXM Favorites Press the button to find the previous or next available radio channel. SiriusXM Favorites are shown for the active listener profile. While you are listening to SiriusXM, you can save favorites by: • E328570 Linear Tuner The linear tuner is displayed when manually selecting a channel. You can swipe left or right on the linear tuner carousel to navigate through the channel list. Tap on a channel title to listen to it. • Using Direct Tune • 1. Press the channel up or down button to open the linear tuner screen. 2. Press Direct Tune to open the number pad. 3. Enter the channel you prefer. Tapping the currently tuned channel or show logo on the SiriusXM audio screen. A favorite icon appears next to the logo when it is saved as a favorite. Tuning to a channel or show you want to save as a favorite. Navigate to the SiriusXM Favorites screen and press the Add Current button. The currently tuned channel or show is saved as a favorite. Saving a radio preset. This saves the currently tuned SiriusXM channel or show as a favorite. Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use. Listening History Using Browse Listening history is a list of recently listened to SiriusXM content and is shown for the active listener profile. You can view, manage and reset the listening history using the controls on the touchscreen. 1. Press Browse. 2. Select a channel. SATELLITE RADIO SETTINGS Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use. Subscription Your subscription status is displayed. You can subscribe or manage your subscription directly from the touchscreen. Listener Settings Listener Add/Switch Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use. Listener settings apply to the active listener profile. You can create up to five listener profiles per SiriusXM account. Each listener profile can be personalized with a name and profile image. Note: A default profile is available when no listener profiles are created. Note: Requires a trial or active subscription to use. 419 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System Help and Support directly from SYNC and view information required to manage your SiriusXM account. You can contact SiriusXM Customer Care 420 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System AUDIO SYSTEM – TROUBLESHOOTING AUDIO SYSTEM – INFORMATION MESSAGES Satellite Radio Troubleshooting Error Message Connectivity Disabled No Internet No Satellite Signal Potential Effects Recommended Action Internet streaming and On Internet connectivity is Demand shows are unavail- turned off. See Connected able and some SiriusXM Vehicle (page 409). features are disabled. Audio system may mute. "Switch to Satellite" button may be displayed on the SiriusXM audio screen if the channel is also available via satellite. SYNC will attempt to connect. See Satellite Radio Limitations (page 418). Switch to a satellite connection for the current channel if the option is available. Audio system may mute. Antenna may be obstructed “Switch to Internet” button or satellite reception is weak may be displayed on the in your location. See SatelSiriusXM audio screen if the lite Radio Limitations channel is also available via (page 418). Switch to an streaming. internet connection for the current channel if the option is available. Slow Network Connection Audio system may mute while audio attempts to load. Allow some time for audio to load or tune to a different channel. Channel Unavailable Audio system may mute. Radio may tune to a different channel. A temporary update may be in progress. Allow some time before retrying to tune to the channel. If issue persists, the channel may no longer be available. Episode Unavailable Audio system may mute. Radio may tune to a different channel. A temporary update may be in progress. Allow some time before retrying to play the episode. If issue persists, the episode may no longer be available. 421 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System Something went wrong Subscribe to Listen Audio system may mute. Radio may tune to a different channel. Retry action after some time or tune to a different channel. Cannot listen to selected Your subscription has content. Content may expired or you have not yet appear grayed out and some subscribed for access to the features may be disabled. listed content. Navigate to Subscription under the Satellite Radio Settings menu. If you have an active subscription which includes the listed channel or content and you see this error, you may need to refresh your radio. To refresh your SiriusXM radio, visit www.siriusxm.com/refresh in the US, or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh in Canada. You may need to provide your SiriusXM Radio identification number. See Locating the Satellite Radio Identification Number (page 418). 422 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System Upgrade to Listen Cannot listen to selected Your subscription does not content. Content may include access to the listed appear grayed out and some content. You may need to features may be disabled. upgrade your subscription. Navigate to Subscription under the Satellite Radio Settings menu. If you have an active subscription which includes the listed channel or content and you see this error, you may need to refresh your radio. To refresh your SiriusXM radio, visit www.siriusxm.com/refresh in the US, or www.siriusxm.ca/refresh in Canada. You may need to provide your SiriusXM Radio identification number. See Locating the Satellite Radio Identification Number (page 418). Location Restricted Content Audio may mute. “Not avail- Content is not available in able in your location” or your location or SiriusXM is “Unable to determine your unable to determine your location” may be displayed. location. Tuning to a different channel may resolve the issue. Channel Blocked Audio may mute. Radio may tune to a different channel. The Block Explicit Content filter is turned on. Navigate to Listener Settings under the Satellite Radio Settings menu to access the Block Explicit Content filter. Navigate to Listener Settings. See Satellite Radio Settings (page 419). Antenna Problem or Hardware Problem Audio may mute. Access to SiriusXM features may be unavailable. If issue persists, you may need to visit an authorized dealer for service. 423 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Audio System SiriusXM Updating... Loading... SiriusXM Loading... Audio may mute. Allow SiriusXM some time to complete updating. No action necessary. If Audio may mute. Content may be temporarily unavail- loading time is longer than able while loading. usual, See Satellite Radio Limitations (page 418). Audio may mute. Content and controls may be temporarily unavailable. IDENTIFYING THE AUDIO UNIT E308144 Depending on your vehicle options, the controls may look different from what you see here. 424 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing No action necessary. Allow SiriusXM some time to finish loading. Center Display Overview CENTER DISPLAY PRECAUTIONS CENTER DISPLAY LIMITATIONS Speed-restricted Features WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. For your safety, some features are not available while the vehicle is in motion at or above 6 mph (10 km/h). Settings that are not critical while driving your vehicle will be shown as restricted on your display. See the following chart for specific examples. Restricted Features System Functionality System updates. Personal profiles setup. Valet mode setup. Driver assistance settings. Auto start-stop speed threshold. Vehicle Settings 30 minute max idle. MyKey setup. Keyless entry keypad code setup. Call in progress. Restricted features will become available again once the vehicle is no longer in motion. Cell phone microphone muted. STATUS BAR Audio system muted. The bar is on top of the display and indicates the status of your vehicle's features. 425 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Center Display Overview System update installed. E327785 .i Vehicle system update activating. Additional consent needed. Wi-Fi available. E347103 E327786 Wi-Fi connected. E327787 Cell phone roaming. E327788 Vehicle system activation reminder. Vehicle system update not successful. Vehicle system update reminder. Text message received. E327789 E335295 Email received. FEATURE BAR Bluetooth® device connected. The bar is on the bottom of the display and allows you to access vehicle features. Automatic crash notification system off. E100027 Cell phone battery status. Select to use the radio, a USB, a media player or a Bluetooth® device. Select to make calls and access the phonebook on your cell phone. E335293 Wireless charger is active. Select to use the navigation system. Cell phone network signal strength. E353215 Select to view favorites. Vehicle data sharing on. E353220 Vehicle data sharing off. Select to search for and use compatible apps on your iOS or Android device. Select to adjust system settings. E335292 Vehicle location sharing on. E280315 E353210 Vehicle data and vehicle location sharing on. Select to view features. E335299 426 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Center Display Overview E335300 E347104 Note: The icon may be different depending on your vehicle. INFORMATION ON DEMAND SCREEN - VEHICLES WITH: 12.3 INCH SCREEN The Information on Demand screen displays cards on the side of the display and allows you to see information from different features. E353212 Select the button to view the next card. E353211 Select the button to view the previous card. E353209 Select the button to view available cards. 427 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Voice Interaction WHAT IS VOICE INTERACTION General Examples Voice Interaction allows you to control vehicle features using conversational requests. Command Result Start Over. The system resets the current voice interaction. Cancel. The system ends the current voice interaction. Next Page. The system goes to the next page. Previous Page. The system goes to the previous page. Help. The system displays a list of available commands you can use on the current screen. SETTING THE WAKE WORD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the Settings option on the feature bar. Press the Voice Control button. Switch on Listen for Wake Word. Press Preferred Wake Word Select a wake word. BEGINNING A VOICE INTERACTION Say the selected wake word. Press the voice interaction button on the steering wheel. Entertainment Examples E142599 VOICE INTERACTION EXAMPLES Command Result Play The Beatles. The system plays the selected music. Show music by The The system shows Beatles. the selected music. Note: You may need to enable your vehicle's modem to use certain voice commands. See Enabling and Disabling the Modem (page 409). 428 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Tune to FM 101.9. The system tunes the radio to 101.9 FM. Set the station to Sirius Channel 2. The system tunes the radio to Sirius Channel 2. Voice Interaction Climate Examples Apps Examples Command Result Command Result Set the temperature to low. The system sets the temperature to the minimum. Mobile Apps. Set the temperature to 72°F (22°C). The system sets the temperature to 72°F (22°C). The system prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on the system. List Mobile Apps. The system will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps. Find Mobile Apps The system will search and connect to compatible app running on your mobile device. Phone Examples Command Result Call Henry. The system calls Henry using your connected device. Dial (phone number). The system dials the selected phone number. Send a text message to Henry. The system begins a dictated text message. Navigation Examples Read my message The system reads you the most recent from Henry. message from Henry. Command Result Drive to 125 Main Street, New York. The system begins guided navigation to the address. Where is ___ The system searches for the requested point of interest. Show me directions The system shows directions to the to Oakwood Boulevard and selected intersection. Pelham Road. Cancel route. The system ends guided navigation to the destination. Ford Assistant Examples Note: When you are not driving, additional commands are available by using popular chat applications. Use FordPass to setup a conversation with your Ford assistant. 429 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Voice Interaction Remote Vehicle Control Examples Command Charging Examples Result How much gas is in The vehicle tells my tank? you how much gas it has left. Command Result When is my next scheduled charge? Information about the time and location of the next charge appears on the center display or FordPass app. Maintenance and Roadside Assistance Examples Command Result Call roadside assistance. Your vehicle calls the roadside assistance phone number. Show me the char- Shows the charging ging schedule. display in the vehicle. Change my charge Shows the charging schedule. display in the vehicle. Vehicle Information Examples Command Result How does cruise control work? Information about the feature appears on the center display or FordPass app. What does the warning light mean? Information about the warning light appears on the center display or FordPass app. Am I affected by any recalls? Information about open recalls appears on the center display or FordPass app. When does my warranty expire? Your vehicle or FordPass app tells you the expiration date. 430 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Phone PHONE MENU PHONE PRECAUTIONS This menu becomes available after pairing a phone. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Recent Call List Display and select an entry from a list of previous calls. Contacts Display a smart search form to look up your contacts. Use the List button to alphabetically sort your contacts. Favorites Display the list of favorite contacts that are set up on your phone. CONNECTING YOUR PHONE Messaging Go to the settings menu on your device and switch Bluetooth® on. Displays the list of text messages to read, listen to, or respond to. Select the phone option on the feature bar. Email Displays the list of emails to read, listen to, or respond to. 1. Select Add Phone. Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your vehicle on your cell phone. Phone List Display the list of paired or connected devices that you can select. 2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone. Note: A number appears on your cell phone and on the touchscreen. Note: Up to 12 devices can be stored. Do Not Disturb 3. Confirm that the PIN (personal identification number) on your cell phone matches the number on the touchscreen. Note: The touchscreen indicates that you have successfully paired your cell phone. Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones and alerts off. Phone Keypad Directly dial a number. 4. Download the phonebook from your cell phone when you are prompted. Note: If you pair more than one cell phone, use the phone settings to specify the primary phone. You can change this setting at any time. 431 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Phone Voice Control Say a command to use the Google or Siri voice assistant available on your connected phone to access supported features. Note: Some features under the phone menu may not be available if the feature is not supported through the phone. 432 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Phone Pressing the backspace button deletes the last digit you typed. MAKING AND RECEIVING A PHONE CALL Receiving Calls Making Calls During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Caller information appears in the display if it is available. To call a number in your contacts, select: Menu Item Contacts Action and Description To accept the call, select: You can then select the name of the contact you want to call. Any numbers stored for that contact display along with any stored contact photos. You can then select the number that you want to call. The system begins the call. Menu Item Accept Note: You can also accept the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To reject the call, select: Menu Item Reject To call a number from your recent calls, select: Menu Item Action and Description Recent Call List You can then select an entry that you want to call. The system begins the call. Ignore the call by doing nothing. The system logs it as a missed call. During a Phone Call During a phone call, the contacts name and number display on the screen along with the call duration. To call a number from your favorites, select: Menu Item Favorites The phone status items are also visible: • • Action and Description You can then select an entry that you want to call. The system begins the call. You can select any of the following during an active phone call: To call a number that is not stored in your phone, select: Menu Item Action and Description Phone Keypad Select the digits of the number you wish to call. Call The system begins the call. Signal Strength. Battery. 433 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Phone Item Item End Call Keypad Immediately end a phone call. You can also press the button on the steering wheel. Mute You can switch the microphone off so the caller does not hear you. Privacy Transfer the call to the cell phone or back to the touchscreen. Press this to access the phone keypad. SENDING AND RECEIVING A TEXT MESSAGE Menu Item Description Hear It Hear the text message. View View the text message. Call Call the sender. Reply Reply to the text message with a standard text message. 434 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Phone SWITCHING TEXT MESSAGE NOTIFICATION ON AND OFF iOS 1. Go to the settings menu on your cell phone. 2. Select Bluetooth®. 3. Select the information icon to the right of your vehicle. 4. Switch text message notification on or off. Android 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Go to the settings menu on your cell phone. Select Bluetooth®. Select the profiles option. Select the phone profile. Switch text message notification on or off. 435 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Bluetooth® CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH® DEVICE hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 1. Make sure Bluetooth® is enabled on your device. 2. Press Settings on the touchscreen. 3. Press Connectivity. 4. Press Bluetooth. 5. Press Add a Bluetooth Device. Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your vehicle on your device. Connect your device. Press the audio button on the feature bar. E100027 Press Sources. 6. Select your vehicle on your device. Note: A number appears on your device and on the touchscreen. Press the Bluetooth® option. 7. Confirm that the number on your device matches the number on the touchscreen. Note: The touchscreen indicates that you have successfully paired your device. Press to play a track. Press again to pause the track. Press to skip to the next track. Press and hold to fast forward through the track. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ford Motor Company is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. Press once to return to the beginning of a track. Repeatedly press to return to previous tracks. Press and hold to fast rewind through the track. PLAYING MEDIA USING BLUETOOTH® WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any 436 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Apps ENABLING APPS ON AN IOS DEVICE APP PRECAUTIONS Select the apps option on the feature bar. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 1. Select Mobile Apps Help. 2. Follow the instructions to pair and connect your device via Bluetooth® or with a USB cable. 3. Start the apps on your device that you want to use. 4. Select the app that you want to use on the touchscreen. Note: Some apps may run through Apple CarPlay if it is enabled. Note: Closing an app on your device will close it on the touchscreen. APP REQUIREMENTS Note: For troubleshooting assistance select Compatible Apps List or My App Isn't Listed under Mobile Apps Help. When you start an app through the system for the first time, you could be asked to grant certain permissions. You can review and change the permissions that you have granted at any time when your vehicle is not moving. We recommend that you check your data plan before using your apps through the system. Using them could result in additional charges. We also recommend that you check the app provider's terms and conditions and privacy policy before using their app. Make sure that you have an active account for apps that you want to use through the system. Some apps will work with no setup. Others require you to configure some personal settings before you can use them. ENABLING APPS ON AN ANDROID DEVICE Select the apps option on the feature bar. 1. Select Mobile Apps Help. 2. Follow the instructions to pair and connect your device via Bluetooth® or with a USB cable. 3. Start the apps on your device that you want to use. 4. Select Find Mobile Apps. 5. Select the app that you want to use on the touchscreen. Note: To enable apps when pairing with a USB cable, switch on Android App via USB. ACCESSING APPS Select the apps option on the feature bar. 437 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Apps 1. Press Phone List. 2. Select your device from the list. 3. Press Connect to Apple CarPlay. Note: Some devices may lose the ability to play music over USB when Mobile Apps are enabled. Note: Some apps may run through Android Auto if it is enabled. SWITCHING ANDROID AUTO ON AND OFF Note: Closing an app on your device will close it on the touchscreen. Note: For troubleshooting assistance select Compatible Apps List or My App Isn't Listed under Mobile Apps Help. Enabling Android Auto with USB (If Equipped) 1. Connect your device to a USB port. 2. Follow the instructions on the touchscreen. Note: Certain features of the system are not available when you are using Android Auto. SWITCHING APPLE CARPLAY ON AND OFF Enabling Apple CarPlay with USB 1. Connect your device to a USB port. 2. Follow the instructions on your device and the touchscreen. Note: Selecting "Enable Wireless CarPlay" on your device will prepare the device for wireless carplay when you re-enter the vehicle. Enabling Android Auto with Wireless 1. Pair your device to Bluetooth®. 2. Follow the instructions on your device and the touchscreen. Note: Certain Android Devices do not support Android Auto Wireless. Please check your Android OS version for compatibility. Enabling Apple CarPlay with Wireless 1. Pair your device to Bluetooth®. 2. Follow the instructions on your device and the touchscreen. Disabling Android Auto Select the settings option on the feature bar. Disabling Apple CarPlay E280315 Select the settings option on the feature bar. 1. Press Phone List. 2. Select your device from the list. 3. Press Disable. E280315 1. Press Phone List. 2. Select your device from the list. 3. Press Disable. Re-Enabling Android Auto Select the settings option on the feature bar. Re-Enabling Apple CarPlay E280315 Select the settings option on the feature bar. 1. Press Phone List. 2. Select your device from the list. E280315 438 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Apps 3. Press Connect to Android Auto. 439 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Navigation ACCESSING NAVIGATION ADJUSTING THE MAP ZOOMING THE MAP IN AND OUT WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. You can use pinch gestures to zoom in and out. Place two fingers on the screen and move them apart to zoom in. Place two fingers on the screen and bring them together to zoom out. CHANGING THE FORMAT OF THE MAP Press the Menu button. E328845 1. Press the Map Orientation tile. 2. Select a map orientation. Press the button to access Navigation. LIVE TRAFFIC Note: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Placing luggage over the antenna may reduce performance. WHAT IS LIVE TRAFFIC You can observe real-time road congestion when live traffic is on. SWITCHING LIVE TRAFFIC ON AND OFF NAVIGATION MAP UPDATES To update your Map data over Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi access point. For USB updates and other details, contact dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United States and Canada, or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. Press the Menu button. E328845 1. Press the Traffic on Map tile. 2. Press Traffic on or Traffic Off. Note: If you find map data errors, you may report them by going to www.here.com/mapcreator. SETTING A DESTINATION SETTING A DESTINATION USING THE TEXT ENTRY SCREEN 1. 440 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Press the search bar at the top of the screen. Navigation SETTING A DESTINATION USING A POINT OF INTEREST 2. Enter your destination using the keyboard. 3. Press Search. 4. Select a destination from the list. 5. Press Start to begin navigation. Press and hold on a point of interest icon on the map. Information about the location of the point of interest appears on the screen. SETTING A DESTINATION USING THE MAP SCREEN E328844 Press and hold on the map to place a pin at that location. Information about the location of the pin appears on the screen. E328844 Press the button to begin navigation to the point of interest. WAYPOINTS Press the button to begin navigation to the pin. ADDING A WAYPOINT SETTING A DESTINATION USING A PREDICTIVE DESTINATION E328843 Press the Add Waypoint button when in an active navigation session. Press the predicted destination card on the screen to navigate to it. These appear when the navigation system has learned your driving habits. 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter your waypoint on the keyboard. Press Search. Select a waypoint from the list. Press Add to Trip. SETTING A DESTINATION USING A RECENT DESTINATION EDITING WAYPOINTS 1. Press the waypoint you would like to edit. 2. Select an option to reorder or delete the waypoint. Press the Menu button. E328845 1. Press the Recents tile. 2. Select a destination from the list. ROUTE GUIDANCE SETTING A DESTINATION USING A SAVED DESTINATION ADJUSTING THE GUIDANCE PROMPT VOLUME Press the Menu button. Turn the volume control when a guidance prompt plays to adjust the volume. E328845 1. Press Saved Places. 2. Select a saved destination. Note: Press the star icon next when viewing location details to save the location. REPEATING AN INSTRUCTION Press the turn indicator to hear the last voice instruction. 441 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Navigation ROUTE GUIDANCE SETTINGS Avoid 4x4 Roads Before Starting a Navigation Session Before starting a navigation session you can enable and disable 4x4 roads using the controls on the point of interest detail page. When enabled the system will include 4x4 roads when determining the best route. When disabled the system will avoid 4x4 roads. During a Navigation Session If you do not wish to have your route take you on 4x4 roads you can remove the turn onto the 4x4 road using the turn list. 1. Tap the chevron below the turn panel. 2. Swipe to the left on the 4x4 road on the turn list that appears. 3. Press the delete button to remove that road from your route. The system will then re-route you to your destination. CANCELING ROUTE GUIDANCE E280804 Press the button to cancel route guidance to the selected location. 442 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle System Updates Using the Settings Menu UPDATING THE VEHICLE SYSTEMS WIRELESSLY Press the settings option on the feature bar. E280315 Over-the-Air Updates allow you to update your vehicle system software wirelessly. To make sure you receive all updates, set a recurring schedule and connect to Wi-Fi. See Connected Vehicle (page 409). Updates may take longer if not connected to Wi-Fi, or may not download at all. Multiple connections may be required to complete a download. 1. Press the System Update tile. 2. Press Schedule Update. 3. Use the controls to set the time and day of the update. 4. Save the schedule. Note: You can set the updates to occur at any time. E327789 Using the Status Bar Icon Enabling Over-the-Air Updates When an update is available, tap the notification icon and follow E327785 the prompts on the screen. Additional Over-the-Air Update icons may appear on the status bar. See Status Bar (page 425). Press the settings option on the feature bar. E280315 1. Press the System Update tile. 2. Switch Automatic Updates on. Note: Over-the Air Updates are enabled by default. Applying an Over-the-Air Update You can see the progress of the update on the touchscreen. An update cannot be canceled once it has been started. Note: If you do not want to receive Over-the-Air Updates you can turn them off. You will not be notified of new updates. During scheduled updates you will not be able to drive your vehicle, start the vehicle, use remote controls to lock and unlock the vehicle. The alarm, central locks, and door tones are disabled. The electronic door lock will not function during an update. You can open the doors using the mechanical latch if child locks are not on. Pull the handle until it stops to use the mechanical latch. Some updates may not allow you to use your vehicle during the update process. Scheduling an Update Scheduling an update allows you to set a convenient time for the update to complete. We recommend updating overnight when your vehicle is not in use. Ensure Vehicle Connectivity and Automatic Over-the-Air Updates are enabled. Once you complete these steps, your schedule will be saved for future updates. As long as an update is not in process you can adjust your schedule. Note: Some updates can complete in the background, but more complex updates can take up to 45 minutes. Note: Some updates may be applied outside of your set schedule. Information about the unscheduled update appears on the touchscreen after it is applied. Note: Double locking is switched off and central locking is switched on during and after an update. 443 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Vehicle System Updates Note: If your vehicle is plugged in, charging will stop during an update and resume when the update is complete. Over-the-Air Update Requirements If these requirements are not met during a scheduled update the update will be postponed. You can update your schedule if you want to retry the update sooner. • • • • • • • • • • Your vehicle is not running. Your vehicle is stopped. Your vehicle is parked. The hazard indicators are switched off. The alarm is not sounding. The doors are closed. The parking lights are switched off. You are not pressing the brake pedal. An emergency call is not in progress. The Stop Safely lamp is not illuminated. See Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps (page 108). Viewing Update Information If an update is successful, the touchscreen will provide additional details or statuses about the update. You can also access this information under the System Update tile. If an update is not successful, follow the prompt that appears on the touchscreen. PERFORMING A MASTER RESET Press the settings option on the feature bar. E280315 1. Press the Reset tile. 2. Press Master Reset. 3. Follow the prompts on the screen to complete the reset. 444 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Accessories For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site: Most Ford Performance Parts are sold with no warranty, unless otherwise indicated. Check the Ford Performance Part website: www.performanceparts.ford.com or contact the Ford Performance Parts tech-line at (800) FORD788 for the latest limited warranty information on specific products. Web Address (United States) www.Accessories.Ford.com For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer. Web Address (Canada) www.Accessories.Ford.ca We will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. We will warrant your Ford Original Accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit: • 24 months, unlimited mileage. • The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are the accessory manufacturer's designs. The manufacturer develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer’s limited warranty details, and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer. 445 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Accessories • • An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems. Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile communication system specifically for automotive use. If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. 446 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Auxiliary Switches (If Equipped) using the switches for an extended time or when using higher current draw accessories. When a switch is turned on, the indicator light on the switch illuminates and the circuit provides power to the device wired to that switch. WHAT ARE THE AUXILIARY SWITCHES The auxiliary switchboard on the overhead console makes aftermarket customization easier with six prewired switches connected to the power distribution box. Each circuit is individually fused for connection of electrical accessories. LOCATING THE AUXILIARY SWITCHES The switches are labeled AUX 1 through AUX 6. They only operate when the ignition is in the on position or in the off position when Delay Accessory is active, whether the engine is running or not. We recommend that you leave the engine running to maintain battery charge when E220728 LOCATING THE AUXILIARY SWITCH WIRING There are six powered circuits and five non-powered circuits. 447 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Auxiliary Switches (If Equipped) E343821 A Circuits from under hood fuse box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box (page 310). B Circuits to interior right-hand cowl side. C Circuit to front grille. D Circuit to right-hand visor. E Circuit to right-hand rear quarter panel. Additional information on fuse and relay locations is available. See Fuses (page 310). See your authorized dealer for service. Circuits from the under hood fuse box (A) are powered. All other circuits (B-E) are not connected at either end. 448 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Auxiliary Switches (If Equipped) IDENTIFYING THE AUXILIARY SWITCH WIRING The relays are coded as follows: Power Distribution Box Wire Color Wire Size Fuse AUX 1 Yellow 1.5 mm² 30A AUX 2 Green/Brown 1.5 mm² 15A AUX 3 Violet/Green 0.75 mm² 10A AUX 4 Brown 0.75 mm² 10A AUX 5 Blue/Orange 0.75 mm² 10A AUX 6 Yellow/Orange 0.75 mm² 10A Non-powered circuits: Note: The non-powered circuits correspond with the auxiliary switch wiring graphic. See Locating the Auxiliary Switch Wiring (page 447). Non-powered Circuit Location Wire Color Wire Size B1 Passenger Compartment Brown/White 1.5 mm² B2 Passenger Compartment White 1.5 mm² C Front Grille Violet/Grey 1.5 mm² D Right-hand Visor Grey/Orange 1.5 mm² E Right-hand Rear Quarter Panel White/Orange 1.5 mm² 449 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Ford Protect That means you get: • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership. • Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts. WHAT IS FORD PROTECT Protect yourself from the rising cost of vehicle repairs with a Ford Protect extended service plan. Ford Protect Extended Service Plans - United States Only Rental Car Reimbursement First Day Rental Benefit Ford Protect extended service plans mean peace of mind. Extended service plans are backed by Ford Motor Company, and provide more protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When you visit your Ford Dealer, insist on the Ford Protect extended service plan. If you bring your car into your dealer for service, we will give you a rental vehicle to use for the day. Extended Rental Benefits If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, warranty repairs, and field service actions. Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself One trip to the service center could easily exceed the price of your Ford Protect extended service plan. With the Ford Protect extended service plan, you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs. Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including: • Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components • • There are four mechanical Ford Protect extended service plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details. • 1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete it is probably easier to list what is not covered. 2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items. 3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. 4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components. Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts. Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage or other transportation. Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Protect extended service plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. This should give you and your potential buyer peace of mind. Ford Protect extended service plans are honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the United States, Canada and Mexico. 450 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Ford Protect Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (Canada Only) The Ford Protect extended service plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect extended service plan. Ford Protect extended service plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Protect extended service plan provides benefits such as: Covered maintenance includes: • Windshield wiper blades. • Spark plugs. • The clutch disc (if equipped). • Brake pads and linings. • Shock absorbers. • Struts. • Engine belts. • Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings. • Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if equipped). • Cabin air filter replacement every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) for electric vehicles only. • • • • Rental reimbursement. Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items. Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires. Roadside Assistance benefits. There are several Ford Protect extended service plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Protect extended service plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers. Interest Free Finance Options Just a 5% down payment provides you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford Protect extended service plan has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit check or hassles. To learn more, call our Ford Protect extended service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are not eligible for Ford Protect extended service plan coverage. This information is subject to change. Visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect extended service plan that is right for you. Ford Protect Extended Service Plan P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232 451 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Protecting Your Investment GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle. Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, a message appears in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km), hybrid vehicles could exceed 10,000 mi (16,000 km). It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes: first is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep the cost of owning your vehicle down. When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km) of the message appearing. Make sure to reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. See Resetting the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322). It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. See Capacities and Specifications (page 393). Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil change intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership? Our Genuine Replacement Parts You can drive high performance vehicles in such a way that may lead to higher oil consumption including extended time at high engine speeds, high loads, engine braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track and off-road usage. Under these conditions, oil consumption of approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter per 800 km) is possible. Check the engine oil level at every refueling and adjust to maintain proper levels to avoid engine damage. Dealerships stock our parts and our authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. If you do not use our authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and could affect emissions compliance. 452 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance It is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. Make sure to change the vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using our approved flushing chemical. We strongly recommend only using our genuine or our authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle. Additives and Chemicals We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information. Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections. Oils, Fluids and Flushing In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. Have discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination checked immediately. Check Every Month The air filter restriction gauge. 1 The engine oil level. Function of all interior and the exterior lights. The tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure. The windshield washer fluid level. 1 The fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display. The holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris. 1 Diesel vehicles only. 453 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 1 Scheduled Maintenance Check Every Six Months The battery connections. Clean if necessary. The body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. The cooling system fluid level and the coolant system strength. The door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. The hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. The parking brake for proper operation. The seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt for operation. The washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary. Multi-Point Inspection It is important to have the systems on your vehicle regularly checked. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great. Multi-Point Inspection Accessory drive belt or belts Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage Tires including the spare for wear and 1 Fluid levels ; fill if necessary proper pressure 454 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 2 Scheduled Maintenance Multi-Point Inspection 1 For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer. 2 If your vehicle has a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed. Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Oil Change Reminder Your vehicle comes with an oil change reminder that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how you use your vehicle. When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message Interval Vehicle Use and Example Normal 7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km) Normal commuting with highway driving No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling Severe 5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km) 3,000–5,000 mi (5,000–8,000 km) Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation Extreme Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation 455 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Normal Maintenance Intervals 1 At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display 2 Change the engine oil and filter. Rotate the tires, inspect tire wear and measure the tread depth. Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended. Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level, if applicable with dipstick. Consult your dealer for requirements. Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and the parking brake. Inspect the engine coolant system strength and hoses. Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate grease fittings in applicable. Inspect the half-shaft boots. Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and the Ujoints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings. Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. 1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals. 2 Reset the oil change reminder after engine oil and filter changes. See Resetting the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322). 1 Brake Fluid Maintenance Every three Years Change the brake fluid. 1 2 Perform this maintenance item every three years. Do not exceed the designated time for the interval. 2 Brake fluid servicing requires special equipment available at your authorized dealer. 456 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Other Maintenance Items 1 Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) Replace the cabin air filter. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the engine air filter. Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Replace the spark plugs. Inspect the accessory drive belt(s). 2 Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. Change the manual transmission fluid. Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km) Change the front axle fluid. Change the rear axle fluid. Change the transfer case fluid. Replace the accessory drive belt(s). At 200,000 mi (322,000 km) Change the engine coolant. 3 1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. 2 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced. 3 Initial replacement at 10 years or 200,000 mi (322,000 km), then every 5 years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km). Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the oil change required message appearing in the information display. SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance, as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. 457 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance • • Example 1: The message comes on at 28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the 30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic transmission fluid replacement. Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi (48,000 km), for example, the oil change reminder was reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform the engine air filter replacement. Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect and lubricate the U-joints. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace the spark plugs. See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions. Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use, such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Replace the engine air filter. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace the spark plugs. 458 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions, such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads Inspect frequently, service as required Replace the engine air filter. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and measure the tread depth. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.1 or six months 1 Reset your oil change reminder after each engine oil and filter change. See Resetting the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322). Off-road Operation Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints and the U-joints. Lubricate grease fittings, if applicable. Replace the engine air filter. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.1 or six months Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Rotate the tires, inspect tires for wear and the measure the tread depth. 1 Reset your oil change reminder after each engine oil and filter change. See Resetting the Engine Oil Change Reminder (page 322). Exclusive Use of E85 - Flex Fuel Vehicles Only Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel. Exceptions There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule. 459 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance Axle(s) and transfer case, four-wheel drive vehicles, fluid changes or level checks are not required unless a leak is suspected or the assembly has been submerged in water. Contact an authorized dealer for service. California Fuel Filter Replacement If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service. Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an oil that meets our specification or has an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil, the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km). Engine Air Filter Replacement The life of the engine air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter. 460 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information ROLLOVER WARNING OUR SUSTAINABILITY REPORT You should play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. For additional information about our sustainability progress and initiatives, visit www.sustainability.ford.com. THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU AUTO LINE PROGRAM - UNITED STATES OF AMERICA WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program. WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator considers the testimony provided and makes a decision after the hearing. Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. 461 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter. THE MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information that follows, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that needs to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB reviews the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines. The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to: BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB National Programs, Inc. 1676 International Drive, Suite 550 McLean, VA 22102 CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca. BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673. For additional information, refer to the Better Business Bureau website. ORDERING A CANADIAN FRENCH OWNER'S MANUAL Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation. You can obtain a French owner's manual from an authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, LLC at: 462 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from www.safercar.gov. HELM, LLC 47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200 Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service Call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST For additional information, visit www.helminc.com. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATES If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN CANADA If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of Canada. Transport Canada Contact Information Website http://tc.canada.ca/recalls Website http://tc.canada.ca/rappels Phone 1-800-333-0510 463 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Ford of Canada Contact Information Website www.ford.ca Phone 1-800-565-3673 Belarus RADIO FREQUENCY CERTIFICATION LABELS BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM SENSORS E253816 Argentina Brazil E340204 Canada E340516 Short Range Radar Sensor SRR3-B IC ID: 4135A-SRR3B 464 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information E351800 European Union EU Djibouti E310043 E340826 465 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Ghana Mauritania E269695 E353342 Jamaica Mexico E340517 Malaysia E353300 Moldova E269697 E337971 RALM/24A/0715/S(15-2272) 466 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Pakistan Serbia E352429 E340200 Paraguay Singapore E337181 E339940 Russia South Africa E253816 E269696 467 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information South Korea E351001 Taiwan, China E340203 468 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Ukraine E356737 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) CAUTION TO USERS Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. E338020 United States of America FCC ID: OAYSRR3B 469 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Vietnam Brazil E340499 Ghana E353397 Zambia E341433 Jamaica E340205 BODY CONTROL MODULE Argentina E340500 E338547 470 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Moldova Serbia E337971 Morocco E341434 Singapore E340501 Paraguay E339940 South Africa E339812 2019-01-I-000076 E340510 471 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Ukraine This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Vietnam E269682 United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) E278262 Zambia E341432 United States and Canada WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. E340511 FCC ID: M3NA2C766336 IC: 7812A-A2C766336 472 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information GARAGE DOOR OPENER United States and Canada WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. E340119 FCC ID: NZLSAHL5E IC: 4112A-SAHL5E This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. E339844 KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS Argentina E342143 E340316 473 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Brazil This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. E340121 Djibouti E340120 Canada and United States of America E343017 WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. E340306 Ghana FCC ID: M3N-A2C931426 FCC ID: M3N-A2C931423 IC: 7812A-A2C931426 IC: 7812A-A2C913423 E340317 474 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Malaysia E340307 Jamaica E340318 E339836 F17000176 Mauritania E340308 E340487 E340219 E340310 E340215 475 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Moldova Pakistan E337971 Morocco E337974 Paraguay E343018 E339812 NR: 2016-9-I-000222 NR: 2016-9-I-000220 NR: 2016-9-I-000223 E340311 476 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Serbia TA-2016/2012 E340313 E269681 South Korea Singapore E339675 E339940 MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000 South Africa Taiwan, China E340216 E343025 477 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information E340314 E340217 Ukraine Vietnam E278262 E269682 United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) Zambia E340486 E343026 478 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Djibouti E340642 E340643 E340315 Ghana RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE Argentina E340644 E340645 Mauritania E339077 Brazil E340530 10693-20-12270 E342393 479 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information South Africa E340531 Morocco E340649 United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) E340648 E340647 Pakistan E340218 E342392 480 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information United States and Canada SYNC Argentina WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. FCC ID: L2C0082R FCC ID: L2C0083TR IC: 342A-0083TR E338546 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. E338545 Zambia Brazil E340646 E342398 481 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information European Union EU E310043 E342510 Ghana Djibouti E338082 E342399 E338203 Jamaica E342511 E342400 482 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information E342512 E342513 Malaysia Moldova E337971 Morocco E339836 SQASI/TA/19/4047 SQASI/TA/19/4046 Mauritania E338085 E342401 483 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Serbia E338205 E342403 Pakistan Singapore 2019 E342402 E339940 Paraguay South Africa TA-2019/2465 E339812 2020-03-I-00192 E342404 2020-03-I-00193 484 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information E342515 E342514 South Korea Ukraine E338087 E338206 E269682 Taiwan United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) E342405 E338088 485 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Zambia E338088 E342406 United States and Canada WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4 E342516 FCC ID: KMH-SYNCG4L IC: 1422A-SYNCG4 TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT IC: 1422A-SYNCG4L United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. E340527 486 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information United States and Canada Brazil WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. FCC ID: KMH-14H074-NA1 IC: 1422A-14H074NA1 E338010 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Jamaica TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES WITH: 315 MHZ SENSORS E338213 Mexico Argentina E338212 E338008 487 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Paraguay TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES WITH: 433 MHZ SENSORS Argentina E338214 United States and Canada E338009 WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. China FCC ID: MRXFP3 IC: 2546A-FP3 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. E338011 488 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Djibouti Mauritania E338012 E337970 Ghana Moldova E338016 Jordan E337971 Nigeria E338017 E337972 489 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Oman Serbia E337973 Pakistan E338019 Singapore E338051 E337974 Paraguay South Korea E338023 Ukraine E338018 E338024 490 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information United Arab Emirates Djibouti E338025 E340823 European Union EU WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGING MODULE Argentina E310043 Ghana E340521 Brazil E340522 Jamaica E340824 E340523 491 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Jordan Moldova E340657 Malaysia E337971 Morocco E339836 SQASI/TA/19/4129 Mauritania E340525 Paraguay E340524 E339812 2017-10-I-0000333 492 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Serbia South Korea E273475 E340200 Taiwan, China Singapore E338220 E339940 South Africa Ukraine TA-2017/3167 E269682 E340658 493 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) Vietnam E278262 E340526 Zambia United States WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. FCC ID: L2C0066T E340659 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 - UNITED STATES OF AMERICA WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and 494 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle. We have built your vehicle to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling. One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations and instructions using parts that conform to the original vehicle parts specification. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. Collision Repairs PERCHLORATE We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. For more information visit: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. 495 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Warranty on Replacement Parts END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle because of failed non-Ford parts. For extra information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) • MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. • You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • 496 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. Customer Information • Description of Other Rights and Limitations. • • • Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. • • • 497 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICES. Customer Information • Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. • • Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for (I) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the DEVICES. UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. 498 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. SYNC® Automotive Important Safety Information Read and follow instructions: EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. • 499 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries. Customer Information General Operation • Voice Command Control: Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road. • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. • Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. • Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a • • • 500 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Customer Information Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Risk • You agree to each of the following:(a) Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and (v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider (WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway. • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in Section (a) – (e) above. Disclaimer of Warranty YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL 501 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver (a) Application. This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration. Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction • The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this EULA. (c) Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first. (d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up 502 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’s award. may award the same damages to you individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to you individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy your individual claim. (g) Arbitration fees and incentives. • (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings. (f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an individual and use the SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business. The arbitrator • • 503 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts. ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences, it will pay all Customer Information 1. Safe and Lawful Use filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves. You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred. (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (I) Severability. If the class action waiver (Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect. (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). Telenav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. 504 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information 2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. I. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, 3. Software License • ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav. 4. Disclaimers • 3.1 License Limitations • (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) 505 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others Customer Information • • is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 6. Arbitration and Governing Law • 5. Limitation of Liability • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY 506 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit Customer Information to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. 7. Assignment 8.3 • By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. 8. Miscellaneous 8.1 8.5 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or 507 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information 8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information. The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation". ©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4 The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions • 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors. The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights reserved Terms and Conditions 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. 508 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Restrictions. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. No Warranty. This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free. Export Control. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A 509 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606 Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was provided. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved. Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. I. US/Canada Territory A. United States Data. The End-User Terms for any Application containing Data for the United States shall contain the following notices: Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice: “HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.” “©United States Postal Service® 20XX. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.” 510 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information 2. Copyright Notice: In connection with each copy of all or any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada, Client shall affix in a conspicuous manner the following copyright notice on at least one of: (i) the label for the storage media of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the copy; or (iii) other materials packaged with the copy, such as user manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Department of Natural Resources Canada. All rights reserved.” B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada, which may include or reflect data from third party licensors (“Third Party Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client agrees that its use of the Third Party Data is subject to the following provisions: a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors of such data, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. 3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada to End-Users as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms (set forth with other end user terms required to be provided under the Agreement, or as otherwise may be provided, by Client) which shall include the following provisions on behalf of the Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan: b. Limitation on Liability: The Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of such Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the Data. The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, 511 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data. End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data. II. Mexico. The following provision applies to the Data for Mexico, which includes certain data from the Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging containing Data for Mexico shall contain the following notice: “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” III. Latin America Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: 4. Additional Provisions: The terms contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations of the parties under the Agreement. To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall prevail. Territory Notice Argentina IGN “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL ARGENTINO” Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO MILITAR DEL ECUADOR AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO DE 2011” “source: © IGN 2009 - BD TOPO ®” Guadeloupe, French Guiana and Martinique Mexico “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” IV. Middle East Territory 512 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country Notice Jordan “© Royal Jordanian Geographic Centre”. The foregoing notice requirement for Jordan Data is a material term of the Agreement. If Client or any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet such requirement, HERE shall have the right to terminate Client’s license with respect to the Jordan Data. V. Europe Territory A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe 1. General Restrictions Applicable to Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and agrees that in certain countries of the Europe Territory, Client will need to obtain rights directly from third party RDS-TMC code providers to receive and use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to deliver to End-Users Transactions in any way derived from or based on such Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE shall deliver the Data incorporating Traffic Codes to Client only after receiving certification from Client of its having obtained such rights. 2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for Belgium, provide the following notice to the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium are provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Transports.” B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted sublicensees (if any) are restricted from licensing and/or otherwise distributing HERE’s database for the country of Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are restricted from using the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business asset management applications, call center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet applications or for providing geocoding services. B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license granted to Client relating to making, selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or paper-like medium): (a) such license with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s entering into and complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the OS any and all applicable paper map royalties, and Client’s complying with the OS copyright notice requirements; (b) such license for selling or otherwise distributing for charge with respect to Data for the Territory of Czech Republic 513 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior written consent from Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling or distributing with respect to Data for the Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from using Data for the Territory of France to create paper maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted from using any Data to create, sell or distribute paper maps that are the same or substantially similar, in terms of data content and specific use of color, symbols and scale, to paper maps published by the European national mapping agencies, including without limitation, Landervermessungämter of Germany, Topografische Dienst of the Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland, Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land Survey of Sweden. Austria Croatia Cyprus, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldova, Poland, Slovenia and/or Ukraine “© Bundesamt für Eichund Vermessungswesen” “© EuroGeographics” France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD TOPO ®” Germany “Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen” Great Britain “Contains Ordnance Survey data © Crown copyright and database right 2010 Contains Royal Mail data © Royal Mail copyright and database right 2010” C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Client acknowledges and agrees that the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see Section IV(D) below) and paper map requirements (see Section IV(B) above) contained in this Agreement. D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country(ies) Notice 514 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Greece “Copyright Geomatics Ltd.” Hungary “Copyright © 2003; TopMap Ltd.” Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana.” Norway “Copyright © 2000; Norwegian Mapping Authority” Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal” Customer Information Spain “Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG” Sweden “Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.” Product incorporates data which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In addition to the foregoing, the End-User Terms for any Application containing RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall contain the following notice: “Product incorporates traffic location codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.” Switzerland “Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie. E. Respective Country Distribution. Client acknowledges that HERE has not received approvals to distribute map data for the following countries in such respective countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may update such list from time to time. The license rights granted to Client under this TL with respect to the Data for such countries are contingent upon Client’s compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including, without limitation, any required licenses or approvals to distribute the Application incorporating such Data in such respective countries. AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics Disclosure END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS, EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR VI. Australia Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Copyright. Based on data provided under license from PSMA Australia Limited (www.psma.com.au). 515 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING CARRIER. (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE DEVICE. (iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES VII. China Territory THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT GUARANTEE ANY END USER UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER Personal Use Only You agree to use this Data together with [insert name of Client Application] for the solely personal, non-commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as necessary for your personal use to (i) 516 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Customer Remedies view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s sole discretion, either (a) return of the price paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Data has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Data will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither these remedies nor any product support services offered by NAV2 are available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source. Restrictions Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if you fail to comply with these terms and conditions. No Other Warranty: EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Limited Warranty NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt, and (b) any support services provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as described in applicable written materials provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will make commercially reasonable efforts to solve any problem issues. Limited Liability: TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR 517 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Governing Law. FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the People’s Republic of China, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder shall be submitted to the Shanghai International Economic and Trade Arbitration Commission for arbitration. Gracenote® Copyright CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523. Export Control You agree not to export to anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. IP Protection Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers and are protected by applicable copyright and other intellectual property law and treaties. The Data are provided solely on the basis of a license to use, not sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) Entire Agreement This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NAV2(and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers 518 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, 519 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND CONDITIONS By activating, using and/or accessing the SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or other content or material provided by Intelematics (together, SUNA Products and/or Services), you must accept certain terms and conditions. The following is a brief summary of the terms and conditions that apply to you. To view the full terms and conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, please consult: Taiwan Territory Website Note: In accordance with the management approach of low-power radio wave radiation motors: www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ Article 12: For approved and certified low-power radiation motor models, companies, firms or users must not alter the frequency, increase the power or change the characteristics and functions of the original design without authorization. 1. Acceptance By using SUNA Products and/or Services, you will be deemed to have accepted and agreed to be bound by the terms and conditions fully detailed at: Article 14: The usage of low-power radio-frequency motors must not affect aviation safety and interfere with legal telecommunications. Should interference be detected, immediately stop using the device and only resume usage after ensuring that there is no longer any interference. For the legal telecommunication and wireless telecommunication of the telco, the low-power radio frequency motor must be able to tolerate legal limits of interference from telecommunication, industrial, scientific and radio wave equipment. Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ 2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services are for your personal use. You may not record, or retransmit the content, nor use the content in association with any other traffic information or route guidance service or device not approved by Intelematics. You obtain no right of ownership in any Intellectual Property Rights (including copyright) in the data that is used to provide SUNA Products and/or Services. 3. Appropriate Use 520 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised of the possibility of such damages. You also acknowledge that the neither Intelematics nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any warranties that relate to the availability, accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products and/or Services, and to the extent which it is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each Supplier excludes any warranties which might otherwise be implied by any State or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA Products and/or Services. SUNA Products and/or Services are intended as an aid to personal motoring and travel planning, and do not provide comprehensive or accurate information on all occasions. On occasions, you may experience additional delay as a result of using SUNA Products and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is not intended, or suitable, for use in applications where time of arrival or driving directions may impact the safety of the public or yourself. 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services while driving 7. Please Note You, and other authorized drivers of the vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Services are available or installed and active, remain at all times responsible for observing all relevant laws and codes of safe driving. In particular, you agree to only actively operate SUNA Products and/or Services when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and it is safe to do so. Great care has been taken in preparing this manual. Constant product development may mean that some information is not entirely up-to-date. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. EMISSION LAW 5. Service Continuity and Reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel We will use reasonable endeavors to provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic Channel may occasionally be unavailable for technical reasons or for planned maintenance. We will try to perform maintenance at times when congestion is light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA Products and/or Services at any time. WARNING: Do not remove or alter the original equipment floor covering or insulation between it and the metal floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and insulation protect occupants of the vehicle from the engine and exhaust system heat and noise. On vehicles with no original equipment floor covering insulation, do not carry passengers in a manner that permits prolonged skin contact with the metal floor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in fire or personal injury. Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel RDS-TMC signal at any particular location. 6. Limitation of Liability U.S. federal laws and certain state laws prohibit removing or rendering inoperative emission control system components. Similar federal or provincial laws may apply in Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle modification without first determining applicable laws. Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the manufacturer of your device (the “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any third party for any damages either direct, indirect, incidental, consequential or otherwise arising out of the use of or inability to use SUNA Products and/or 521 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Tampering with emissions control systems including related sensors or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced engine power and the illumination of the service engine soon light. • • • • • • • Tampering With a Noise Control System Federal laws prohibit the following acts: • Removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance. • Repair or replacement of any device or element of the design incorporated into a new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use. • The use of the vehicle after any person removes or renders inoperative any device or element of the design. A clogged fuel filter. Contaminated fuel. Air in the fuel system, due to loose connections. An open or pinched sensor hose. Incorrect engine oil level. Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic conditions. Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. Note: If these checks do not help you correct the concern, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation became effective governing the noise emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The preceding statements concerning prohibited tampering acts and maintenance, and the noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide, are applicable to complete chassis cabs over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may presume to constitute tampering as follows: • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron absorbers, fender apron barriers, underbody noise shields or acoustically absorptive material. • Tampering or rendering inoperative the engine speed governor, to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS If the engine does not start, runs rough, experiences a decrease in engine performance, experiences excess fuel consumption or produces excessive exhaust smoke, check for the following: • A plugged or disconnected air inlet system hose. • A plugged engine air filter element. • Water in the fuel filter and water separator. For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s 522 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Customer Information Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. 523 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Appendices Note: We test and certify your vehicle to meet electromagnetic compatibility legislation. It is your responsibility to make sure that any equipment an authorized dealer installs on your vehicle complies with applicable local legislation and other requirements. Installation of some aftermarket electronic devices could degrade the performance of vehicle functions, which use radio frequency signals such as broadcast radio receiver, tire pressure monitoring system, push button start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite navigation. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the front or rear seatbacks, or in areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. WARNING: Do not fasten antenna cables to vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes. Note: Any radio frequency transmitter equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular telephones and amateur radio transmitters) must keep to the parameters in the following illustrations and table. We do not provide any other special provisions or conditions for installations or use. WARNING: Keep antenna and power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic modules and airbags. Car E239120 524 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Appendices Van E239122 Truck E239121 525 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Appendices Frequency Band MHz Maximum Output Power Watt (Peak RMS) Antenna Positions 1-30 50 1 50-54 50 2, 3 68-88 50 2, 3 142-176 50 2, 3 380-512 50 2, 3 806-870 10 2, 3 Note: After the installation of radio frequency transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in your vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes. Check all electrical equipment: • With the ignition ON. • With the vehicle running. • During a road test at various speeds. Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements. 526 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index 3 Adaptive Cruise Control – Troubleshooting........................................240 Adaptive Cruise Control – Information Messages.........................................................240 360 Degree Camera...................................229 360 Degree Camera Settings.........................231 Adjusting the Exterior Mirrors..................105 Adjusting the Headlamps.........................329 Adjusting the Instrument Panel Lighting Brightness....................................................102 Adjusting the Map......................................440 360 Degree Camera Guide Lines..........230 360 Degree Camera Limitations...........229 360 Degree Camera Precautions..........229 360 Degree Camera Settings..................231 Switching the 360 Degree Camera On and Off........................................................................231 Switching the 360 Degree Camera View.....................................................................231 Changing the Format of the Map...............440 Zooming the Map In and Out.......................440 Adjusting the Seatbelts During Pregnancy......................................................54 Adjusting the Sound Settings..................415 Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................89 Adjusting the Volume.................................414 Aid Mode..........................................................251 4 4WD See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................182 How Does Aid Mode Work...............................251 What Is Aid Mode................................................251 9 911 Assist...........................................................68 Airbag Precautions.........................................61 Airbags...............................................................59 A Air Conditioning Front Passenger Sensing System..................63 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control...............117 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control....................................122 A/C See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control...............117 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control....................................122 Air Conditioning System Capacity and Specification..............................................402 Air Filter About This Publication..................................17 ABS See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............326 See: Brakes...........................................................194 Alert and Aid Mode......................................251 Accessing Apps.............................................437 Accessing Navigation................................440 Accessing the Passive Key Backup Position.........................................................156 Accessories....................................................445 Adaptive Cruise Control............................234 How Does Alert and Aid Mode Work..........252 What Is Alert and Aid Mode............................251 Alert Mode.....................................................250 Adjusting the Steering Wheel Vibration Intensity.............................................................251 How Does Alert Mode Work...........................251 What Is Alert Mode...........................................250 Adaptive Cruise Control – Troubleshooting............................................240 AM/FM Radio.................................................416 AM/FM Radio Limitations...............................416 Selecting a Radio Station................................416 Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators.....................................................240 Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations...................................................235 Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions.................................................234 Ambient Lighting..........................................102 Adjusting Ambient Lighting............................102 Switching Ambient Lighting On and Off.......................................................................102 527 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Anti-Lock Braking System........................194 Switching Automatic Engine Stop On and Off.......................................................................156 What Is Automatic Engine Stop....................155 Anti-Lock Braking System Limitations.......................................................194 Automatic High Beam Control.................98 Appendices....................................................524 Applying the Electric Parking Brake..............................................................198 Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Emergency...................................................198 App Precautions...........................................437 App Requirements......................................437 Apps..................................................................437 Audio System.................................................414 Audio System Precautions.......................414 Audio System – Troubleshooting...........421 Automatic High Beam Control Indicators...........................................................99 Automatic High Beam Control Limitations.........................................................99 Automatic High Beam Control Precautions.......................................................98 Automatic High Beam Control Requirements...................................................99 How Does Automatic High Beam Control Work.....................................................................98 Overriding Automatic High Beam Control................................................................99 Switching Automatic High Beam Control On and Off.........................................................99 Audio System – Information Messages..........................................................421 Automatic High Beam Control – Troubleshooting........................................100 Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror..................104 Automatic High Beam Control – Information Messages................................100 AM/FM Radio.......................................................416 Audio System – Troubleshooting.................421 Digital Radio..........................................................417 Satellite Radio.....................................................418 Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror Limitations.......................................................104 What Is the Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror..................................................................104 Automatic Locking Mode............................54 Disengaging Automatic Locking Mode........54 Engaging Automatic Locking Mode..............54 What Is Automatic Locking Mode.................54 Autolamps........................................................95 Automatic Transmission Audible Warnings........................................................181 Automatic Transmission............................178 Autolamp Settings..............................................95 What Are Autolamps..........................................95 Autolock.............................................................79 Autolock Requirements.....................................79 What Is Autolock..................................................79 Automatic Transmission Positions..............178 Brake Shift Interlock..........................................180 Manually Shifting Gears..................................180 Automatically Releasing the Electric Parking Brake..............................................198 Automatic Crash Shutoff.........................302 Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity and Specification.....................................403 Automatic Transmission Position Indicators......................................................179 Automatic Transmission Positions........178 Automatic Crash Shutoff Precautions.....................................................303 Re-Enabling Your Vehicle...............................303 What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff...............302 Drive (D).................................................................178 Manual (M)...........................................................179 Neutral (N)............................................................178 Park (P)..................................................................178 Reverse (R)...........................................................178 Sport (S)................................................................179 Automatic Emergency Braking..............266 Switching Automatic Emergency Braking On and Off......................................................266 What Is Automatic Emergency Braking..............................................................266 Automatic Transmission Precautions..................................................178 Auto Mode........................................................119 Automatic Engine Stop..............................155 How Does Automatic Engine Stop Work....................................................................155 Overriding Automatic Engine Stop..............156 Auto Mode Indicators.........................................119 Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................119 528 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Switching Dual Mode On and Off................120 Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control Module Fuse Box............................................315 Locating the Body Control Module Fuse Box.......................................................................314 Auto-Start-Stop............................................161 Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting...........163 Auto-Start-Stop Indicators......................163 Auto-Start-Stop Precautions Automatic Transmission..........................161 Auto-Start-Stop Precautions - Manual Transmission................................................161 Auto-Start-Stop – Troubleshooting.........................................163 Bonnet Lock See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........318 Booster Seats..................................................48 Brake Fluid Specification...........................195 Brake Over Accelerator..............................194 Brake Precautions........................................194 Brakes...............................................................194 Auto-Start-Stop – Frequently Asked Questions.........................................................165 Auto-Start-Stop – Information Messages..........................................................163 Anti-Lock Braking System..............................194 Brakes – Troubleshooting...............................195 Brake Shift Interlock...................................180 Autounlock........................................................78 Brake Shift Interlock Precautions................180 Using Brake Shift Interlock.............................180 What Is Brake Shift Interlock.........................180 Autounlock Requirements................................78 Switching Autounlock On and Off.................79 What Is Autounlock.............................................78 Brakes – Troubleshooting.........................195 Auxiliary Switches.......................................447 Brakes – Frequently Asked Questions..........................................................197 Brakes – Information Messages...................196 Brakes – Warning Lamps................................195 B Battery Breaking-In.....................................................297 See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................326 C Beginning a Voice Interaction.................428 Blind Spot Information System.............256 Calculating Payload....................................274 Calculating the Load Limit.......................274 California Proposition 65 - United States of America..................................................494 Canceling the Set Speed.........................208 Capacities and Specifications................393 Catalytic Converter.......................................173 Blind Spot Information System – Troubleshooting............................................258 Blind Spot Information System Indicators.....................................................258 Blind Spot Information System Limitations..................................................256 Blind Spot Information System Precautions.................................................256 Blind Spot Information System Requirements - Automatic Transmission...............................................257 Blind Spot Information System Requirements - Manual Transmission..............................................256 Blind Spot Information System – Troubleshooting........................................258 Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting..............................................173 Catalytic Converter Precautions.............173 Catalytic Converter – Troubleshooting.........................................173 Catalytic Converter – Warning Lamps.................................................................173 Center Console - Automatic Transmission..................................................31 Center Console..............................................149 Blind Spot Information System – Information Messages................................258 Locking the Center Console...........................149 Opening the Center Console..........................149 Bluetooth®....................................................436 Body Control Module Fuse Box...............314 Center Console - Manual Transmission................................................30 Center Display Limitations.......................425 Accessing the Body Control Module Fuse Box.......................................................................314 529 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Center Display Overview...........................425 Center Display Precautions.....................425 Changing a Flat Tire....................................387 Changing a Road Wheel...........................387 Changing the 12V Battery.........................326 Changing the Engine Air Filter................326 Changing the Fuel Filter............................326 Changing the Remote Control Battery.............................................................70 Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Name or Password....................................412 Charging a Device.........................................143 Charging a Wireless Device......................148 Checking MyKey System Status...............76 Checking the Brake Fluid...........................194 Checking the Clutch Fluid Level..............176 Checking the Coolant.................................322 Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid Level................................................................176 Checking the Seatbelts...............................56 Checking the Tire Pressures....................379 Checking the Wiper Blades.........................91 Children and Airbags....................................62 Child Restraint Anchor Points....................41 Cleaning the Convertible Top........................362 Cleaning the Engine Compartment.............361 Cleaning the Exterior Precautions..............360 Cleaning the Underbody.................................362 Cleaning Wheels.................................................361 Cleaning Windows and Wiper Blades........361 Cleaning the Interior...................................362 Cleaning Carpets and Floor Mats................363 Cleaning Displays and Screens....................363 Cleaning Fabric Seats and Headliners.......................................................363 Cleaning Leather and Vinyl............................363 Cleaning Plastic..................................................363 Cleaning Seatbelts...........................................364 Cleaning the Instrument Panel....................362 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................75 Clearing the Garage Door Opener.........140 Climate Control...............................................117 Auto Mode..............................................................119 Climate Control Hints.................................120 Closing the Tailgate......................................84 Closing the Tailgate From Outside Your Vehicle.................................................................84 Clutch Fluid Capacity and Specification................................................176 Cold Weather Precautions.......................297 Connected Vehicle.....................................409 Locating the Child Restraint Lower Anchor Points....................................................................41 Locating the Child Restraint Top Tether Anchor Points...................................................42 What Are the Child Restraint Anchor Points....................................................................41 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Network...........................................................409 Connected Vehicle Data..............................24 Connected Vehicle Limitations.............409 Connected Vehicle Requirements........409 Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting........................................410 Connecting a Bluetooth® Device..........436 Connecting a Trailer.....................................281 Child Restraints...............................................42 Child Restraint Position Information.............42 Child Restraints Recommendation...............44 Child Safety......................................................40 Child Restraint Anchor Points..........................41 Child Restraints.....................................................42 Installing Child Restraints.................................44 Connecting a Trailer – Troubleshooting............................................282 Child Safety Locks.........................................50 Child Safety Precautions............................40 Cleaning Products......................................360 Cleaning the Exterior.................................360 Connecting a Trailer Precautions...........281 Connecting a Trailer – Troubleshooting........................................282 Cleaning Camera Lenses and Sensors.............................................................362 Cleaning Chrome, Aluminium or Stainless Steel....................................................................361 Cleaning Headlamps and Rear Lamps................................................................361 Cleaning Stripes or Graphics.........................362 Connecting a Trailer – Information Messages.........................................................282 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Network.......................................................409 Connecting FordPass to the Modem........409 Enabling and Disabling the Modem..........409 What Is the Modem.........................................409 530 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Disposing of Airbags.....................................67 Distance Indication.....................................264 Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Network.......................................................409 Connecting Your Phone.............................431 Contacting Us...................................................15 Cooling System Capacity and Specification - 2.3L EcoBoost™........400 Cooling System Capacity and Specification - 2.7L EcoBoost™..........401 Crash and Breakdown Information.................................................299 Distance Indication Indicator........................266 Switching Distance Indication On and Off......................................................................266 What Is Distance Indication..........................264 Doors and Locks.............................................78 Autolock...................................................................79 Autounlock..............................................................78 Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting.............79 Mislock......................................................................79 Operating the Doors From Inside Your Vehicle.................................................................78 Operating the Doors From Outside Your Vehicle.................................................................78 Automatic Crash Shutoff...............................302 Jump Starting the Vehicle.............................300 Post-Crash Alert System................................302 Recovery Towing................................................303 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......66 Crawler Gear...................................................174 Doors and Locks – Troubleshooting.......79 Using Crawler Gear.............................................174 What Is Crawler Gear.........................................174 Doors and Locks – Frequently Asked Questions............................................................81 Doors and Locks – Information Messages...........................................................80 Doors and Locks – Warning Lamps..............79 Creating a MyKey............................................75 Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot...........412 Cross Traffic Alert........................................259 Drive Belt Routing - 2.3L EcoBoost™.................................................332 Drive Belt Routing - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................333 Driver Alert.....................................................269 Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting.........261 Cross Traffic Alert Indicators..................260 Cross Traffic Alert Limitations................259 Cross Traffic Alert Precautions...............259 Cross Traffic Alert – Troubleshooting.........................................261 Driver Alert – Troubleshooting......................270 Driver Alert Indicators.................................270 Driver Alert Limitations.............................269 Driver Alert Precautions............................269 Driver Alert – Troubleshooting................270 Cross Traffic Alert – Information Messages..........................................................261 Cruise Control................................................232 Cruise Control Indicators...........................233 Customer Information................................461 Driver Alert – Information Messages..........270 Driving Economically..................................297 Driving Hints..................................................289 Radio Frequency Certification Labels...............................................................464 Off-Road Driving................................................289 D E Data Privacy......................................................22 Department of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades..................................368 Digital Radio....................................................417 Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning.........................................................199 Electric Parking Brake.................................198 Digital Radio Indicators....................................418 Digital Radio Limitations..................................417 How Does Digital Radio Work........................417 Switching Digital Radio Reception On and Off........................................................................417 What Is Digital Radio.........................................417 Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting.............................................199 Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting........................................199 Electric Parking Brake – Information Messages........................................................200 Directing the Flow of Air..............................118 531 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Evasive Steering Assist.............................266 Electric Parking Brake – Warning Lamps................................................................199 Evasive Steering Assist Limitations............267 Switching Evasive Steering Assist On and Off.......................................................................267 What Is Evasive Steering Assist...................266 Electric Power Steering..............................219 Electric Power Steering Precautions...........219 How Does Electric Power Steering Work....................................................................219 Event Data.........................................................23 Export Unique Options..............................522 Exterior Bulbs................................................330 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............524 Electronic Locking Differential................190 Electronic Locking Differential – Troubleshooting.............................................192 Changing a Rear Lamp Bulb..........................332 Exterior Bulb Specification Chart................330 Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly...............331 Electronic Locking Differential Indicators.......................................................191 Electronic Locking Differential – Troubleshooting.........................................192 Exterior Lamps................................................95 Exterior Lamp Audible Warning......................97 Exterior Lamp Indicators...................................96 Switching the Daytime Running Lamps On and Off................................................................95 Switching the Front Fog Lamps On and Off.........................................................................96 Switching the Spot Lamps On and Off.........................................................................96 Switching the Turn Signal Lamps On and Off.........................................................................95 Electronic Locking Differential – Information Messages.................................192 Emergency Call Limitations.......................68 Emergency Call Requirements.................68 Emergency Call System Data....................25 Emergency Towing.....................................309 Emission Law.................................................521 Enabling Apps on an Android Device............................................................437 Enabling Apps on an iOS Device............437 Enabling Remote Start................................114 End User License Agreement.................496 Engine Block Heater....................................153 Exterior Lighting Control.............................94 Exterior Lighting.............................................94 Autolamps..............................................................95 Automatic High Beam Control.......................98 Automatic High Beam Control – Troubleshooting............................................100 Exterior Lamps......................................................95 Exterior Zone Lighting.........................................97 Headlamps.............................................................94 Headlamps – Troubleshooting.......................94 Engine Block Heater Precautions.................153 How Does the Engine Block Heater Work....................................................................153 Using the Engine Block Heater......................154 Engine Oil Capacity and Specification 2.3L EcoBoost™........................................397 Engine Oil Capacity and Specification 2.7L EcoBoost™........................................398 Engine Oil.........................................................321 Exterior Mirrors..............................................105 Exterior Zone Lighting...................................97 Exterior Zone Lighting Settings.......................97 Using the Exterior Zone Lighting.....................97 What Is Exterior Zone Lighting........................97 Adding Engine Oil................................................321 Checking the Engine Oil Level........................321 Engine Oil Capacity and Specification...................................................322 Engine Oil Dipstick Overview..........................321 Resetting the Engine Oil Change Reminder..........................................................322 F Fastening and Unfastening the Seatbelts........................................................53 Feature Bar....................................................426 Fender Anchor Points.................................279 Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™.................................................393 Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................394 Fender Anchor Point Load Capacities........................................................279 Locating the Fender Anchor Points............279 532 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Fuel and Refueling.......................................166 Flat Tire Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting.........171 Fuel Quality...........................................................167 Refueling................................................................169 Running Out of Fuel..........................................168 See: Changing a Flat Tire................................387 Floor Mats......................................................298 Folding the Exterior Mirrors......................105 Ford Protect..................................................450 Four-Wheel Drive.........................................182 Four-Wheel Drive Modes................................186 Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting..........187 Fuel and Refueling Precautions.............166 Fuel and Refueling – Troubleshooting..........................................171 Four-Wheel Drive Indicators.....................187 Four-Wheel Drive Limitations.................183 Four-Wheel Drive Modes..........................186 Fuel and Refueling – Information Messages............................................................171 Fuel and Refueling – Warning Lamps..........171 Four-Wheel Drive Auto.....................................187 Four-Wheel Drive High.....................................187 Four-Wheel Drive Low......................................187 Two-Wheel Drive High.....................................186 Fuel Gauge......................................................106 Fuel Gauge Limitations.....................................107 Locating the Fuel Filler Door...........................107 What Is Distance to Empty.............................107 What Is the Fuel Gauge...................................106 What Is the Low Fuel Reminder....................107 Four-Wheel Drive Precautions................182 Four-Wheel Drive – Troubleshooting.........................................187 Fuel Quality.....................................................167 Four-Wheel Drive – Information Messages..........................................................188 Four-Wheel Drive – Warning Lamps...........187 Selecting the Correct Fuel...............................167 Fuel Tank Capacity........................................171 Fuse Precautions..........................................310 Fuses.................................................................310 Front Axle Fluid Capacity and Specification..............................................405 Front Exterior - 2-Door.................................34 Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Hard Top.........................................................35 Front Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Soft Top..........................................................36 Front Parking Aid..........................................223 Body Control Module Fuse Box.....................314 Fuses – Troubleshooting..................................317 Under Hood Fuse Box.......................................310 Fuses – Troubleshooting............................317 Fuses – Frequently Asked Questions..........317 G Front Parking Aid Audible Warnings...........224 Front Parking Aid Limitations........................224 Locating the Front Parking Aid Sensors.............................................................224 What is the Front Parking Aid........................223 G.O.A.T. Mode Control................................242 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Troubleshooting............................................246 G.O.A.T. Modes....................................................243 Front Passenger Sensing System............63 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Troubleshooting........................................246 Front Passenger Sensing System Indicators............................................................65 Front Passenger Sensing System Precautions.......................................................65 How Does the Front Passenger Sensing System Work.....................................................63 What Is the Front Passenger Sensing System................................................................63 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Frequently Asked Questions........................................................248 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Information Messages.........................................................246 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Warning Lamps...............................................................246 G.O.A.T. Modes..............................................243 Front Seat Precautions..............................126 Front Seats......................................................126 Baja.........................................................................243 Eco...........................................................................243 Mud/Ruts..............................................................243 Normal...................................................................244 Rock Crawl...........................................................244 Heated Seats........................................................132 Manual Seats........................................................127 Power Seats..........................................................129 533 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting........201 Sand.......................................................................244 Slippery..................................................................245 Sport.......................................................................245 Hill Start Assist – Information Messages..........................................................201 Garage Door Opener...................................138 Garage Door Opener Limitations...........138 Garage Door Opener Precautions..........138 Garage Door Opener Radio Frequencies..................................................141 General Maintenance Information........452 Glasses Holder..............................................150 Hood Lock See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........318 Horn....................................................................89 How Does Adaptive Cruise Control Work...............................................................234 How Does Blind Spot Information System Work..............................................256 How Does Cross Traffic Alert Work..............................................................259 How Does Driver Alert Work....................269 How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work - 4x4 with Part Time Engagement.................182 How Does Four-Wheel Drive Work Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode...............182 How Does G.O.A.T. Mode Control Work...............................................................242 How Does Hill Descent Control Work................................................................217 How Does Hill Start Assist Work............201 How Does Pre-Collision Assist Work...............................................................262 How Does Stability Control Work.........204 How Does the 360 Degree Camera Work...............................................................229 How Does the Garage Door Opener Work...............................................................138 How Does the Lane Keeping System Work..............................................................249 How Does the Personal Safety System Work.................................................................58 How Does the Rear Occupant Alert System Work...............................................136 How Does the Safety Canopy™ Work................................................................60 How Does Traction Control Work..........202 How Does Trailer Sway Control Work..............................................................288 How Do the Front Airbags Work...............59 How Do the Side Airbags Work................59 Locating the Glasses Holder..........................150 Glossary of Tire Terminology...................374 Glove Compartment...................................149 Locking the Glove Compartment.................149 Opening the Glove Compartment...............149 H Headlamp Adjusting See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................329 Headlamps.......................................................94 Headlamp Indicators..........................................94 Using the High Beam Headlamps.................94 Headlamps – Troubleshooting.................94 Headlamps – Frequently Asked Questions...........................................................94 Heated Seats..................................................132 Heated Seat Precautions.................................132 Switching the Heated Seats On and Off........................................................................132 Heating See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control...............117 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control....................................122 Hill Descent Control.....................................217 Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting.............................................218 Hill Descent Control Indicator..................217 Hill Descent Control Precautions............217 Hill Descent Control – Troubleshooting.........................................218 Hill Descent Control – Information Messages..........................................................218 I Hill Start Assist..............................................201 Identifying Fuse Types................................317 Identifying the Audio Unit........................424 Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting..............201 Hill Start Assist Precautions....................201 534 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Identifying the Auxiliary Switch Wiring............................................................449 Identifying the Climate Control Unit.......117 Inflating the Tires.........................................379 Information On Demand Screen Vehicles With: 12.3 Inch Screen............427 Information on the Tire Sidewall..........369 Inspecting the Tire for Damage.............380 Inspecting the Tire for Wear....................380 Inspecting the Wheel Valve Stems........381 Installing Child Restraints...........................44 Introduction.......................................................17 Combining the Seatbelt and Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints.....................47 Installing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat.......................................................................47 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children...............................................................46 Using Seatbelts....................................................44 Using Tether Straps............................................48 Keyless Entry....................................................82 J Jump Starting the Vehicle.......................300 Jump Starting Precautions............................300 Jump Starting the Vehicle...............................301 Preparing the Vehicle........................................301 K Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting....................83 Keyless Entry Limitations............................82 Keyless Entry Settings..................................82 Keyless Entry – Troubleshooting.............83 Keyless Entry – Frequently Asked Questions...........................................................83 Keys and Remote Controls........................69 Instrument Cluster Display........................112 Keys and Remote Controls – Troubleshooting...............................................73 Personalized Settings........................................113 Trip Computer.......................................................113 Keys and Remote Controls – Troubleshooting...........................................73 Instrument Cluster Display Main Menu................................................................112 Instrument Cluster Indicators.................109 Instrument Cluster......................................106 Keys and Remote Controls – Information Messages............................................................73 L Fuel Gauge............................................................106 Instrument Cluster Overview..................106 Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps...........................................................108 Instrument Panel...........................................29 Interior Air Quality.........................................125 Interior Bulbs.................................................332 Lane Keeping System Indicators...........252 Lane Keeping System................................249 Aid Mode................................................................251 Alert and Aid Mode............................................251 Alert Mode...........................................................250 Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting............................................253 Interior Bulb Specification Chart..................332 Interior Lamp Function................................101 Lane Keeping System Limitations........249 Lane Keeping System Precautions.................................................249 Lane Keeping System – Troubleshooting........................................253 Switching the Interior Lamp Function On and Off...............................................................101 What Is the Interior Lamp Function.............101 Interior Lighting..............................................101 Ambient Lighting................................................102 Interior Lamp Function......................................101 Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting.............102 Lane Keeping System – Frequently Asked Questions........................................................254 Lane Keeping System – Information Messages.........................................................253 Interior Lighting – Troubleshooting.......102 Interior Lighting – Frequently Asked Questions.........................................................102 Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror........................104 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft................................285 Live Traffic.....................................................440 Interior Mirror Precautions........................104 Switching Live Traffic On and Off...............440 Interior Mirror.................................................104 535 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index What Is Live Traffic...........................................440 Manually Shifting Gears............................180 Load Carrying..................................................271 Shifting Using the Buttons on the Selector Lever...................................................................180 Fender Anchor Points.......................................279 Roof Rack..............................................................276 Manual Seats..................................................127 Load Carrying Precautions........................271 Loading Your Trailer....................................284 Locating the 360 Degree Cameras.......................................................230 Locating the Auxiliary Switches.............447 Locating the Auxiliary Switch Wiring............................................................447 Locating the Blind Spot Information System Sensors.........................................257 Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.3L EcoBoost™..................................................194 Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.7L EcoBoost™..................................................194 Locating the Cross Traffic Alert Sensors........................................................260 Locating the Fuel Filler Funnel.................167 Locating the Power Outlet........................144 Locating the Pre-Collision Assist Sensors.........................................................264 Locating the Rear View Camera............226 Locating the Safety Compliance Certification Labels..................................272 Locating the Tire label...............................368 Locating the USB Ports..............................142 Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger...........................................................147 Locating Your Vehicle...................................70 Locking and Unlocking the Tailgate........84 Locking the Rear Window Controls.......103 Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................127 Adjusting the Seat Backrest...........................129 Folding the Seats................................................134 Head Restraint Components..........................127 Installing the Head Restraint.........................128 Moving the Seat Backward and Forward.............................................................128 Removing the Head Restraint........................128 Unfolding the Seats...........................................135 Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity and Specification................................................176 Manual Transmission..................................174 Crawler Gear.........................................................174 Manual Transmission – Troubleshooting..............................................177 Manual Transmission Precautions.........174 Manual Transmission – Troubleshooting..........................................177 Manual Transmission – Frequently Asked Questions..........................................................177 Map Pocket.....................................................150 Locating the Map Pocket................................150 Mislock................................................................79 Mislock Limitations..............................................79 Switching Mislock On and Off.........................79 What Is Mislock.....................................................79 Mobile Communications Equipment..................................................496 Mobile Device Data........................................25 Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™.................................................395 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................396 Muting the Audio..........................................415 MyKey Settings................................................74 M Maintenance..................................................318 Engine Oil...............................................................321 Exterior Bulbs......................................................330 Interior Bulbs.......................................................332 Configurable MyKey Settings...........................74 Non-Configurable MyKey Settings................74 Maintenance Precautions.........................318 Making and Receiving a Phone Call.................................................................433 Manually Dimming the Interior Mirror..............................................................104 Manually Releasing the Electric Parking Brake..............................................................198 MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................76 MyKey – Frequently Asked Questions..........77 MyKey – Information Messages......................76 MyKey™.............................................................74 MyKey Settings......................................................74 MyKey – Troubleshooting..................................76 536 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index N Parking Aids – Troubleshooting...................225 Rear Parking Aid.................................................223 Parking Aids – Troubleshooting.............225 Navigation Map Updates.........................440 Navigation.....................................................440 Parking Aids – Information Messages.........................................................225 Adjusting the Map............................................440 Live Traffic...........................................................440 Route Guidance..................................................441 Setting a Destination.......................................440 Waypoints.............................................................441 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................87 How Does the Passive Anti-Theft System Work.....................................................................87 What Is the Passive Anti-Theft System.................................................................87 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........455 Perchlorate....................................................495 Performing a Master Reset......................444 Personalized Settings..................................113 O Changing the Instrument Cluster Display Language...........................................................113 Changing the Measure Unit.............................113 Changing the Temperature Unit.....................113 Changing the Tire Pressure Unit....................113 Off-Road Driving.........................................289 After Driving Your Vehicle Off-Road...........295 Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques...........289 Driving Off-Road...............................................290 Driving Through Water Limitations.............294 Driving Your Vehicle at High Speeds..........296 Off-Road Driving Aids......................................294 Off-Road Driving Precautions......................289 What Is Off-Road Driving...............................289 Personal Safety System Components.................................................58 Personal Safety System™..........................58 Phone Menu...................................................431 Phone................................................................431 Phone Precautions.......................................431 Playing Media Using Bluetooth®..........436 Playing Media Using the USB Port.........142 Playing or Pausing the Audio Source............................................................414 Post-Crash Alert System..........................302 Opening and Closing the Hood...............318 Opening and Closing the Windows.......103 Opening the Tailgate....................................84 Opening the Tailgate From Outside Your Vehicle.................................................................84 Operating the Doors From Inside Your Vehicle.............................................................78 How Does the Post-Crash Alert System Work..................................................................302 Post-Crash Alert System Limitations........302 Switching the Post-Crash Alert System Off......................................................................302 What Is the Post-Crash Alert System..............................................................302 Individually Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Locking Button................78 Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Central Locking................................................78 Operating the Doors From Outside Your Vehicle.............................................................78 Unlocking and Locking the Doors Using the Remote Control................................................78 Power Outlet Indicators.............................144 Power Outlet..................................................144 Power Outlet Precautions.........................144 Power Seats....................................................129 Ordering a Canadian French Owner's Manual..........................................................462 Our Sustainability Report..........................461 Overriding the Set Speed.........................239 Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................129 Adjusting the Lumbar Support.......................131 Adjusting the Seat Backrest............................131 Adjusting the Seat Cushion..............................131 Adjusting the Seat Height.................................131 Head Restraint Components.........................129 Installing the Head Restraint.........................130 P Parking Aid Indicators................................225 Parking Aid Precautions............................222 Parking Aids...................................................222 Front Parking Aid................................................223 537 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Moving the Seat Backward and Forward.............................................................130 Removing the Head Restraint.......................130 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Sensors.............................................................487 Wireless Accessory Charging Module.........491 Pre-Collision Assist Limitations.............263 Pre-Collision Assist Precautions............262 Pre-Collision Assist.....................................262 Rear Axle Fluid Capacity and Specification..............................................406 Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points.............280 Automatic Emergency Braking....................266 Distance Indication...........................................264 Evasive Steering Assist....................................266 Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting............................................267 Locating the Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points................................................................280 Rear Cargo Area Anchor Point Load Capacities.......................................................280 Rear Cargo Area Anchor Point Precautions....................................................280 Pre-Collision Assist – Troubleshooting........................................267 Rear Cargo Area...........................................280 Rear Cargo Area Anchor Points...................280 Pre-Collision Assist – Frequently Asked Questions........................................................268 Pre-Collision Assist – Information Messages..........................................................267 Pre-Collision Assist – Warning Lamps................................................................267 Rear Exterior - 2-Door...................................37 Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Hard Top.........................................................38 Rear Exterior - 4-Door, Vehicles With: Soft Top..........................................................39 Rear Occupant Alert System Audible Warnings........................................................137 Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators.......................................................137 Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations...................................................136 Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions..................................................136 Rear Occupant Alert System...................136 Rear Parking Aid...........................................223 Preparing Your Vehicle for Storage.........................................................366 Programming a MyKey.................................75 Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Garage Door Opener Motor..............................................................139 Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Gate Opener Motor...................140 Programming the Garage Door Opener to Your Hand-Held Transmitter...........139 Programming the Remote Control..........72 Properly Adjusting the Driver and Front Passenger Seats..........................................62 Puncture See: Changing a Flat Tire................................387 Locating the Rear Parking Aid Sensors.............................................................223 Rear Parking Aid Audible Warnings.............223 Rear Parking Aid Limitations.........................223 What is the Rear Parking Aid.........................223 Push Button Ignition Switch......................151 Rear Seats.......................................................133 Manual Seats.......................................................133 R Rear View Camera Guide Lines..............226 Rear View Camera Object Distance Indicators......................................................227 Rear View Camera Precautions.............226 Rear View Camera.......................................226 Radio Frequency Certification Labels...........................................................464 Blind Spot Information System Sensors............................................................464 Body Control Module.......................................470 Garage Door Opener.........................................473 Keys and Remote Controls.............................473 Radio Transceiver Module..............................479 SYNC.......................................................................481 Telematics Control Unit..................................486 Rear View Camera Settings............................227 Rear View Camera Settings.....................227 Switching Rear View Camera Delay On and Off.......................................................................228 Zooming the Rear View Camera In and Out......................................................................227 Recommended Shift Speeds...................175 538 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Recovery Towing..........................................303 Removing and Installing the Front Roof Panel..................................................................343 Removing and Installing the Rear Roof Panel.................................................................344 Accessing the Front Towing Point...............303 Accessing the Rear Towing Point................304 Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle Automatic Transmission........................307 Recreationally Towing Your Vehicle Manual Transmission.............................306 Refueling.........................................................169 Removable Soft Top..................................348 Opening and Closing the Soft Top.............348 Removing and Installing the Soft Top.....................................................................350 Removable Vehicle Components..........334 Manually Opening the Fuel Filler Door....................................................................170 Refueling System Overview...........................169 Refueling Your Vehicle......................................169 Removable Doors..............................................339 Removable Fenders...........................................351 Removable Hard Top........................................347 Removable Roof Panels..................................343 Removable Soft Top........................................348 Removable Windows.......................................334 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of Charge...........................................................199 Remote Control Limitations......................69 Remotely Starting and Stopping the Vehicle............................................................114 Remote Start Limitations...........................114 Remote Start Precautions.........................114 Remote Start Remote Control Indicators.......................................................115 Remote Start...................................................114 Removable Windows.................................334 Removable Windows Precautions..............334 Removing and Installing the Rear Quarter Windows..........................................................334 Removing and Installing the Rear Window.............................................................337 Removing the Key Blade.............................70 Removing Your Vehicle From Storage..........................................................367 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............364 Replacement Parts Recommendation....................................495 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control..............................................................71 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter...................125 Replacing the Front Wiper Blades............91 Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades............92 Reporting Safety Defects in Canada.........................................................463 Reporting Safety Defects in the United States............................................................463 Reprogramming the Garage Door Opener............................................................141 Restarting the Engine - Automatic Transmission...............................................163 Restarting the Engine - Manual Transmission...............................................162 Resuming the Set Speed..........................233 Reverse Wipe..................................................90 Remote Start Settings.......................................115 Remote Start Settings.................................115 Setting the Remote Start Duration...............116 Switching Climate Control Auto Mode On and Off................................................................115 Switching Climate Control Last Settings On and Off.........................................................115 Switching the Heated Seat Settings On and Off.........................................................................115 Switching the Heated Steering Wheel Settings On and Off.......................................115 Removable Doors........................................339 Doors and Locks Audible Warnings............343 Removing and Installing the Doors............339 Removable Fenders.....................................351 Removable Fender Precautions....................351 Removing the Fender Flares...........................351 Removable Hard Top..................................347 Removing and Installing the Hard Top......................................................................347 Removable Roof Panels...........................343 Removable Roof Panel Precautions..........343 Removing and Installing the Center Roof Panel.................................................................344 Reverse Wipe Settings.......................................90 What Is Reverse Wipe........................................90 Roadside Assistance..................................299 Rollover Warning..........................................461 539 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode - 4x4 with Part Time Engagement.................185 Selecting a Four-Wheel Drive Mode Advanced 4x4 with 4A Mode...............186 Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode.........................242 Selecting the Audio Source......................414 Sending and Receiving a Text Message.......................................................434 Sensitive Locking Mode...............................53 Roof Rack........................................................276 Adjusting a Roof Rack Crossbar...................278 Removing and Installing the Roof Rack....................................................................276 Roof Rack Load Capacities............................278 Roof Rack Precautions....................................276 Route Guidance............................................441 Adjusting the Guidance Prompt Volume..............................................................441 Canceling Route Guidance............................442 Repeating an Instruction.................................441 Route Guidance Settings................................442 How Does Sensitive Locking Mode Work.....................................................................53 What is Sensitive Locking Mode.....................53 Service Data.....................................................23 Setting a Destination.................................440 Running-In See: Breaking-In.................................................297 Running Out of Fuel....................................168 Setting a Destination Using a Point of Interest..............................................................441 Setting a Destination Using a Predictive Destination.......................................................441 Setting a Destination Using a Recent Destination.......................................................441 Setting a Destination Using a Saved Destination.......................................................441 Setting a Destination Using the Map Screen................................................................441 Setting a Destination Using the Text Entry Screen..............................................................440 Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container..........................................................168 Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................168 S Satellite Radio...............................................418 Locating the Satellite Radio Identification Number.............................................................418 Satellite Radio Limitations.............................418 Satellite Radio Settings...................................419 Selecting a Channel..........................................419 What Is Satellite Radio....................................418 Setting a Memory Preset...........................415 Settings Data...................................................24 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap.................................................................238 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Speed.............................................................237 Setting the Blower Motor Speed.............118 Setting the Clock and Date.......................415 Setting the Cruise Control Speed..........232 Setting the Hill Descent Speed................217 Setting the Temperature............................118 Setting the Trail Control Speed..............207 Setting the Wake Word.............................428 Shifting Into Reverse....................................174 Shifting Your Vehicle Into Gear................179 Sitting in the Correct Position..................126 Sounding the Panic Alarm..........................70 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance...............................................457 Speed Control Scheduled Maintenance...........................452 Seatbelt Extensions.......................................57 Seatbelt Precautions....................................52 Seatbelt Reminder........................................54 How Does the Seatbelt Reminder Work.....................................................................54 Seatbelt Reminder Indicators.........................55 Switching the Seatbelt Reminder On and Off.........................................................................56 Seatbelts...........................................................52 Automatic Locking Mode..................................54 Seatbelt Reminder..............................................54 Sensitive Locking Mode.....................................53 Security..............................................................87 Passive Anti-Theft System...............................87 Security – Troubleshooting..............................87 Security – Troubleshooting........................87 Security – Frequently Asked Questions...........................................................88 Security – Information Messages..................87 See: Cruise Control............................................232 Stability Control Indicator........................206 540 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Steering – Troubleshooting.....................220 Stability Control...........................................204 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Indicators......................................................215 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect Precautions..................................................214 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect..........................214 Steering – Frequently Asked Questions..........................................................221 Steering – Information Messages...............220 Steering Wheel...............................................89 Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control................................................27 Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise Control, Vehicles Without: Lane Keeping Aid....................................................26 Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Cruise Control/Lane Keeping Aid.......................28 Stopping the Engine - Automatic Transmission...............................................162 Stopping the Engine - Manual Transmission................................................161 Stopping the Engine....................................154 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Troubleshooting.............................................215 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Troubleshooting.........................................215 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Frequently Asked Questions............................................216 Stabilizer Bar Disconnect – Information Messages..........................................................215 Starting and Stopping the Engine – Precautions...................................................151 Starting and Stopping the Engine...........151 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving...............................................................154 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary.........................................................154 Automatic Engine Stop....................................155 Engine Block Heater..........................................153 Starting and Stopping the Engine – Troubleshooting.............................................156 Starting the Engine............................................152 Stopping the Engine..........................................154 Storage.............................................................149 Center Console....................................................149 Glasses Holder....................................................150 Glove Compartment.........................................149 Map Pocket...........................................................150 Under Floor Storage..........................................150 Starting and Stopping the Engine – Troubleshooting.........................................156 Starting and Stopping the Engine – Frequently Asked Questions.....................158 Starting and Stopping the Engine – Information Messages..................................157 Starting and Stopping the Engine – Warning Lamps..............................................156 Storing the Doors and the Roof Panels - 4-Door........................................................352 Storing the Roof Panels - 2-Door..........359 Storing Your Vehicle...................................366 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On and Off..........................................................237 Switching Air Conditioning On and Off.....................................................................117 Switching All of the Interior Lamps On and Off...........................................................101 Switching Android Auto On and Off..................................................................438 Switching Apple CarPlay On and Off..................................................................438 Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off....................................................................161 Switching Blind Spot Information System On and Off...................................257 Switching Climate Control On and Off.....................................................................117 Start in Gear Limitations...........................159 Start in Gear Precautions..........................159 Start in Gear...................................................159 Start in Gear – Troubleshooting...................160 Start in Gear – Troubleshooting.............160 Start in Gear – Frequently Asked Questions.........................................................160 Start in Gear – Information Messages.........................................................160 Starting the Engine......................................152 Restarting the Engine After Stopping it............................................................................152 Starting a Gasoline Engine..............................152 Status Bar.......................................................425 Steering............................................................219 Electric Power Steering....................................219 Steering – Troubleshooting...........................220 541 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On and Off.....................................................89 Switching the Lane Keeping System Mode.............................................................250 Switching the Lane Keeping System On and Off.........................................................250 Switching the Rear Interior Lamps On and Off...........................................................101 Switching the Rear Window Wiper On and Off............................................................90 Switching the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect On and Off....................................................214 Switching Traction Control On and Off..................................................................202 Switching Trail Control On and Off...................................................................207 Switching Trailer Sway Control On and Off..................................................................288 Switching Trail Turn Assist On and Off....................................................................212 Symbols Glossary...........................................19 Symbols Used on Your Vehicle..................19 Switching Cross Traffic Alert On and Off..................................................................259 Switching Cruise Control On and Off...................................................................232 Switching Driver Alert On and Off.........270 Switching Four-Wheel Drive On and Off...................................................................184 Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control to Cruise Control.......................................240 Switching Hill Descent Control On and Off....................................................................217 Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off Automatic Transmission........................201 Switching Hill Start Assist On and Off Manual Transmission...............................201 Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off.....................................................................117 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off.....................................................................117 Switching Parking Aid On and Off.........222 Switching Pre-Collision Assist On and Off..................................................................264 Switching Rear Occupant Alert System On and Off...................................................136 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off.....................................................................117 Switching Repeat Mode On and Off...................................................................415 Switching Shuffle Mode On and Off...................................................................415 Switching Stability Control On and Off..................................................................205 Switching Text Message Notification On and Off.........................................................435 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off...................................................................414 Switching the Display On and Off..........417 Switching the Electronic Locking Differential On and Off...........................190 Switching the Front Interior Lamps On and Off...........................................................101 Switching the Hazard Flashers On and Off..................................................................300 Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off....................................................................118 Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Off...........................................................118 T Tailgate..............................................................84 Closing the Tailgate.............................................84 Opening the Tailgate..........................................84 Tailgate – Troubleshooting..............................86 Tailgate – Troubleshooting........................86 Tailgate – Information Messages..................86 Tailgate – Warning Lamps...............................86 Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications............393 The Better Business Bureau Auto Line Program - United States of America.........................................................461 The Mediation and Arbitration Program - Canada......................................................462 Tire Care..........................................................379 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Limitations..................................................384 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Overview......................................................383 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Precautions................................................384 542 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Trail Control – Troubleshooting...............211 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........383 Trail Control – Information Messages..........211 Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Troubleshooting............................................385 Trailer Brake Precautions..........................283 Trailer Sway Control Precautions..........288 Trailer Sway Control...................................288 Trailer Towing Hints....................................284 Trail One Pedal Drive.................................208 Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Troubleshooting........................................385 Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Information Messages................................386 Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Warning Lamps...............................................................385 Switching Trail One Pedal Drive On and Off......................................................................209 Trail One Pedal Drive Indicators..................209 Trail One Pedal Drive Limitations................208 Trail One Pedal Drive Precautions..............208 What Is Trail One Pedal Drive.......................208 Tire Replacement Requirements...........375 Tire Rotation...................................................381 Towing a Trailer Limitations....................284 Towing a Trailer Precautions...................283 Towing a Trailer............................................283 Trail One Pedal Drive – Troubleshooting.........................................210 Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting.............287 Towing Weights and Dimensions................286 Trail One Pedal Drive – Information Messages..........................................................210 Towing a Trailer – Troubleshooting........................................287 Trail Turn Assist Indicators........................212 Trail Turn Assist Limitations......................212 Trail Turn Assist Precautions....................212 Trail Turn Assist.............................................212 Towing a Trailer – Information Messages.........................................................287 Towing Weights and Dimensions..........286 Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle..............................287 Recommended Towing Weights.................286 What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight...............................................................287 Trail Turn Assist – Troubleshooting.............213 Trail Turn Assist – Troubleshooting.........................................213 Trail Turn Assist – Frequently Asked Questions..........................................................213 Trail Turn Assist – Information Messages..........................................................213 Towing Your Vehicle Precautions..........306 Towing Your Vehicle...................................306 Transfer Case Fluid Capacity and Specification................................................187 Transporting the Vehicle..........................305 Trip Computer.................................................113 Towing Your Vehicle – Troubleshooting...........................................309 Towing Your Vehicle – Troubleshooting.......................................309 Accessing the Trip Computer..........................113 Resetting the Individual Trip Values.............113 Resetting the Trip Computer...........................113 Towing Your Vehicle – Information Messages........................................................309 Traction Control Indicator........................202 Traction Control...........................................202 U Traction Control – Troubleshooting...........203 Traction Control – Troubleshooting........................................203 Under Floor Storage....................................150 Traction Control – Information Messages.........................................................203 Locating the Luggage Compartment Under Floor Storage...................................................150 Trail Control Indicators..............................208 Trail Control Limitations............................207 Trail Control....................................................207 Under Hood Fuse Box.................................310 Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box..........310 Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood Fuse Box.............................................................311 Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box............310 Trail Control – Troubleshooting......................211 Trail One Pedal Drive.......................................208 Trail One Pedal Drive – Troubleshooting.............................................210 Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™..................................................319 543 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................320 Updating the Vehicle Systems Wirelessly....................................................443 USB Ports........................................................142 Using Keyless Entry.......................................82 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems..........................................................76 Using Snow Chains......................................377 Using Start in Gear.......................................159 Using the Instrument Cluster Display Controls..........................................................112 Using the Remote Control..........................69 Using This Publication..................................18 Using the Rear Window Washer.....................93 Using the Windshield Washer.........................92 Washer Fluid Specification...............................93 Washer Precautions............................................92 Washers See: Wipers and Washers.................................90 Waxing Your Vehicle...................................364 Waypoints.......................................................441 Adding a Waypoint............................................441 Editing Waypoints..............................................441 What Are the Auxiliary Switches...........447 What Are the Instrument Cluster Indicators.....................................................109 What Are the Instrument Cluster Warning Lamps..........................................107 What Is 911 Assist..........................................68 What Is a Connected Vehicle.................409 What Is Auto-Start-Stop............................161 What Is Blind Spot Information System..........................................................256 What Is Cross Traffic Alert.......................259 What Is Cruise Control...............................232 What Is Driver Alert.....................................269 What Is Ford Protect..................................450 What Is G.O.A.T. Mode Control................242 What Is Hill Descent Control.....................217 What Is Hill Start Assist.............................201 What Is MyKey.................................................74 What Is Pre-Collision Assist....................262 What Is Remote Start..................................114 What Is Start in Gear...................................159 What Is the 360 Degree Camera...........229 What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................125 What Is the Catalytic Converter..............173 What Is the Electric Parking Brake........198 What Is the Electronic Locking Differential...................................................190 What Is the Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............................................................107 What Is the Garage Door Opener...........138 What Is the Gross Axle Weight Rating.............................................................272 What Is the Gross Combined Weight Rating.............................................................272 What Is the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.............................................................272 What Is the Information Bar.....................107 What Is the Lane Keeping System........249 V Vehicle Care..................................................360 Cleaning the Exterior.......................................360 Cleaning the Interior.........................................362 Vehicle Identification Number...............408 Locating the Vehicle Identification Number............................................................408 Vehicle Identification Number Overview.........................................................408 Vehicle Identification.................................408 Vehicle Identification Number.....................408 Vehicle Interior - 2-Door...............................32 Vehicle Interior - 4-Door..............................33 Vehicle System Updates..........................443 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.................................412 Ventilation See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Automatic Temperature Control...............117 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Manual Temperature Control....................................122 Viewing the Tire Pressures.......................385 Visual Search...................................................26 Voice Interaction Examples.....................428 Voice Interaction..........................................428 W Washer Fluid Specification......................402 Washers.............................................................92 Adding Washer Fluid...........................................93 Switching the Courtesy Wipe On and Off.........................................................................93 544 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing Index What Is the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight...........................................................272 What Is the Personal Safety System............................................................58 What Is the Power Outlet..........................144 What is the Rear Occupant Alert System...........................................................136 What Is the Rear View Camera..............226 What Is the Speedometer........................106 What Is the Stabilizer Bar Disconnect...................................................214 What Is the Tachometer............................106 What Is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........................................................383 What Is the Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge..................................107 What Is the Turbo Boost Gauge - 2.3L EcoBoost™..................................................107 What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger...........................................................147 What Is Traction Control...........................202 What Is Trail Control...................................207 What Is Trail Turn Assist.............................212 What is Voice Interaction.........................428 Wheel and Tire Information....................368 Wheel Nuts....................................................392 Wi Fi Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting..............................................93 Wipers................................................................90 Switching Windshield Wipers On and Off.........................................................................90 Wiper Precautions...............................................90 Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions..................................................147 Wireless Accessory Charger – Troubleshooting.........................................148 Wireless Accessory Charger – Information Messages..........................................................148 Wireless Accessory Charger......................147 Wireless Accessory Charger – Troubleshooting.............................................148 See: Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Name or Password........................................412 See: Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Network...........................................................409 See: Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.......412 See: Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.............................412 Window Bounce-Back...............................103 Overriding Window Bounce-Back................103 What Is Window Bounce-Back.....................103 Windows..........................................................103 Window Bounce-Back.....................................103 Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting..........................................93 Wipers and Washers – Frequently Asked Questions...........................................................93 Wipers and Washers – Warning Lamps..................................................................93 Wipers and Washers....................................90 Reverse Wipe........................................................90 Washers...................................................................92 Wipers......................................................................90 545 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing 546 2021 Bronco (TG1) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202101, First-Printing , Edition date: 202101